BEGIN:VCALENDAR
VERSION:2.0
PRODID:-//A-Chalet - ECPv6.17.3.1//NONSGML v1.0//EN
CALSCALE:GREGORIAN
METHOD:PUBLISH
X-WR-CALNAME:A-Chalet
X-ORIGINAL-URL:https://achalet.com
X-WR-CALDESC:Events for A-Chalet
REFRESH-INTERVAL;VALUE=DURATION:PT1H
X-Robots-Tag:noindex
X-PUBLISHED-TTL:PT1H
BEGIN:VTIMEZONE
TZID:America/Los_Angeles
BEGIN:DAYLIGHT
TZOFFSETFROM:-0800
TZOFFSETTO:-0700
TZNAME:PDT
DTSTART:20250309T100000
END:DAYLIGHT
BEGIN:STANDARD
TZOFFSETFROM:-0700
TZOFFSETTO:-0800
TZNAME:PST
DTSTART:20251102T090000
END:STANDARD
BEGIN:DAYLIGHT
TZOFFSETFROM:-0800
TZOFFSETTO:-0700
TZNAME:PDT
DTSTART:20260308T100000
END:DAYLIGHT
BEGIN:STANDARD
TZOFFSETFROM:-0700
TZOFFSETTO:-0800
TZNAME:PST
DTSTART:20261101T090000
END:STANDARD
BEGIN:DAYLIGHT
TZOFFSETFROM:-0800
TZOFFSETTO:-0700
TZNAME:PDT
DTSTART:20270314T100000
END:DAYLIGHT
BEGIN:STANDARD
TZOFFSETFROM:-0700
TZOFFSETTO:-0800
TZNAME:PST
DTSTART:20271107T090000
END:STANDARD
END:VTIMEZONE
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T163000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T193000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215620Z
CREATED:20261016T215620Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215620Z
UID:13942-1789144200-1789155000@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Skyline at Sundown
DESCRIPTION:Skyline at Sundown 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nSkyline at Sundown 2026 is a ticketed mountaintop dining and live-music experience at Snow Summit in Big Bear Lake. Guests ride Chair 1 to the top of the mountain for an outdoor buffet-style BBQ dinner\, live entertainment\, mountain views\, and sunset before downloading back to the Snow Summit base area. \nThe broader 2026 Skyline at Sundown season is published as running from June 5 through September 12\, 2026 on select dates. The final published dates are September 10\, September 11\, and September 12. Activities run approximately 4:30 PM to 7:30 PM\, with Chair 1 beginning guest loading at 4:30 PM and the final chair returning guests to the base by 7:30 PM.  \nA special event ticket is required\, and reservations are date specific. If you plan to attend more than one Skyline at Sundown date\, Big Bear Mountain Resort states that a separate reservation is required for each event date.  \nFor visitors traveling from outside Big Bear\, staying overnight is especially useful for this event because the experience finishes after sunset. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear communities\, allowing you to return to a mountain rental after the chairlift ride rather than immediately beginning a nighttime drive home.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Skyline at Sundown trip. \nSkyline at Sundown 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nSkyline at Sundown\n\n\n2026 season\nJune 5-September 12\, 2026\, on select dates\n\n\nFinal published dates\nSeptember 10\, 11\, and 12\, 2026\n\n\nEvent hours\n4:30 PM-7:30 PM\n\n\nVenue\nSnow Summit\n\n\nAddress\n880 Summit Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nExperience\nChairlift ride\, mountaintop buffet-style BBQ dinner\, live entertainment\, and sunset views\n\n\nChair 1 loading\nBegins at 4:30 PM\n\n\nLast chair up\n5:30 PM\n\n\nFood service\n5:30 PM-6:30 PM\n\n\nLive entertainment\n4:45 PM-7:15 PM\n\n\nDownload begins\n6:30 PM\n\n\nLast chair down\n7:30 PM\n\n\nTickets\nSpecial event ticket required; reservations are date specific\n\n\nParking\nSnow Summit parking lot\n\n\nContact\nBig Bear Mountain Resort — 844.GO2.BEAR\n\n\nOfficial website\nBig Bear Mountain Resort Skyline at Sundown\n\n\n\nBig Bear Mountain Resort’s current event calendar confirms that Skyline at Sundown is a special event requiring a ticket\, while Visit Big Bear confirms the Snow Summit address\, parking location\, operating schedule\, and September 12 end date.  \nWhat Is Skyline at Sundown?\nSkyline at Sundown takes a familiar Big Bear activity—the scenic chairlift ride at Snow Summit—and turns it into an evening dining experience at elevation. \nRather than simply riding to the top for daytime sightseeing\, guests take Chair 1 up during the late afternoon\, spend the evening at the summit for BBQ dining and live music\, watch the mountain light change toward sunset\, and then ride back to the Snow Summit base area. \nThe centerpiece is an outdoor\, buffet-style BBQ dinner. Live entertainment runs alongside the dining portion of the evening\, giving visitors time to eat\, take in the views\, listen to music\, and enjoy the mountaintop setting rather than treating the chairlift as a quick round trip.  \nIt is a particularly natural fit for couples looking for an evening activity\, families that enjoy scenic mountain experiences\, and groups of friends who want to combine dinner and entertainment without leaving the Big Bear area. \nBecause the experience takes place at the top of Snow Summit\, guests should remember that conditions at elevation can be cooler and windier than temperatures around Big Bear Lake or The Village. \nWhen Is Skyline at Sundown in 2026?\nThe published Skyline at Sundown 2026 season spans June 5 through September 12\, with events held on selected dates rather than every evening during that period.  \nFor visitors planning at the end of the season\, the final published dates are: \n\nThursday\, September 10\, 2026\nFriday\, September 11\, 2026\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\nVisit Big Bear currently lists all three dates as upcoming events\, while Big Bear Mountain Resort’s event calendar confirms the closing September 11-12 sessions and identifies September 12 as the final date.  \nDo not assume that Skyline at Sundown continues beyond September 12. No later 2026 event dates are currently published. \nWhat Is the Skyline at Sundown Schedule?\nSkyline at Sundown follows a structured chairlift\, food-service\, and entertainment schedule: \n\n\n\nTime\nActivity\n\n\n\n\n4:30 PM\nChair 1 opens for guest loading\n\n\n4:45 PM\nLive entertainment begins\n\n\n5:30 PM\nLast chair up to the summit\n\n\n5:30-6:30 PM\nBuffet-style BBQ food service\n\n\n6:30 PM\nChair 1 download begins\n\n\n7:15 PM\nLive entertainment concludes\n\n\n7:30 PM\nLast chair down; guests return to the base area\n\n\n\nThe 5:30 PM last-chair-up time is especially important. Arriving after it could prevent you from reaching the mountaintop event even though entertainment continues later in the evening. Give yourself enough time to park\, check in\, and reach the loading area well before that cutoff.  \nWho Is Performing at the Final Skyline at Sundown Events?\nBig Bear Mountain Resort has published live entertainment for the final 2026 dates. The current schedule lists: \n\nSeptember 10: Luke Metzler\nSeptember 11: Nikki Sparks\nSeptember 12: Josh Rogan\n\nLive entertainment is scheduled from approximately 4:45 PM until 7:15 PM.  \nBecause entertainment schedules can occasionally change\, check the Big Bear Mountain Resort event calendar again on your event date before traveling if seeing a particular performer is important to your plans. \nTickets\, Reservations\, Parking\, and Transportation\nDo You Need a Ticket for Skyline at Sundown?\nYes. Big Bear Mountain Resort identifies Skyline at Sundown as a special event requiring its own event ticket. A regular plan to visit Snow Summit should not be assumed to include access to the dinner experience.  \nThe current public event information reviewed for this guide does not publish a single universal 2026 ticket price. Check the live reservation system for your selected date rather than relying on an older price. \nAre Skyline at Sundown Reservations Date Specific?\nYes. Reservations are date specific. Big Bear Mountain Resort states that guests attending multiple special-event dates need a separate booking for each date.  \nThat makes it important to double-check the date shown in your confirmation\, especially during the September 10-12 closing run when events occur on consecutive evenings. \nWhere Do You Park?\nParking is listed at the Snow Summit parking lot. The resort address is: \nSnow Summit\n880 Summit Blvd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nParking availability can vary depending on resort activity and overall visitation. Since the last chair up departs at 5:30 PM\, arriving early is more important than trying to minimize time at the base area.  \nHow Early Should You Arrive?\nNo universal early-arrival requirement is published on the event listing\, but Chair 1 opens at 4:30 PM and the last chair up is at 5:30 PM. \nA practical plan is to arrive early enough to park\, complete any ticket or check-in steps\, and be ready to load without depending on the final chair. Guests traveling into Big Bear from outside the valley should add even more time for mountain traffic or road conditions. \nWhat Should You Bring to Skyline at Sundown?\nThe event takes place outdoors at the top of Snow Summit\, so pack for an evening at mountain elevation rather than only for the daytime temperature around Big Bear Lake. \n\nA warm layer or jacket: Temperatures can drop quickly toward sunset.\nClosed-toed or secure footwear: Choose shoes suitable for walking around a mountain resort environment.\nYour reservation confirmation: Keep your date-specific event details accessible.\nSun protection: Sunglasses and sunscreen can still be useful during the late-afternoon portion.\nA charged phone or camera: The event is built around elevated mountain and sunset views.\nAny personal medication or necessities: Once at the summit\, returning to your vehicle is not as simple as stepping out of a restaurant.\n\nAvoid carrying more than you need. You’ll be riding a chairlift to and from the summit\, so a compact layer and small personal bag are generally easier to manage than bulky belongings. \nIs Skyline at Sundown Good for Families?\nThe event is promoted by Big Bear Mountain Resort as an experience to share with family or friends\, and its combination of a chairlift ride\, BBQ dinner\, live music\, and views can work well for multigenerational groups.  \nHowever\, the event information reviewed for this guide does not publish a specific universal minimum age or detailed accessibility policy for Skyline at Sundown. \nFamilies with young children\, and anyone with concerns about loading or unloading a chairlift\, should review Big Bear Mountain Resort’s current lift policies or contact the resort at 844.GO2.BEAR before purchasing tickets. \nLikewise\, visitors requiring specific mobility accommodations should confirm accessibility for both Chair 1 and the summit event setup rather than assuming every part of the experience will meet their needs. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Skyline at Sundown\nArrival Day: Check Into Big Bear Lake\nConsider reaching Big Bear before the event day or arriving early enough that you do not have to move directly from mountain traffic to the chairlift. \nCheck into your cabin\, settle in\, and confirm your ticket date and the current Snow Summit event status. A relaxed afternoon gives you time to change clothes and pack a jacket before heading to the resort. \nEvent Evening: Head to Snow Summit Early\nDrive to Snow Summit with enough time to park well ahead of the 5:30 PM last-chair-up deadline. \nChair 1 begins loading at 4:30 PM\, and live entertainment starts at 4:45 PM. Getting to the summit earlier gives you more time to take in the surroundings before food service begins at 5:30 PM. \nEnjoy the buffet-style BBQ\, live music\, and changing light across the mountains. Chair download begins at 6:30 PM\, but you do not have to leave immediately; entertainment continues until 7:15 PM\, with the last chair down at 7:30 PM.  \nOnce you’re back at the Snow Summit base\, an overnight cabin gives you somewhere nearby to end the evening without turning a sunset event into a late mountain drive. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for Skyline at Sundown. \nNext Morning: Explore More of Big Bear\nUse the following morning for another Big Bear experience before departure. Depending on weather\, operating conditions\, and your interests\, that could mean spending time around Big Bear Lake\, exploring The Village\, or choosing another seasonal mountain activity. \nA slower morning is also useful for groups that stayed for the entire Skyline at Sundown program and returned to the cabin after dark. \nWhere to Stay for Skyline at Sundown\nBecause Skyline at Sundown is held at Snow Summit in Big Bear Lake\, accommodations in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear communities make the most geographic sense. There is little benefit to staying in Lake Arrowhead solely for an event centered at Snow Summit. \nA Chalet currently offers vacation rentals across Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear City\, and Lake Arrowhead\, with cabin sizes ranging from smaller one-bedroom stays to larger multi-bedroom properties. For Skyline at Sundown\, focus on the company’s Big Bear inventory.  \nCouples can compare smaller properties such as the currently listed one-bedroom Bear Den\, while families can consider two-bedroom options such as Heavenly Bay Retreat\, Jaybird Cabin\, or Maverick’s Cabin. Larger groups can compare three- and four-bedroom listings including Conklin Canopy\, Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape.  \nFor example\, A Chalet’s current listing for Conklin Canopy identifies it as a three-bedroom\, two-bathroom Big Bear Lake property with parking for up to three vehicles.  \nIf amenities such as a kitchen\, hot tub\, pet-friendly policy\, laundry facilities\, or specific parking capacity matter to your trip\, verify them on the current individual property page. Do not assume that features listed at one A Chalet cabin apply to all properties. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nSecure your Skyline at Sundown reservation first. Tickets are date specific\, so confirm your event night before choosing lodging dates. \nStay in Big Bear. Snow Summit is in Big Bear Lake\, making Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear City the practical lodging areas. \nPlan around the evening finish. The last chair down is at 7:30 PM\, so a cabin booked for that night lets you return somewhere comfortable after dark. \nChoose enough space for your group. Couples can keep the stay simple with a smaller cabin\, while families or friend groups may benefit from multiple bedrooms and a shared living area. \nVerify every important amenity. Parking capacity\, kitchens\, pet policies\, outdoor features\, and other amenities vary by cabin. \nConsider arriving one night early. This removes the stress of trying to reach a fixed chairlift departure window after a long drive into the mountains. \nCheck the event again before leaving. Mountain weather and resort operations can change. Review current Big Bear Mountain Resort information on your event day. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen is Skyline at Sundown 2026?\nThe overall season is published from June 5 through September 12\, 2026 on select dates. The final published events are September 10\, September 11\, and September 12.  \nWhere is Skyline at Sundown?\nThe event takes place at the top of Snow Summit\, 880 Summit Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. Guests use Chair 1 to travel between the base and summit.  \nDo You Need a Ticket for Skyline at Sundown?\nYes. Skyline at Sundown requires a special event ticket\, and reservations are date specific. A separate booking is required for each event date you attend.  \nWhat Does Skyline at Sundown Include?\nThe published experience includes the mountaintop setting\, an outdoor buffet-style BBQ dinner\, live entertainment\, sunset views\, and Chair 1 access associated with the event schedule. Confirm the live booking description for the exact inclusions attached to your ticket.  \nWhere Do You Park?\nParking is available at the Snow Summit parking lot. Arrive with enough time to park and reach Chair 1 well before the 5:30 PM last-chair-up deadline.  \nWhat Should I Bring?\nBring a jacket or warm layer\, secure footwear\, your reservation information\, and appropriate sun protection for the late-afternoon portion. Conditions at the top of Snow Summit may be cooler than at lake level. \nWhere Should I Stay for Skyline at Sundown?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is the most practical choice because the event is at Snow Summit. A Chalet offers cabins for couples\, families\, and larger groups throughout the Big Bear area. Browse A Chalet’s current Big Bear availability. \nPlan Your Skyline at Sundown 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nSkyline at Sundown 2026 combines several classic Big Bear experiences into one evening: a scenic chairlift ride\, mountain views\, outdoor dining\, live music\, and sunset from the top of Snow Summit. \nThe 2026 season concludes on September 12\, with final published events on September 10\, 11\, and 12. Chair 1 begins loading at 4:30 PM\, the last ride up is at 5:30 PM\, food is served from 5:30 PM to 6:30 PM\, live entertainment continues until 7:15 PM\, and the final chair returns guests to the base area at 7:30 PM.  \nReserve your date-specific ticket through Big Bear Mountain Resort\, check resort conditions before leaving\, and arrive early enough that you are not relying on the final chair to reach the summit. \nFor visitors coming from outside the mountains\, staying overnight makes the evening easier to enjoy. Check into your cabin before the event\, ride to the summit without worrying about an immediate drive home\, return after sunset\, and use the following morning for another Big Bear activity. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Skyline at Sundown 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/skyline-at-sundown-8/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T170000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T200000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215628Z
CREATED:20261016T215628Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215628Z
UID:13943-1789146000-1789156800@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Live Music at Barrel 33
DESCRIPTION:Live Music at Barrel 33 2026: September & October Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 brings acoustic afternoons and evening performances to Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake throughout September and into early October. The venue combines live music with its food\, craft beer\, and wine offerings at 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. Performance times vary by artist and date\, so checking the schedule before arriving is important.  \nAs of September 10\, the next confirmed performances begin with Matt & Emily on September 11 from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM\, followed by Local Legends on September 12. Additional September performers include Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, Matt & Emily\, and The Blackwells. Ryan Bieber is currently scheduled for October 2 and October 3.  \nOne schedule detail deserves attention: Visit Big Bear currently lists Brad on September 30 and again on October 6\, but Barrel 33’s own live event calendar currently identifies September 30 as Locals Night and a Pirate Ship Wine Cruise rather than a Brad performance\, and it does not currently display an October 6 Brad event. Because the venue is the primary source\, this guide treats those two performances as unconfirmed and recommends checking Barrel 33 directly before planning around them.  \nVisitors traveling from outside Big Bear can easily build a cabin stay around one of these performances. A Chalet currently offers Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City vacation rentals for couples\, families\, and groups\, making an overnight stay practical if you’d rather enjoy the evening without immediately driving down the mountain afterward.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear live music trip. \nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nLive Music at Barrel 33\n\n\nCurrent event period\nSeptember 2026 into early October 2026\n\n\nVenue\nBarrel 33\n\n\nAddress\n40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nPerformance times\nVary by date\, generally between 1:30 PM and 8:00 PM\n\n\nConfirmed upcoming artists\nMatt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, The Blackwells\, and Ryan Bieber\n\n\nAdmission\nNo universal live-music admission charge is currently published on Barrel 33’s event listings\n\n\nFood and drinks\nFood\, craft beer\, and wine are promoted alongside the live music\n\n\nParking\nUse appropriate public parking serving The Village and follow posted restrictions\n\n\nPhone\n909-878-0838\n\n\nRecommended arrival\nNo official early-arrival time is published; arriving 15-30 minutes before your chosen performance is a practical buffer\n\n\nOfficial venue calendar\nBarrel 33 Events\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear describes the live-music series as a recurring event from September 1 through October 6\, while Barrel 33’s own calendar confirms individual performances through October 3 at the time of writing. Because performer schedules can change\, use the venue calendar as the final source before traveling.  \nWhat Is Live Music at Barrel 33?\nLive Music at Barrel 33 is a series of individual acoustic and live-band performances at Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake’s Village area. Rather than one large concert with a fixed lineup and ticket package\, the venue schedules different performers on selected afternoons and evenings. \nBarrel 33 promotes these performances alongside food\, craft beer\, wine\, and a casual social atmosphere. That makes the series easy to add to a Big Bear itinerary without dedicating an entire day to an event.  \nSome performances are early-afternoon acoustic sets\, while many Friday and Saturday appearances run from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM. This variation is useful for travelers: an afternoon Brad performance can fit between daytime activities\, while an evening show can serve as the main plan after hiking\, lake time\, shopping\, or sightseeing. \nThe current event descriptions do not publish reserved seating arrangements\, a universal cover charge\, or a formal concert-style admission process. Visitors should therefore check the listing for their specific date rather than assuming every performance operates identically. \nWhen Is Live Music at Barrel 33 in 2026?\nThe official Barrel 33 calendar and Visit Big Bear currently confirm a substantial September schedule\, followed by Ryan Bieber performances on October 2 and October 3.  \nAs of September 10\, the confirmed upcoming schedule is: \n\n\n\nDate\nPerformer\nTime\n\n\n\n\nSeptember 11\, 2026\nMatt & Emily\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 12\, 2026\nLocal Legends\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 15\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nSeptember 17\, 2026\nTanner\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 18\, 2026\nSergio Snow\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 19\, 2026\nSergio Snow\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 22\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nSeptember 25\, 2026\nMatt & Emily\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 26\, 2026\nThe Blackwells\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 29\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nOctober 2\, 2026\nRyan Bieber\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nOctober 3\, 2026\nRyan Bieber\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\n\nThese dates and times are confirmed on Barrel 33’s current official event calendar.  \nEarlier September performances included Brad on September 1 and September 8\, Katie on September 4\, Austin Rogers on September 5\, and Dana on September 6.  \nWhat About the September 30 and October 6 Performances?\nThere is currently a discrepancy between published sources. \nVisit Big Bear’s event page lists Brad on September 30 from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM and Brad on October 6 from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM.  \nHowever\, Barrel 33’s own current calendar lists September 30 as Locals Night from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM and also lists a Pirate Ship Wine Cruise that evening. It does not currently show a September 30 Brad performance or October 6 Brad event.  \nBecause Barrel 33 is the venue and primary source\, travelers should not plan a trip specifically around September 30 or October 6 live music unless the venue confirms those performances. This is exactly the kind of schedule detail worth rechecking shortly before your visit. \nWhere Is Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake?\nBarrel 33 is located at: \nBarrel 33\n40754 Village Dr.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315\nPhone: 909-878-0838 \nVisit Big Bear confirms the venue at 40754 Village Dr. in Big Bear Lake. Barrel 33’s own event calendar also lists the Village Drive location and the same phone number.  \nThe location places visitors in The Village area\, so a live-music performance can be combined naturally with time spent walking through central Big Bear Lake before or afterward. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect?\nThe experience depends somewhat on the day you attend. Brad’s Tuesday appearances are promoted as Afternoon Acoustic sessions and currently run from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM. Friday and Saturday live-music events usually run in the early evening\, often from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM.  \nBarrel 33 promotes live music alongside: \n\nFood\nCraft beer\nWine\nIndividual acoustic artists and bands\nA casual Village setting\n\nThe venue’s current event descriptions do not publish a detailed set list\, number of performance breaks\, stage schedule\, reserved-seat system\, or performer-specific admission fee. Those details should not be invented or assumed from another date. \nIf seeing a particular artist is the reason for your trip\, check Barrel 33’s calendar on the day of the performance. Live entertainment schedules can change due to artist availability\, weather\, or venue considerations. \nTickets\, Parking\, and Transportation\nDo You Need Tickets for Live Music at Barrel 33?\nBarrel 33’s current individual live-music listings do not publish a universal ticket price or cover charge. The venue simply invites guests to attend for live music\, food\, craft beer\, and wine.  \nThat does not guarantee that every future performance will always operate without special admission terms. Check your chosen date or call 909-878-0838 if admission arrangements are important to your plans. \nWhere Should You Park?\nBarrel 33 is located in The Village area of Big Bear Lake. Visitors should use appropriate public parking serving The Village and follow all posted parking restrictions. \nWeekend evenings can bring more activity to The Village\, so leave enough time to park and walk to Barrel 33 rather than arriving exactly when the band is scheduled to begin. \nHow Early Should You Arrive?\nNo official early-arrival requirement is published. A practical approach is to reach the area 15 to 30 minutes before the scheduled start\, particularly for Friday and Saturday evening performances. \nThis is a travel-planning recommendation rather than an official Barrel 33 check-in rule. If the venue publishes different instructions for your date\, follow those instead. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nLive music at Barrel 33 requires relatively little preparation\, but a few items can make your evening easier: \n\nValid identification: Bring appropriate ID if you intend to purchase alcoholic beverages.\nA warm layer: Big Bear evenings can cool quickly\, even after a warm afternoon.\nYour chosen event details: Confirm the artist and start time before leaving.\nA transportation plan: Decide how you’ll return to your cabin if you plan to drink.\nA charged phone: Useful for navigation\, parking\, and checking last-minute venue updates.\n\nBecause the performances are at an established Village venue rather than a trail\, lake\, or mountaintop event\, you do not need specialized outdoor equipment. \nIs Live Music at Barrel 33 Family Friendly?\nThe current live-music listings do not publish a universal age restriction. However\, Barrel 33 serves craft beer and wine\, so families should not assume that every scheduled event has the same age policy. \nIf you’re considering attending with children or teenagers\, contact Barrel 33 at 909-878-0838 to confirm the venue’s current policy for that particular performance. \nSimilarly\, no detailed accessibility information is included in the individual live-music listings. Visitors requiring specific accommodations should contact the venue directly before arrival. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Live Music at Barrel 33\nArrival Day: Check Into Big Bear\nIf you’re coming from outside the mountains for a Friday or Saturday performance\, consider arriving earlier in the afternoon rather than trying to time a mountain drive around a 5:00 PM start. \nCheck into your cabin\, unpack\, and review the latest Barrel 33 listing. That gives your group time to settle in before heading toward The Village. \nBefore the Music: Explore The Village\nArriving in The Village ahead of the performance gives you flexibility if parking takes longer than expected. Spend some time walking around the area and then head to Barrel 33 before your chosen artist begins. \nFor Tuesday afternoon performances with Brad\, the 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM schedule leaves plenty of time for another Big Bear activity afterward. Friday and Saturday shows running until 8:00 PM work better as the main evening plan.  \nAfter the Performance: Return to Your Cabin\nAfter an evening performance\, an overnight cabin provides an easy place for your group to wind down without immediately starting a long drive out of Big Bear. \nIf anyone has been drinking alcohol\, use a safe transportation plan rather than driving. Planning that before the performance keeps the evening simple. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Barrel 33 live-music dates. \nNext Morning: Enjoy More of Big Bear\nUse the following morning for another local experience before departure. Depending on the season and conditions\, that could mean time around Big Bear Lake\, an appropriate trail outing\, or a relaxed morning in The Village. \nIf you’re attending Ryan Bieber on October 2 or October 3\, remember that early October mountain conditions can differ noticeably from September. Check the weather before packing and before any outdoor plans. \nWhere to Stay for Live Music at Barrel 33\nBecause Barrel 33 is in Big Bear Lake\, visitors should concentrate on Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear City accommodations. Staying in Lake Arrowhead solely for an evening at Barrel 33 would add unnecessary mountain travel. \nA Chalet currently lists vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, with properties suited to different group sizes. Its current collection includes two-bedroom stays such as Heavenly Bay Retreat\, Jaybird Cabin\, and Maverick’s Cabin; three-bedroom Conklin Canopy; and four-bedroom choices including Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape.  \nFor a couple attending a single acoustic or evening performance\, a smaller cabin can keep the trip straightforward. A group of friends planning dinner\, live music\, and another day in Big Bear may appreciate additional bedrooms and common living space. \nA Chalet’s current site also lists a one-bedroom Bear Den\, providing another smaller-stay option.  \nDo not assume that every property has identical amenities. If a kitchen\, hot tub\, pet-friendly policy\, laundry facilities\, or a particular number of parking spaces matters to your trip\, verify that feature on the current property listing before booking. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nChoose your performer first. Start with the live schedule so you know whether you’re planning around a Tuesday acoustic afternoon\, a Thursday performance\, or a Friday or Saturday evening show. \nVerify the date directly with Barrel 33. This is especially important for September 30 and October 6 because the tourism calendar and venue calendar currently conflict. \nStay in the Big Bear area. Barrel 33 is in Big Bear Lake\, making Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City the logical lodging choice. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Couples can compare smaller stays\, while groups of friends may prefer several bedrooms and shared gathering space. \nCheck parking rules at your cabin. If several friends are arriving in separate vehicles\, verify the property’s maximum allowed vehicle count. \nPlan for the evening after the music. An overnight stay is particularly useful for shows finishing at 8:00 PM and for anyone who wants to enjoy Barrel 33’s beverage selection without a long drive afterward. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen is Live Music at Barrel 33 in 2026?\nThe current series includes numerous September dates and confirmed performances on October 2 and October 3. Visit Big Bear lists the broader recurring period through October 6\, but Barrel 33’s own current calendar should be treated as the final source for individual performances.  \nWhere is Live Music at Barrel 33?\nThe performances take place at Barrel 33\, 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315.  \nWho is performing at Barrel 33 in September 2026?\nUpcoming confirmed September performers include Matt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, and The Blackwells. Performance dates and times vary.  \nDo you need tickets for the live music?\nNo universal ticket price or cover charge is currently published for the standard live-music performances. Check Barrel 33’s calendar or call the venue before attending if admission terms are important to your trip. \nWhere do you park for Barrel 33?\nBarrel 33 is in The Village area. Use appropriate public parking serving The Village\, obey posted restrictions\, and allow extra time on busy evenings. \nCan kids attend Live Music at Barrel 33?\nThe current event listings do not publish a universal age restriction. Because Barrel 33 serves beer and wine\, contact the venue to confirm its current policy before bringing younger guests. \nWhere should I stay for Live Music at Barrel 33?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is the most convenient area. A Chalet currently offers both smaller cabins and multi-bedroom vacation rentals in the Big Bear area. Browse A Chalet’s current availability for your music weekend. \nPlan Your Live Music at Barrel 33 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 gives Big Bear visitors an easy way to add local entertainment to a mountain trip without committing to an all-day festival. The remaining September schedule includes afternoon acoustic sessions and evening performances by Matt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, and The Blackwells\, followed by Ryan Bieber on October 2 and October 3.  \nCheck the venue calendar before traveling\, especially if you’re planning around a particular artist. The September 30 and October 6 entries shown by Visit Big Bear are not currently matched by Barrel 33’s primary event calendar\, so those dates should be confirmed directly with the venue.  \nFor travelers coming from outside the mountains\, an overnight stay can make the experience much easier. Arrive earlier\, check into your cabin\, spend time in The Village\, enjoy the performance\, and return somewhere comfortable afterward instead of immediately driving out of Big Bear. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Live Music at Barrel 33 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/live-music-at-barrel-33-31/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T180000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T210000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215627Z
CREATED:20261016T215627Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215627Z
UID:13944-1789149600-1789160400@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Live Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany's Bistro
DESCRIPTION:Live Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro 2026: Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro 2026 is a recurring Friday and Saturday evening music series at Chateau Big Bear in Big Bear Lake. The current venue schedule lists live music every Friday and Saturday from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM\, with pianist Mike Cross and rotating guest performers playing beneath the Chateau’s restored Tiffany dome. \nTiffany’s Bistro is located inside Chateau Big Bear at 42200 Moonridge Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. The bistro is currently open Thursday\, Friday\, and Saturday from 4:00 PM to 11:00 PM\, with food served until 9:30 PM. That makes it easy to combine dinner\, drinks\, and live music in one evening. \nVisit Big Bear’s current event calendar shows the music series continuing through the 2026-27 winter season\, with upcoming dates beginning September 11 and 12 and continuing on Fridays and Saturdays into March 2027. \nFor travelers coming from outside the mountains\, an overnight Big Bear stay can make the evening more relaxed. Instead of driving down the mountain after a 9:00 PM set\, guests can return to a nearby A Chalet cabin and continue their trip the following morning. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear live-music weekend. \nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro\n\n\nSchedule\nFridays and Saturdays\n\n\nLive music hours\n6:00 PM-9:00 PM\n\n\nVenue\nTiffany’s Bistro at Chateau Big Bear\n\n\nAddress\n42200 Moonridge Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nRegular featured artist\nMike Cross with rotating guest performers\n\n\nBistro hours\nThursday-Saturday\, 4:00 PM-11:00 PM\n\n\nFood service\n4:00 PM-9:30 PM\n\n\nAdmission\nNo universal live-music cover charge is published on the current official venue page\n\n\nParking\nParking available at Chateau Big Bear\n\n\nPhone\n909-866-6666\n\n\nOfficial venue page\nTiffany’s Bistro at Chateau Big Bear\n\n\n\nThe official venue currently states that Mike Cross and selected guests perform every Friday and Saturday from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. Visit Big Bear independently lists the same recurring event and venue address. \nWhat Is Live Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro?\nThe event is a recurring live-music night inside Tiffany’s Bistro\, the restaurant and lounge at Chateau Big Bear. Rather than functioning as a stand-alone concert with a fixed touring lineup\, it is designed as an ongoing dinner-and-music experience. \nThe Chateau has a long connection with performing arts. Its own current event description recalls productions and entertainment held there during the late 1980s and early 1990s\, including opera\, theater\, and dance events. Today\, the venue continues that tradition through weekly live music beneath its distinctive stained-glass dome. \nPianist Mike Cross is a regular headliner. Chateau Big Bear says he performs with a rotating selection of guest musicians\, including vocalists and instrumentalists. The venue’s recent guide describes musical styles that can include blues\, jazz standards\, and original material. \nBecause the performers may change from one weekend to another\, guests interested in a particular artist should check Chateau Big Bear’s current social media or contact the venue rather than assuming every Friday and Saturday has the same lineup. \nWhen Is Live Music at Chateau Big Bear in 2026?\nThe current recurring schedule is simple: \n\nFridays: 6:00 PM-9:00 PM\nSaturdays: 6:00 PM-9:00 PM\n\nAs of September 10\, Visit Big Bear lists upcoming 2026 dates including: \n\nFriday\, September 11\nSaturday\, September 12\nFriday\, September 18\nSaturday\, September 19\nFriday\, September 25\nSaturday\, September 26\nFriday\, October 2\nSaturday\, October 3\nFriday\, October 9\nSaturday\, October 10\n\nThe calendar continues with additional Friday and Saturday performances later in fall and winter and currently shows the recurring series extending into March 2027. \nBecause this is an ongoing venue series rather than a one-time concert\, check the official Tiffany’s Bistro page before your trip for weekly performer updates. \nWhere Is Tiffany’s Bistro?\nLive music takes place at: \nTiffany’s Bistro at Chateau Big Bear\n42200 Moonridge Road\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nChateau Big Bear sits in Big Bear Lake’s Moonridge area. Visit Big Bear confirms the same address and identifies Tiffany’s Bistro as the hotel’s restaurant\, cocktail\, wine\, and live-music venue. \nThe venue phone number is 909-866-6666. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect?\nThe experience combines three elements: live music\, dinner service\, and the setting beneath Chateau Big Bear’s stained-glass Tiffany dome. \nMusic generally runs from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM\, while Tiffany’s Bistro opens at 4:00 PM and serves food until 9:30 PM. Guests can therefore arrive before the music begins for an early meal or plan dinner during the performance. \nThe venue serves casual bistro fare along with cocktails and wine. Chateau Big Bear also promotes its own private-label wines\, while its current bar program includes classic and house cocktails. \nThe music lineup is not identical every weekend. Mike Cross is the recurring featured performer\, but guest musicians rotate. Chateau Big Bear advises visitors to follow its social accounts for the latest weekly artist announcements. \nWhat Is Special About the Tiffany Dome?\nThe dome above Tiffany’s Bistro is one of the most distinctive features of the space. Chateau Big Bear says the stained-glass dome has been extensively restored and remains a centerpiece of the room. \nThe venue’s history article says the dome originally came from Paris and was later dismantled and reconstructed in Big Bear Lake. Chateau Big Bear reports that a recent restoration project cost roughly $500\,000. \nFor guests choosing between a conventional restaurant and somewhere with more atmosphere\, the combination of live music and the historic dome is part of what distinguishes Tiffany’s Bistro. \nDo You Need Tickets for Live Music at Tiffany’s Bistro?\nThe current official venue page does not publish a universal live-music ticket price or regular cover charge for the Friday and Saturday series. \nTiffany’s Bistro is open to the public\, not just hotel guests\, so visitors can come for dinner\, drinks\, and live music without staying at Chateau Big Bear itself. \nBecause individual special events or holiday weekends may operate differently\, call 909-866-6666 if you need to confirm reservations\, seating policies\, cover charges\, or special-event arrangements for a specific date. \nShould You Make a Dinner Reservation?\nThe current public event information does not state that every live-music night requires a reservation. However\, if your evening depends on having a dinner table during a particular set\, contacting the venue ahead of time is sensible. \nThe live music falls directly within dinner service\, so Friday and Saturday evenings may draw both hotel guests and local visitors. \nA practical schedule would be to arrive between 5:00 PM and 5:30 PM for dinner before the 6:00 PM music begins. This is a planning recommendation\, not an official arrival requirement. \nWhere Do You Park?\nVisit Big Bear’s event listing states that parking is available at Chateau Big Bear. \nNo separate shuttle or event-specific remote parking system is currently published. Follow posted signs and any instructions from hotel staff when you arrive. \nAllowing a little extra time is useful on Friday and Saturday evenings\, especially if you want to be seated before the music starts. \nIs Tiffany’s Bistro Open Before the Music Starts?\nYes. Tiffany’s Bistro currently opens at 4:00 PM on Thursday\, Friday\, and Saturday. Live music begins at 6:00 PM on Friday and Saturday\, while food service continues until 9:30 PM and the bistro remains open until 11:00 PM. \nThe venue also currently advertises a happy hour from 4:00 PM to 6:00 PM\, which lines up directly with the period before the live music begins. \nHappy-hour offerings can change\, so check the current menu or venue information before planning around a specific drink or food special. \nIs Live Music at Chateau Big Bear Family-Friendly?\nThe current event listing does not publish a universal minimum age for the live-music series. Tiffany’s Bistro operates as a restaurant and bar serving food\, cocktails\, and wine. \nFamilies planning to bring children should contact the venue before visiting if age policies\, seating arrangements\, or evening atmosphere are important to their plans. Do not assume bar-area policies based on another Big Bear restaurant. \nThe current event pages also do not provide detailed accessibility information for the live-music seating area. Guests needing a specific accommodation should call Chateau Big Bear at 909-866-6666 in advance. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Live Music at Chateau Big Bear\nFriday: Check In and Head to Tiffany’s Bistro\nArrive in Big Bear during the afternoon\, check into your cabin\, and give yourself time to settle in before heading to Moonridge. \nIf you want dinner before the music begins\, arrive at Tiffany’s Bistro ahead of the 6:00 PM set. Alternatively\, plan your meal during the performance since food service continues until 9:30 PM. \nAfter the music ends at 9:00 PM\, return to your cabin rather than immediately starting a nighttime drive out of the mountains. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your live-music weekend. \nSaturday: Enjoy Big Bear During the Day\nKeep Saturday open for the part of Big Bear that interests you most. Depending on the season and current operating conditions\, that could include time around Big Bear Lake\, hiking\, The Village\, or another local attraction. \nIf you enjoyed Friday’s performance\, the recurring schedule gives you the option of returning Saturday evening for another live-music session. Because guest performers can rotate\, the experience may not be identical both nights. \nSunday: Relax Before Departure\nA two-night cabin stay gives you a slower Sunday morning rather than requiring a late-night departure after Saturday’s show. Have breakfast\, enjoy one final Big Bear activity\, and then begin the drive home during daylight if your schedule allows. \nWhere to Stay for Live Music at Chateau Big Bear\nBecause Chateau Big Bear is on Moonridge Road in Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear Lake is the most straightforward lodging area for this event. Big Bear City can also work for visitors planning activities throughout the valley. \nA Chalet currently offers rentals across Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City. Current featured options include Heavenly Bay Retreat with two bedrooms and two baths\, Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms and one bath\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths\, and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths. \nFor larger groups\, A Chalet’s current collection also shows Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape\, each currently listed with four bedrooms and three baths. Smaller parties can also compare options such as Bear Den. \nBedroom counts are only one part of choosing a rental. Verify current occupancy limits\, parking\, kitchens\, pet policies\, outdoor amenities\, and other features on the live individual listing before booking. \nFor a live-music weekend\, the main benefit of staying nearby is schedule flexibility: enjoy dinner and the full 6:00-9:00 PM music set without building the evening around an immediate drive down the mountain. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking a Live-Music Weekend Cabin\nChoose Friday\, Saturday\, or both. Live music currently runs on both evenings from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nCheck the weekly artist lineup. Mike Cross is a recurring featured performer\, but guest musicians rotate. \nConfirm dining plans. If you want a table at a specific time\, contact Tiffany’s Bistro before the weekend rather than assuming walk-in availability. \nStay in Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City. These destinations are more geographically relevant to Moonridge than Lake Arrowhead for this event. \nVerify cabin parking. Groups arriving in several vehicles should check each rental’s permitted vehicle count. \nConsider two nights. Staying Friday and Saturday gives you a full mountain day between evening performances. \nCheck weather before traveling. The recurring series continues into winter\, when mountain road and weather conditions can materially affect travel plans. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Live Music at Chateau Big Bear in 2026?\nLive music is currently scheduled every Friday and Saturday from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM\, with the recurring Visit Big Bear calendar extending into March 2027. \nWhere Is Live Music at Tiffany’s Bistro?\nThe performances take place at Tiffany’s Bistro inside Chateau Big Bear\, 42200 Moonridge Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. \nWho Performs at Chateau Big Bear?\nMike Cross is the venue’s recurring featured musician\, joined by rotating guest performers. Chateau Big Bear recommends checking its social channels for weekly lineup updates. \nDo You Need Tickets?\nThe current official venue information does not publish a universal ticket price or regular cover charge for the Friday and Saturday music series. Contact Tiffany’s Bistro for any date-specific requirements. \nCan You Eat During the Live Music?\nYes. Tiffany’s Bistro currently serves food from 4:00 PM to 9:30 PM\, while live music runs from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nIs Parking Available?\nYes. Visit Big Bear states that parking is available at Chateau Big Bear. \nWhere Should I Stay for Live Music at Chateau Big Bear?\nBig Bear Lake is the most practical general lodging area for an event on Moonridge Road. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City for couples\, families\, and larger groups. \nBrowse A Chalet availability for your live-music dates. \nPlan Your Live Music at Chateau Big Bear 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro 2026 offers a straightforward Friday or Saturday night plan: arrive for dinner or drinks\, settle in beneath the restored Tiffany dome\, and hear Mike Cross and rotating guest musicians from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nThe venue is at 42200 Moonridge Road in Big Bear Lake\, parking is available at Chateau Big Bear\, and Tiffany’s Bistro currently serves food until 9:30 PM. The live-music series continues regularly through fall and winter\, so check the latest performer information before choosing your weekend. \nFor travelers coming from outside Big Bear\, staying overnight turns the evening into a more comfortable mountain trip. Check into a cabin before the show\, enjoy the full performance without rushing toward a late-night departure\, and leave the following day open for Big Bear Lake\, Moonridge\, or another local activity. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Live Music at Chateau Big Bear 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/live-music-at-chateau-big-bear-tiffanys-bistro-17/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T183000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260911T200000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215620Z
CREATED:20261016T215620Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215620Z
UID:13945-1789151400-1789156800@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Sunset Reflection Hike
DESCRIPTION:Sunset Reflection Hike 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nSunset Reflection Hike 2026 is a guided evening hike on Woodland Trail in the Big Bear area\, designed around golden hour and the transition from daylight into dusk. The hike is rated easy\, covers approximately 1.5 miles\, and is intended for a broad range of experience levels. \nThe current Visit Big Bear calendar shows the final published 2026 Sunset Reflection Hike on Friday\, September 11\, 2026. The event runs from 6:30 PM to 8:00 PM at Woodland Trail\, 41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear City\, CA 92314.  \nParticipants are asked to arrive 10 minutes early for check-in and a trail briefing. Space is limited\, advance reservations are encouraged\, leashed dogs are allowed\, and the recommended minimum age is 8. The published event terms also state that there are no refunds and that late arrivals may not be accommodated. \nBecause the hike ends around dusk\, an overnight Big Bear stay can be more comfortable than immediately beginning a drive out of the mountains. A Chalet currently offers cabins in both Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, giving couples\, families\, and small groups several lodging sizes to compare.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Sunset Reflection Hike getaway. \nSunset Reflection Hike 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nSunset Reflection Hike\n\n\nOrganizer\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\nRemaining 2026 date\nSeptember 11\, 2026\n\n\nTime\n6:30 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nTrail\nWoodland Trail\n\n\nAddress\n41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear City\, CA 92314\n\n\nDifficulty\nEasy\n\n\nDistance\n1.5 miles\n\n\nRecommended minimum age\n8+\n\n\nDogs\nAllowed on leash\n\n\nArrival\n10 minutes early for check-in and trail briefing\n\n\nParking\nWoodland Trail parking area\n\n\nParking requirement\nAdventure Pass required according to the event information provided\n\n\nReservations\nSpace is limited; reserve in advance\n\n\nRefund policy\nNo refunds\n\n\nLate arrivals\nMay not be accommodated\n\n\nBooking website\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear currently lists Sunset Reflection Hike as a Big Bear Hiking Adventures event running from August 21 through September 11\, with September 11 shown as the final remaining occurrence.  \nWhat Is the Sunset Reflection Hike?\nThe Sunset Reflection Hike is a guided evening walk intended to let participants experience Woodland Trail during golden hour and dusk rather than simply completing a daytime hike. \nThe experience is built around a slower pace. Participants walk beneath the pines as the evening light changes\, with time to enjoy the mountain setting instead of treating the trail like a fitness challenge. \nThe event is described as appropriate for all experience levels and especially suited to nature lovers\, couples\, solo travelers\, photographers\, and visitors who want a calm outdoor activity. \nBig Bear Hiking Adventures also emphasizes responsible trail use and Leave No Trace principles in its broader guided-hiking work. Visit Big Bear notes that the company supports conservation organizations and became certified through the Big Bear Valley Green Business Program in April 2026.  \nWhen Is the Sunset Reflection Hike in 2026?\nThe published event series began on August 21\, 2026 and included several late-summer dates through September. \nAs of September 10\, Visit Big Bear lists just one remaining Sunset Reflection Hike: \n\nFriday\, September 11\, 2026 — 6:30 PM to 8:00 PM\n\nThe Visit Big Bear events calendar confirms September 11 as the final currently listed date in the 2026 series.  \nNo later 2026 Sunset Reflection Hike date is currently published in the sources reviewed. If the organizer adds another hike\, the Big Bear Hiking Adventures booking page should be treated as the most current place to confirm availability. \nWhere Is the Sunset Reflection Hike?\nThe hike takes place on Woodland Trail\, with the event address listed as: \n41948 N Shore Dr.\nBig Bear City\, CA 92314 \nVisit Big Bear’s current directory and events pages both associate the Sunset Reflection Hike with this Woodland Trail location.  \nWoodland Trail is on the north side of Big Bear Lake. Travelers should navigate to the designated Woodland Trail parking area and follow any instructions supplied with their reservation. \nWhat Can You Expect on the Hike?\nThe Sunset Reflection Hike covers approximately 1.5 miles and is categorized as easy. That makes it more accessible than a long or steep mountain trek\, although participants should still be comfortable walking on a natural trail surface. \nThe experience takes place during the transition toward dusk\, so the atmosphere changes noticeably over the 90-minute outing. The focus is on evening scenery\, pine forest\, mountain air\, changing light\, and a quiet guided walk. \nThis is not advertised as a strenuous summit hike\, technical trek\, or fast-paced trail workout. Its appeal is the setting and timing. \nPhotographers may also appreciate the golden-hour schedule\, though anyone bringing a camera should keep gear light enough to comfortably carry on the trail. \nDo You Need Reservations?\nYes\, advance booking is strongly advisable. The event information states that space is limited to keep the experience personal and enjoyable. \nReservations are handled through Big Bear Hiking Adventures. \nThe current public information reviewed does not provide a reliable event-specific ticket price that can be independently confirmed for the September 11 Sunset Reflection Hike. Travelers should use the live booking page for the current price and remaining availability rather than relying on a price from another Big Bear Hiking Adventures outing. \nThe published terms also state that the hike has a no-refund policy. Review all booking conditions before paying. \nWhat Time Should You Arrive?\nParticipants should arrive 10 minutes before the scheduled start. \nFor the September 11 hike\, that means planning to be at the meeting area by approximately 6:20 PM for the 6:30 PM departure. \nThe early arrival period is used for check-in and a trail briefing. The event information specifically warns that late arrivals may not be accommodated\, so this is one activity where arriving after the start time could mean missing the hike entirely. \nParking and Adventure Pass Information\nParking is listed at the Woodland Trail parking lot. \nThe event information also states that an Adventure Pass is required. Visitors driving to the trail should make sure they have the appropriate pass before the hike rather than assuming event registration covers parking. \nBecause parking rules and federal recreation requirements can change\, check the organizer’s confirmation and current posted signage at the trailhead before leaving your vehicle. \nAllow enough time to park\, display any required pass correctly\, gather your gear\, and reach the check-in location by the requested 10-minute-early arrival time. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nThe organizer’s published packing guidance is straightforward: \n\nComfortable walking or hiking shoes\nWater\nLight layers for changing mountain temperatures\nAn optional journal or camera\nAny necessary medications\, such as an inhaler or EpiPen\n\nLayers matter because the hike begins around sunset and continues into the cooler evening period. \nYou do not need to bring extensive hiking equipment for a 1.5-mile easy guided walk\, but footwear should still be suitable for dirt and uneven natural surfaces. \nCan You Bring a Dog?\nYes. The event information states that dogs are allowed on leash. \nOwners should bring whatever their dog needs for the outing\, keep the animal under control\, and follow trail etiquette throughout the hike. \nBefore booking\, consider whether your dog is comfortable around groups\, unfamiliar people\, other dogs\, and changing light conditions. A dog being technically permitted does not necessarily mean every pet will enjoy an organized evening hike. \nIs the Sunset Reflection Hike Good for Kids?\nThe published minimum recommended age is 8 years and older. \nBecause the trail is rated easy and covers only 1.5 miles\, it may work well for older children who are comfortable walking outdoors for approximately 90 minutes. \nParents should also consider the evening timing. The hike finishes around 8:00 PM\, when daylight may be fading\, and younger participants need to be comfortable continuing on a trail as conditions get darker. \nIf your child has mobility\, medical\, or trail-safety needs\, contact Big Bear Hiking Adventures before reserving. \nIs the Sunset Reflection Hike the Same as Hike Big Bear Under the Stars?\nNo. They are separate guided experiences even though both use Woodland Trail and are organized through Big Bear Hiking Adventures. \nThe Sunset Reflection Hike runs from 6:30 PM to 8:00 PM and emphasizes golden hour\, sunset\, and the transition into dusk. \nHike Big Bear Under the Stars is a later night-hiking experience focused more specifically on exploring the forest after dark and viewing the night sky. \nVisit Big Bear lists both experiences separately in Big Bear Hiking Adventures’ current event directory.  \nTravelers looking for softer evening light and sunset photography may prefer the Sunset Reflection Hike\, while those specifically interested in nighttime conditions may prefer the Under the Stars experience. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Sunset Reflection Hike\nFriday Afternoon: Arrive in Big Bear\nSince the final 2026 hike is scheduled for Friday evening\, arrive in Big Bear with enough time to check in\, organize your hiking gear\, and reach Woodland Trail without rushing. \nA late-afternoon arrival can work\, but do not plan your mountain drive so tightly that minor traffic or parking delays put you at risk of missing the 6:30 PM departure. \nFriday Evening: Hike at Golden Hour\nReach Woodland Trail by about 6:20 PM\, complete check-in\, and join the guided 1.5-mile hike from 6:30 PM to 8:00 PM. \nAfter the hike\, return to your cabin\, change into warmer clothes\, eat dinner\, and enjoy a quieter evening rather than immediately beginning a nighttime mountain drive. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for the September 11 Sunset Reflection Hike. \nSaturday: Explore Big Bear in Daylight\nUse Saturday for a longer daytime experience. Depending on weather and current operating conditions\, that could include another appropriate trail\, time around Big Bear Lake\, The Village\, or another scheduled local attraction. \nIf you prefer another guided hike\, check Big Bear Hiking Adventures’ current schedule rather than assuming every public hike runs each weekend. \nSunday: Relax Before Heading Home\nA two-night stay gives you a slower Sunday morning after the Friday evening hike and a full Saturday in the mountains. Have breakfast\, enjoy one final activity\, and then begin the drive home without compressing the entire visit into one evening. \nWhere to Stay for the Sunset Reflection Hike\nBecause Woodland Trail is in the Big Bear area\, Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City are the most practical A Chalet destinations for this event. \nA Chalet currently offers cabins in both areas\, with featured options including Heavenly Bay Retreat with two bedrooms and two baths\, Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms and one bath\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths\, and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths.  \nLarger groups can also compare current four-bedroom options such as Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape\, while Bear Den is currently listed as a one-bedroom option.  \nFor a sunset-focused trip\, staying nearby is useful because the event does not end until 8:00 PM. Instead of driving directly out of the mountains in the dark\, you can return to a cabin\, have dinner\, and continue your Big Bear itinerary the next morning. \nVerify current occupancy\, parking capacity\, kitchen facilities\, pet rules\, and other amenities on the individual listing before booking. These details vary by property. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear availability. \nTips for Booking a Sunset Hike Weekend Cabin\nBook the hike first. Space is limited\, and September 11 is the final currently published 2026 date. \nPlan to arrive in Big Bear well before 6:20 PM. The organizer requests arrival 10 minutes early\, and late participants may not be accommodated. \nStay in Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City. These destinations are geographically appropriate for Woodland Trail. \nCheck parking at both the trail and cabin. The trail listing says an Adventure Pass is required\, while each rental has its own vehicle limits. \nPack an evening layer. Mountain temperatures can cool quickly once the sun drops. \nConsider a second night. A Friday hike followed by a full Saturday gives you more time to enjoy Big Bear without rushing. \nVerify the live booking page. Current price\, remaining capacity\, and any last-minute instructions should come from Big Bear Hiking Adventures. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Sunset Reflection Hike in 2026?\nAs of September 10\, the final currently published 2026 Sunset Reflection Hike is Friday\, September 11 from 6:30 PM to 8:00 PM.  \nWhere Is the Sunset Reflection Hike?\nThe hike takes place on Woodland Trail at 41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear City\, CA 92314.  \nHow Difficult Is the Hike?\nThe event is rated easy and covers approximately 1.5 miles. It is designed for a broad range of hiking experience levels. \nDo You Need a Reservation?\nAdvance reservations are recommended because space is limited. Use the Big Bear Hiking Adventures booking page for current availability and pricing. \nCan Kids Join the Sunset Reflection Hike?\nThe published minimum recommended age is 8+. Parents should consider whether their child is comfortable walking for roughly 90 minutes and being on a trail as daylight fades. \nCan Dogs Join the Hike?\nYes. Dogs are permitted if kept on leash. \nWhere Should I Stay for the Sunset Reflection Hike?\nBig Bear Lake or Big Bear City is the most practical lodging area. A Chalet currently offers cabins in both destinations\, ranging from one-bedroom stays to larger four-bedroom options.  \nBrowse A Chalet availability for your Sunset Reflection Hike dates. \nPlan Your Sunset Reflection Hike 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Sunset Reflection Hike 2026 offers a quieter way to experience Big Bear’s forest landscape: a guided 1.5-mile walk on Woodland Trail during golden hour and dusk. \nAs of September 10\, the final published 2026 outing is September 11 from 6:30 PM to 8:00 PM. Participants should arrive 10 minutes early\, wear comfortable walking or hiking shoes\, bring water and layers\, and reserve in advance because space is limited.  \nFor travelers coming from outside the mountains\, an overnight cabin makes the evening easier to enjoy. Arrive before the hike\, watch the light change through the pines\, return to your cabin afterward\, and leave Saturday open for another Big Bear experience. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the Sunset Reflection Hike 2026. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/sunset-reflection-hike/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215623Z
CREATED:20261016T215623Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215623Z
UID:13948-1789171200-1789171200@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Plein Air Art Competition
DESCRIPTION:Plein Air Art Competition 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 is Visit Big Bear’s third annual plein air competition and a month-long celebration of outdoor painting across the Big Bear Valley. Artists can create their competition work between September 12 and October 10\, 2026\, with gallery events beginning in September and the main Competition Gallery and awards scheduled for October. \nRegistered artists first complete online registration\, then visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard to have their painting substrates stamped. The Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. Artists may have multiple substrates stamped\, but the competition information says there is one submission per artist for galleries.  \nThe main submitted works will be displayed at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake. Visit Big Bear lists the principal competition awards as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. The awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nThis event is particularly well suited to an overnight or multi-night Big Bear trip because artists are intentionally given time to explore the valley\, choose landscapes\, return to locations\, and continue developing their work. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City that can serve as a base between painting sessions\, gallery visits\, and other fall activities.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear art trip. \nPlein Air Art Competition 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nBig Bear Plein Air Art Competition & Festival of Artist Events\n\n\nOrganizer\nVisit Big Bear\n\n\nCompetition year\n2026 — 3rd annual event\n\n\nCreate period\nSeptember 12-October 10\, 2026\n\n\nArtist registration\nOnline registration required before arrival\n\n\nMaximum artists\n75 participants\n\n\nSubstrate stamping\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n\n\nVisitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nVisitor Center hours\nDaily\, 9:00 AM-5:00 PM\n\n\nCompetition Gallery\nDestination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\n\n\nMain gallery period\nOctober 14-18\, 2026\n\n\nAwards ceremony\nOctober 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM\n\n\nMain awards\n1st: $2\,000; 2nd: $1\,500; 3rd: $500\n\n\nPublic gallery access\nPublic invited; artwork available for purchase\n\n\nParking\nNo single competition-wide parking plan is published; follow instructions and posted rules at each location\n\n\nOfficial website\nVisit Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear confirms the September 12-October 10 creation period and lists every day in that period as part of the recurring competition calendar.  \nWhat Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition?\nThe Plein Air Art Competition invites artists to create landscapes outdoors in the Big Bear Valley\, working directly from the scenery rather than solely from photographs or studio references. \nWhat distinguishes the Big Bear format is its extended creation period. Artists do not have to arrive on one morning and complete their work under a short time limit. Visit Big Bear gives participants from September 12 through October 10 to explore\, select a location\, paint\, and potentially return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nThat format encourages artists to experience the valley during early fall\, when the character of the landscape can change with light\, weather\, and seasonal conditions. Participants choose their own Big Bear landscape subject rather than being assigned one specific painting location for the main competition. \nFor 2026\, Visit Big Bear has expanded the program with a Festival of Artist Events. Registration in the main competition includes access to the highlighted festival activities\, and artists may choose to participate in one or several. The competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhen Is the Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nThe competition is not a single-day event. Instead\, it unfolds across several phases. \nSeptember 12-October 10: Create\nArtists may visit Big Bear at any point during this period to create their competition work. Before arriving\, participants are instructed to complete online registration. \nAfter reaching Big Bear\, artists must stop at the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center\, 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, to have their painting substrates stamped. Visit Big Bear says artists can have as many substrates stamped as they wish. Completed competition artwork is then returned to the Visitor Center for storage before the gallery opens.  \nOctober 14-18: Competition Gallery\nVisit Big Bear’s dedicated competition page identifies the main gallery and awards period as October 14-18. The event calendar separately shows the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition Gallery running during this same mid-October period at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nThe public is invited to view the competition artwork\, and Visit Big Bear states that artwork at the galleries will be available for purchase.  \nOctober 18: Awards Ceremony\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for Sunday\, October 18 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhat Special Artist Events Are Part of the 2026 Festival?\nThe expanded 2026 Festival of Artist Events adds several opportunities beyond the main competition. \nArtist’s Best Work en Plein Air Gallery — September 18-19\nThis gallery gives participating artists another chance to exhibit and sell plein air work. Visit Big Bear lists a $500 Best of Show award for this portion of the festival.  \nThe Village Paint-Out — September 19\nA dedicated Paint-Out is scheduled in The Village Big Bear Lake on September 19. This provides a more concentrated event within the broader month-long competition period.  \nMoonridge Corridor Paint-Out — October 3\nAnother Paint-Out takes place in the Moonridge Corridor on October 3\, followed by a gallery on October 4. Visit Big Bear lists a separate $500 Best of Show award for this event.  \nMain Competition Gallery and Awards — October 14-18\nThe main competition concludes with the complete collection of submitted works and the awards ceremony. The principal prizes currently published are: \n\nFirst Place: $2\,000\nSecond Place: $1\,500\nThird Place: $500\n\nVisit Big Bear lists John Budicin\, Diane Moore\, and Lisa Mozzini-McDill as distinguished judges associated with the 2026 competition.  \nHow Do Artists Register and Submit Their Work?\nArtists should begin at the official Visit Big Bear Plein Air Competition page and complete the linked registration before traveling to Big Bear. \nThe currently published process is: \n\nComplete registration online before arriving.\nVisit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center during operating hours.\nHave the painting substrates you may use stamped.\nExplore Big Bear and create the work during the September 12-October 10 competition period.\nReturn the completed competition painting to the Visitor Center.\nSubmitted artwork is stored until the Competition Gallery opens.\n\nVisit Big Bear states that the 2026 competition has a maximum of 75 participating artists and allows one submission per artist for the galleries.  \nThe public page reviewed for this guide does not display a clearly stated universal competition registration price in its main event information. Artists should check the live registration form for the current fee and full participation terms rather than relying on a prior year’s price. \nWhere Are the Visitor Center and Competition Gallery?\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM and is the location where artists get substrates stamped and return completed competition paintings.  \nDestination Big Bear Event Room\n713 Stocker Rd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA \nThis is the published location for the Competition Gallery\, the October 18 awards ceremony\, and the public pop-up galleries associated with the festival.  \nNo single parking plan covering every competition location is published. Artists and gallery visitors should follow event instructions and posted parking regulations at the Visitor Center\, The Village\, Moonridge\, and the Destination Big Bear Event Room. \nCan Non-Artists Attend the Plein Air Events?\nYes. The competition is not only for participating painters. \nVisit Big Bear specifically invites art enthusiasts\, collectors\, and members of the community to attend the pop-up galleries and view the complete collection of 2026 competition artwork. Artwork will also be available for purchase.  \nThat makes the October gallery period a good option for visitors who enjoy art but do not plan to enter the competition themselves. \nA public admission charge for the galleries is not stated on the current competition page. Visitors should check the individual gallery listing closer to their chosen date if admission\, opening hours\, or purchasing procedures are important to their plans. \nWhat Should Artists Bring?\nVisit Big Bear does not publish one universal equipment list because plein air painters work with different media and setups. Participants should therefore prepare according to their own painting method and the outdoor mountain environment. \nA practical artist packing list may include: \n\nYour preferred paints\, brushes\, and painting tools\nMultiple eligible substrates to have stamped at the Visitor Center\nPortable easel or pochade setup\nWater or appropriate painting medium\nSun protection\nWeather-appropriate layers\nWater and snacks\nProtective equipment for transporting wet artwork\nAny personal medications or necessities\n\nBecause artists choose their own locations around Big Bear\, conditions can vary significantly between lakefront areas\, forested locations\, The Village\, and higher-elevation viewpoints. Check the forecast and current access conditions before setting up outdoors. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Plein Air Art Competition\nDay 1: Arrive\, Register\, and Scout Locations\nComplete online registration before leaving home. After arriving in Big Bear\, check into your cabin and visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center between 9:00 AM and 5:00 PM to get your substrates stamped. \nInstead of immediately committing to the first landscape you see\, use part of the afternoon to explore Big Bear Valley and observe how light falls across different areas. \nDay 2: Paint en Plein Air\nStart early enough to work during the light conditions you want to capture. Because the competition gives artists nearly a month to create\, there is no need to treat the trip like a speed-painting contest unless you’re participating in a specific Paint-Out. \nReturning to a cabin between sessions can be useful for organizing supplies\, resting\, eating\, and preparing for another painting period. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for your Plein Air Competition dates. \nReturn for the Gallery or Awards\nArtists do not have to treat the September-October creation period and October gallery as a single continuous stay. Visit Big Bear explicitly allows artists to visit once or return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nYou might therefore plan one trip for painting and another for the Competition Gallery and October 18 awards ceremony. \nWhere to Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition\nBecause the competition spans the Big Bear Valley and important event locations are in Big Bear Lake\, staying in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City makes practical sense. \nA Chalet currently offers cabins in both destinations\, with properties ranging from smaller two-bedroom stays to larger three- and four-bedroom rentals. Current examples shown in A Chalet’s collection include Heavenly Bay Retreat and Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms\, and Boulder Landing and Rustic Ridge with four bedrooms.  \nFor an artist traveling alone or with a partner\, a smaller cabin can provide a straightforward base between painting sessions. Friends participating together may prefer additional bedrooms and common space for organizing the trip. \nIf you need particular features for an art-focused stay—such as parking capacity\, a kitchen\, laundry facilities\, pet permission\, or additional indoor space—verify them on the current individual property listing before booking. Amenities differ by cabin and should not be assumed. \nA multi-night stay may be especially useful for this competition because participants are encouraged to explore the landscape rather than paint against a single-day deadline. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Art Competition Weekend Cabin\nChoose your competition phase first. A September painting trip\, October 3 Moonridge Paint-Out weekend\, and October 14-18 gallery trip have different schedules. \nComplete artist registration before traveling. Visit Big Bear specifically instructs participants to register online before arriving. \nAllow time for the Visitor Center. Substrates need to be stamped\, and current Visitor Center hours are 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. \nConsider more than one night. One of the main advantages of this competition is the ability to explore different Big Bear landscapes and work without a short painting deadline. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Solo artists and couples may prefer smaller accommodations\, while several artists traveling together can compare multi-bedroom rentals. \nVerify amenities directly. Parking\, kitchens\, pet policies\, and other property features vary across A Chalet’s inventory. \nRecheck event details before your trip. Gallery hours\, registration availability\, and individual festival-event instructions can change. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nArtists can create competition work from September 12 through October 10\, 2026. The main gallery period follows in mid-October\, with the awards ceremony scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nWhere Is the Plein Air Art Competition?\nPainting can take place across the Big Bear Valley. Substrate stamping and artwork drop-off are handled through the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, while the main Competition Gallery is held at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nDo Artists Need to Register?\nYes. Visit Big Bear directs artists to complete online registration before arriving. The 2026 competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhat Are the 2026 Plein Air Competition Prizes?\nThe main competition awards are currently listed as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. Separate $500 Best of Show prizes are also listed for certain festival galleries.  \nCan the Public Visit the Galleries?\nYes. Visit Big Bear invites the public\, art enthusiasts\, and collectors to attend the galleries. Artwork is expected to be available for purchase.  \nWhen Is the Awards Ceremony?\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhere Should I Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is practical because the competition is centered throughout the Big Bear Valley and key administrative and gallery locations are in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers cabins of several sizes in the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability. \nPlan Your Plein Air Art Competition 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 gives painters something many competitions do not: time. From September 12 through October 10\, registered artists can explore Big Bear\, choose their landscape\, paint\, return to refine their work\, and participate in an expanded schedule of festival events.  \nThe 2026 festival includes the Artist’s Best Work gallery on September 18-19\, The Village Paint-Out on September 19\, the Moonridge Paint-Out on October 3\, the Moonridge gallery on October 4\, and the main Competition Gallery and awards activities in mid-October. The awards ceremony is set for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nArtists should register online before arriving\, visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center to have substrates stamped\, and verify the latest competition instructions before beginning their work. \nFor a trip built around several painting sessions—or a separate return visit for the gallery and awards—an overnight cabin gives you a comfortable base in the Big Bear Valley instead of forcing the creative process into a single day. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the Plein Air Art Competition 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/plein-air-art-competition-38/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215626Z
CREATED:20261016T215626Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215626Z
UID:13947-1789171200-1789171200@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours
DESCRIPTION:Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 offer approximately 90-minute narrated sightseeing cruises on Big Bear Lake from Pine Knot Marina. The published 2026 season runs from August 19 through November 1\, with daytime departures at 12:00 PM\, 2:00 PM\, and 4:00 PM. A 6:00 PM Twilight Cruise is listed for Friday\, Saturday\, and Sunday evenings. Tours are weather permitting and require a minimum number of passengers to operate.  \nThe cruise combines lake views with narration covering Big Bear history dating back to 1845\, folklore\, local stories\, and possible celebrity sightings. Pine Knot Marina recommends advance reservations and asks guests to arrive 15 to 30 minutes before departure.  \nFor visitors coming from outside the mountains\, the cruise is easy to turn into a one- or two-night Big Bear trip. A Chalet offers vacation cabins in Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear City\, and other nearby mountain communities\, giving couples\, families\, and groups a place to relax before or after a day on the lake.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Miss Liberty cruise weekend. \nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours\n\n\n2026 season\nAugust 19-November 1\, 2026\n\n\nTour length\nApproximately 90 minutes\n\n\nDaytime departures\n12:00 PM\, 2:00 PM\, and 4:00 PM\n\n\nTwilight Cruise\n6:00 PM Friday\, Saturday\, and Sunday\n\n\nVenue\nPine Knot Marina\n\n\nAddress\n439 Pine Knot Ave\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nAdult daytime ticket\n$32 for ages 13 and older\, Wednesday-Friday\n\n\nChild daytime ticket\n$21 for ages 4-14\, Wednesday-Friday\n\n\nSenior / military daytime ticket\n$26\, Wednesday-Friday\n\n\nTwilight adult ticket\n$36 for ages 13 and older\n\n\nTwilight child ticket\n$26 for ages 4-14\n\n\nParking\nAvailable at Pine Knot Marina\n\n\nRecommended arrival\n15-30 minutes before departure\n\n\nOfficial tour website\nPine Knot Marina Miss Liberty Tours\n\n\n\nThe 2026 schedule and ticket information above are currently published by Visit Big Bear. Pine Knot Marina notes that schedules and pricing can change\, so travelers should verify the details shown during booking for their specific cruise date.  \nWhat Is the Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour?\nMiss Liberty is a narrated sightseeing boat operating from Pine Knot Marina on Big Bear Lake. Instead of renting a boat and navigating the lake yourself\, you can board for a guided cruise while learning more about the history and character of Big Bear Valley. \nThe approximately 90-minute narration covers highlights of Big Bear history dating to 1845\, along with folklore\, interesting facts\, and local stories. This makes the cruise especially appealing for first-time visitors who want to understand more about the destination while enjoying views from the water.  \nPine Knot Marina identifies Miss Liberty as a 64-foot Skipperliner 1500LX built in 1994 and refurbished in 2006. The operator currently lists a shaded upper deck\, enclosed and heated main salon\, modern restrooms\, small-group seating areas\, and capacity for 80 passengers.  \nThe vessel also has a galley where passengers can purchase light snacks and beverages. The current operator information mentions soft drinks as well as beer\, wine\, and champagne. Available items can change\, so do not plan a meal around the onboard selection without checking first.  \nMiss Liberty can work well for couples\, families\, multigenerational groups\, and visitors looking for an activity that does not require operating their own watercraft. The combination of an outdoor upper deck and enclosed salon also provides flexibility when mountain temperatures change. \nWhen and Where Are Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours in 2026?\nThe published Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 season runs from August 19 through November 1\, 2026.  \nThe current daytime schedule lists departures at: \n\n12:00 PM\n2:00 PM\n4:00 PM\n\nFriday\, Saturday\, and Sunday also have a published 6:00 PM Twilight Cruise.  \nAll cruises depart from: \nPine Knot Marina\n439 Pine Knot Ave\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nPine Knot Marina describes its location as the point “where the Village meets the lake\,” which makes the cruise easy to combine with time around Big Bear Lake’s Village area.  \nThe marina asks guests to arrive approximately 15 to 30 minutes before departure. Give yourself additional time if you’re driving into Big Bear on the same day\, since parking\, mountain traffic\, weather\, or road conditions can affect your arrival.  \nWhat Can Visitors Expect on Miss Liberty?\nThe Miss Liberty experience is primarily a scenic and educational cruise rather than a high-speed boating activity. Once onboard\, passengers can settle in and enjoy approximately an hour and a half on Big Bear Lake while listening to the narrated tour. \nHistory is a central part of the experience. The narration highlights Big Bear’s past beginning in the mid-19th century while mixing in folklore and other stories connected to the valley.  \nThe shaded upper deck provides an open-air vantage point\, while the heated enclosed salon offers another place to sit when conditions are cooler. This can be particularly useful later in the 2026 season\, when an evening on the lake may feel noticeably colder than an afternoon in town.  \nPine Knot Marina states that Miss Liberty is handicapped accessible. Travelers with particular mobility needs should still contact the operator before booking to ask about boarding\, seating\, restroom access\, and any assistance they may require.  \nThe boat is also available for private parties\, corporate groups\, and other group arrangements. Travelers interested in a private use of the vessel should contact Pine Knot Marina for current rates\, capacity requirements\, and available amenities rather than relying on standard tour ticket pricing.  \nHow Much Are Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour Tickets?\nThe current 2026 event listing publishes the following prices:  \n\n\n\nTicket\nPublished Price\nSchedule\n\n\n\n\nAdult\, age 13+\n$32\nWednesday-Friday daytime\n\n\nChild\, ages 4-14\n$21\nWednesday-Friday daytime\n\n\nSenior 65+ / Military\n$26\nWednesday-Friday daytime\n\n\nTwilight Cruise adult\, age 13+\n$36\nFriday-Sunday\n\n\nTwilight Cruise child\, ages 4-14\n$26\nFriday-Sunday\n\n\n\nThose are the currently published 2026 rates rather than guaranteed future prices. Pine Knot Marina specifically states that its schedules and pricing are subject to change\, so confirm the amount shown during the reservation process.  \nTickets\, Parking\, and Transportation\nDo You Need to Reserve Miss Liberty Tickets in Advance?\nPine Knot Marina says reservations are suggested and should be made early. Booking ahead is particularly useful if you want a specific departure time or a weekend Twilight Cruise.  \nThe operator also notes that all tours are weather permitting. In addition\, the published 2026 event information states that a minimum number of guests is required for the boat to tour the lake. Check any communication from the marina before traveling\, especially if weather conditions are uncertain.  \nWhere Do You Park for Miss Liberty?\nThe 2026 event listing states that parking is available at Pine Knot Marina.  \nArriving early is still important\, especially during busy weekends. The marina is close to The Village\, so the surrounding area can see additional pedestrian and vehicle activity during popular travel periods. \nHow Early Should You Arrive?\nPlan to arrive 15 to 30 minutes before your departure time. This gives you time to park\, locate the correct boarding area\, check in\, and be ready before the vessel departs.  \nIf you’re driving up the mountain on the day of your cruise\, leave considerably more than a 15-minute buffer. Traffic\, road work\, weather\, and mountain driving conditions can all affect travel time. \nWhat Should You Bring on a Miss Liberty Cruise?\nYou do not need much equipment for a 90-minute sightseeing cruise\, but these items can make the outing more comfortable: \n\nLayers: Big Bear Lake can feel cooler on the water than conditions onshore.\nA jacket: Particularly useful for the 6:00 PM Twilight Cruise or late-season departures.\nSun protection: Bring sunscreen\, sunglasses\, and a hat for daytime tours.\nYour reservation information: Keep your booking confirmation accessible.\nA charged phone or camera: Expect plenty of lake and mountain views.\nPersonal accessibility necessities: Contact Pine Knot Marina before your trip if you need assistance boarding.\n\nThe vessel has a shaded upper deck and an enclosed heated salon\, but passengers should still check the day’s forecast and dress appropriately.  \nHow to Make a Weekend of Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours\nArrival Day: Check In and Explore Big Bear\nArrive in Big Bear Lake the afternoon or evening before your cruise if your schedule allows. Checking into your cabin before tour day eliminates the need to coordinate a mountain drive with a fixed boat departure. \nOnce settled\, spend some time around The Village or enjoy a relaxed dinner. Pine Knot Marina’s location close to The Village makes it straightforward to combine shopping\, dining\, and the waterfront within the same portion of your trip.  \nCruise Day: See Big Bear Lake From the Water\nFor a daytime tour\, have a relaxed morning and head to the marina early enough to be there 15 to 30 minutes before departure. \nAfter your approximately 90-minute cruise\, keep the remainder of the day flexible. You could spend additional time near the lake or return to the cabin for a slower afternoon. \nFor a Friday\, Saturday\, or Sunday Twilight Cruise\, leave your late afternoon relatively open. The current Twilight departure is at 6:00 PM\, so you do not want another activity running late and forcing you to rush to the marina.  \nOnce the boat returns\, having an overnight cabin means you can enjoy the rest of your evening in Big Bear rather than immediately starting a drive down the mountain. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Miss Liberty weekend. \nDeparture Day: Enjoy More of the Lake\nUse the following morning for another Big Bear experience before heading home. Pine Knot Marina currently offers additional boating and water activities beyond Miss Liberty\, including seasonal rentals and recreation. Verify what’s operating on your travel date before adding another lake activity.  \nA slower departure morning also gives your group time to eat\, pack\, and leave the mountains without turning the entire weekend into a tight driving schedule. \nWhere to Stay for Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours\nBecause Miss Liberty departs from Big Bear Lake\, accommodations in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear communities are the logical choices for most visitors. Staying in Lake Arrowhead solely for a Miss Liberty trip would add unnecessary mountain travel. \nA Chalet currently offers vacation rentals across Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear City\, and Lake Arrowhead\, with a mix of smaller and larger properties. For this particular cruise\, focus your search on the Big Bear inventory.  \nA couple can consider a smaller one- or two-bedroom cabin for a simple lake weekend. Families often benefit from two or three bedrooms and a shared living area\, while groups traveling together can compare larger properties that keep everyone under one roof. \nA Chalet’s current collection includes examples ranging from the one-bedroom Bear Den to two-bedroom properties such as Heavenly Bay Retreat and Jaybird Cabin\, three-bedroom options such as Conklin Canopy\, and four-bedroom properties including Boulder Landing and Rustic Ridge. Bedroom and bathroom counts should always be rechecked on the live listing before booking.  \nIf cooking at the cabin is important to your trip\, confirm that the particular property you choose currently lists a kitchen. The same rule applies to hot tubs\, pet-friendly policies\, parking\, air conditioning\, and other amenities: different A Chalet properties have different features. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your 2026 Big Bear Lake cruise dates. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nReserve your cruise first. Knowing whether you have a noon\, afternoon\, or Twilight departure makes it easier to choose check-in and checkout dates. \nStay in the Big Bear area. The tour leaves from Pine Knot Marina in Big Bear Lake\, so prioritize Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear communities. \nChoose the correct cabin size. A couple does not necessarily need a large group property\, while families and friends may appreciate additional bedrooms and gathering space. \nVerify current property details. Check guest capacity\, bedrooms\, parking\, amenities\, house rules\, and cancellation terms on the current listing. \nConsider arriving the day before. This removes much of the risk associated with combining mountain traffic and a fixed cruise departure. \nConsider staying after a Twilight Cruise. An extra night allows you to relax after the evening cruise rather than immediately making a nighttime drive home. \nKeep weather flexibility in mind. Miss Liberty cruises are weather permitting\, so avoid building a trip where every other reservation depends on the boat operating exactly as planned.  \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen are Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours in 2026?\nThe published season runs from August 19 through November 1\, 2026. Daytime cruises are listed at 12:00 PM\, 2:00 PM\, and 4:00 PM\, with 6:00 PM Twilight Cruises on Friday\, Saturday\, and Sunday.  \nWhere is the Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour?\nMiss Liberty departs from Pine Knot Marina\, 439 Pine Knot Ave\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315.  \nDo You Need Tickets for Miss Liberty?\nYes. The cruise is a ticketed attraction\, and Pine Knot Marina recommends making reservations early. Published 2026 prices vary by passenger category and cruise type.  \nIs Miss Liberty Good for Children?\nThe sightseeing format can work well for families\, and the published 2026 ticket structure includes a child category for ages 4-14. Families traveling with younger children should confirm current ticket and boarding requirements directly with Pine Knot Marina.  \nWhere Do You Park for the Miss Liberty Tour?\nParking is currently listed as available at Pine Knot Marina. Arrive 15 to 30 minutes before the cruise to give yourself time to park and board.  \nWhat Should I Bring on the Cruise?\nBring layers\, a jacket for cooler departures\, sun protection for daytime cruises\, your reservation details\, and a phone or camera. Check the forecast because conditions can feel cooler on the water. \nWhere Should I Stay for Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours?\nBig Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear communities are the most practical lodging areas. A Chalet offers cabins for couples\, families\, and groups across the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability for your Miss Liberty cruise dates. \nPlan Your Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 offer an easy way to experience Big Bear Lake from the water while learning about the valley’s history\, folklore\, and local stories. The 2026 season is currently scheduled through November 1\, with approximately 90-minute daytime tours and weekend Twilight Cruises.  \nStart by choosing your cruise and confirming the current schedule with Pine Knot Marina. Arrive 15 to 30 minutes early\, check the weather before traveling\, and keep enough flexibility in your itinerary for changing lake or mountain conditions. \nFor visitors coming from outside Big Bear\, an overnight stay makes it easier to enjoy the cruise without planning the entire day around driving. Arrive early\, spend some time in The Village\, cruise the lake\, return to your cabin afterward\, and enjoy another morning in the mountains before heading home. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and reserve a Big Bear stay that fits your 2026 Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour plans.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/miss-liberty-paddlewheel-tours-38/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215633Z
CREATED:20261016T215633Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215633Z
UID:13946-1789171200-1789171200@achalet.com
SUMMARY:2026 Trail Work Days
DESCRIPTION:2026 Trail Work Days: Dates\, Volunteer Details\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\n2026 Trail Work Days are volunteer trail-maintenance events organized by the Southern California Mountains Foundation across the Big Bear Valley. Volunteers help maintain heavily used or damaged trail sections through tasks such as dirt work\, brush work\, and litter control. Gloves\, tools\, snacks\, and drinks are provided\, while participants are instructed to wear long pants and closed-toed shoes.  \nThe full 2026 series runs from June 20 through October 24. Earlier work days were held June 20\, July 18\, and August 15. As of September 10\, the remaining dates currently published by Visit Big Bear are Saturday\, September 12; Saturday\, October 3; and Saturday\, October 24\, 2026.  \nUnlike the separate Maple Hills Trail Work Days\, which were afternoon events limited to the Maple Hills Trail Complex\, these 2026 Trail Work Days can take place at different locations throughout Big Bear Valley. Registered volunteers receive the exact location by email roughly one week before each session.  \nIf you’re traveling to Big Bear specifically to volunteer\, staying overnight can reduce the pressure of combining a mountain drive with a work day whose exact meeting location may not be provided until shortly before the event. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City for couples\, families\, and volunteer groups.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear volunteer weekend. \n2026 Trail Work Days at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\n2026 Trail Work Days\n\n\nOrganizer\nSouthern California Mountains Foundation\n\n\n2026 event period\nJune 20-October 24\, 2026\n\n\nRemaining published dates\nSeptember 12\, October 3\, and October 24\, 2026\n\n\nLocation\nVarious trail locations throughout Big Bear Valley\n\n\nExact meeting location\nSent to registered volunteers by email roughly one week before each work day\n\n\nEvent hours\nNo universal start and end time is currently published on the Visit Big Bear event page; follow your registration confirmation for your selected date\n\n\nWork may include\nDirt work\, brush work\, and litter control\n\n\nProvided\nGloves\, tools\, snacks\, and drinks\n\n\nRequired clothing\nLong pants and closed-toed shoes\n\n\nRegistration\nRegister through the event’s Eventbrite listing\n\n\nContact\nJordan Lowe / Trails@mountainsfoundation.org\n\n\nCommunity support\nCare for Big Bear\n\n\nOfficial event page\nVisit Big Bear\n\n\nRegistration\nEventbrite Trail Work Day registration\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear currently lists September 12\, October 3\, and October 24 as the upcoming dates. Its broader Care for Big Bear volunteer calendar also displays these Trail Work Days separately from the Maple Hills Trail Work Days and Green Thumbs forest-restoration program.  \nWhat Are the 2026 Trail Work Days?\nThe 2026 Trail Work Days give locals and visitors a hands-on way to help care for Big Bear’s trail network. The Southern California Mountains Foundation organizes volunteers to work on sections of trail that need attention because of damage or visitor use.  \nDepending on the needs of the selected site\, volunteers may perform: \n\nDirt work to help maintain trail surfaces and sections needing repair\nBrush work to address vegetation affecting trail use\nLitter control to remove trash and debris\n\nThe exact tasks can vary because the work location itself changes throughout the season. This is not a single-trail volunteer program where every session repeats the same project. \nThe Southern California Mountains Foundation relies heavily on volunteers across programs that include trails\, restoration\, fire lookouts\, the Discovery Center\, and other stewardship work. Visit Big Bear’s current volunteer page describes volunteers as the backbone of several of the Foundation’s programs.  \nThese Trail Work Days are also listed as being held with support from Care for Big Bear\, the destination stewardship initiative encouraging visitors and locals to help preserve the Big Bear environment.  \nWhen Are the 2026 Trail Work Days?\nThe published 2026 series includes six Saturday work days: \n\nJune 20\, 2026 — past\nJuly 18\, 2026 — past\nAugust 15\, 2026 — past\nSeptember 12\, 2026\nOctober 3\, 2026\nOctober 24\, 2026\n\nThe full series therefore extends from June 20 through October 24. As of September 10\, three scheduled work days remain.  \nThe official Visit Big Bear page does not currently publish one standard start and finish time for the entire series. Volunteers should use the Eventbrite registration information and any organizer emails for the confirmed meeting time for their selected date rather than assuming the hours from a different trail event. \nThis matters because Big Bear hosts several separate stewardship programs. The Maple Hills Trail Work Days\, for example\, were specifically scheduled from 4:00 PM to 6:00 PM\, but those hours should not be carried over to the valley-wide 2026 Trail Work Days.  \nAre 2026 Trail Work Days the Same as Maple Hills Trail Work Days?\nNo. Although both programs involve the Southern California Mountains Foundation and similar trail-maintenance work\, they are listed as separate events. \nThe Maple Hills program was centered specifically within the Maple Hills Trail Complex\, with published afternoon hours from 4:00 PM to 6:00 PM. Its listed recurring period ended September 10.  \nThe 2026 Trail Work Days cover changing locations throughout Big Bear Valley and continue through October 24. Visit Big Bear’s current volunteer calendar displays both programs as separate volunteer opportunities\, confirming that this event should not be treated as a duplicate of the Maple Hills article.  \nThat distinction is important when registering: make sure the Eventbrite page and date you’re using correspond to the valley-wide Trail Work Day rather than a previous Maple Hills session. \nWhere Do the Trail Work Days Take Place?\nThere is no single permanent meeting point for the entire series. \nThe organizer states that locations vary but will always be within Big Bear Valley. Sites are selected according to factors such as the amount of trail damage and visitor usage.  \nRegistered volunteers normally receive the exact location by email approximately one week before the event. If you register less than a week before the work day\, the location will be shared as soon as possible.  \nBecause the location changes\, do not use the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center address shown on Visit Big Bear’s website as if it were automatically the trail-work meeting point. The Visitor Center is the tourism organization’s general location\, not a confirmed meeting location for every session. \nHow Do You Register?\nVolunteers should register through the published Eventbrite Trail Work Day listing. \nRegistration is especially important because the organizer uses volunteer contact information to distribute the final work location. Without those instructions\, you may not know where the group is meeting. \nIf you have questions about trail work\, current registration\, or meeting instructions\, the published contact is: \nTrails@mountainsfoundation.org \nVisit Big Bear also identifies Jordan Lowe as the event contact.  \nNo general participation price is currently published on the official Visit Big Bear listing. Because this is presented as a volunteer opportunity\, use the official registration page for any terms or requirements attached to your date rather than assuming details not stated publicly. \nWhat Can Volunteers Expect?\nThese are active trail-maintenance days rather than passive educational gatherings. Volunteers should expect to spend time outdoors helping address real maintenance needs. \nThe organizer specifically mentions dirt work\, brush work\, and litter control. The exact balance of those tasks depends on the selected trail and its condition.  \nGloves\, tools\, snacks\, and drinks are provided\, which reduces the amount of specialized equipment volunteers need to bring. Participants are still responsible for arriving dressed appropriately and following any additional safety instructions sent before the event.  \nFriends and family are encouraged to join\, but the public event page does not state a universal minimum volunteer age or provide detailed rules for minors. Families planning to bring children should contact the organizer before registering if age eligibility is important. \nSimilarly\, the standard event page does not publish detailed accessibility information. Because work sites vary and may involve uneven natural terrain\, volunteers with mobility or accommodation requirements should contact the organizer before the work day. \nWhat Should You Wear and Bring?\nThe official instructions specifically say to wear: \n\nLong pants\nClosed-toed shoes\n\nThe organizer provides: \n\nWork gloves\nTools\nSnacks\nDrinks\n\nThese details are confirmed in the current event listing.  \nBecause the exact trail site changes\, volunteers should also read the organizer’s pre-event email carefully. A particular work day may involve additional site-specific instructions. \nIt is also sensible to check the Big Bear forecast and prepare for mountain conditions\, but do not substitute a generic packing list for instructions provided by the Southern California Mountains Foundation. \nWhat Is Special About the October 24 Trail Work Day?\nThe standard 2026 Trail Work Days schedule lists October 24 as the final session of the season. A separate current listing from the California Off-Road Vehicle Association describes an October 24 volunteer day in partnership with the Southern California Mountains Foundation\, meeting at 40971 North Shore Drive / Highway 38 in Fawnskin at 8:30 AM.  \nThat October 24 partnership listing includes trail maintenance\, sign work\, and clearing brush and debris\, along with additional personal protective equipment requirements.  \nBecause that partner listing contains more specific requirements than the general season page\, October 24 volunteers should follow the instructions attached to their actual registration. Do not assume that requirements for October 24 automatically apply to September 12 or October 3. \nHow to Make a Weekend of a Big Bear Trail Work Day\nFriday: Arrive and Check In\nIf you’re volunteering on one of the Saturday dates\, arriving Friday evening can make the morning easier. Check into your cabin\, review the latest organizer email\, confirm the meeting location\, and prepare your clothing before going to bed. \nThis is especially useful because the meeting site can change from one work day to another. \nSaturday: Volunteer on the Trails\nFollow the meeting time provided through your registration. Wear long pants and closed-toed footwear and bring anything specifically requested in your confirmation email. \nAfter the volunteer work concludes\, return to your cabin to clean up\, eat\, and relax. A trail-work day can involve more physical effort than a typical sightseeing activity\, so keeping the rest of the afternoon flexible may be preferable to scheduling another demanding outing. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Trail Work Day weekend. \nSunday: Enjoy Big Bear Responsibly\nUse the following morning to enjoy the area you helped care for. Depending on current conditions and your interests\, that could mean a relaxed lake outing\, an appropriate trail\, or time elsewhere in Big Bear Valley. \nFollow Leave No Trace practices and any current trail closures or restrictions. The broader Care for Big Bear program encourages visitors to combine recreation with responsible stewardship of the surrounding natural environment.  \nWhere to Stay for the 2026 Trail Work Days\nBecause individual work locations can fall anywhere within Big Bear Valley\, Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City are both practical lodging bases. Waiting for your organizer email before making assumptions about the exact trailhead is important. \nA Chalet currently lists vacation rentals in both Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City. Its current collection includes smaller stays such as Bear Den\, two-bedroom options including Golden Hour and Maverick’s Cabin\, three-bedroom properties such as Conklin Canopy\, and larger four-bedroom options including Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape.  \nVolunteers traveling as a group can compare larger cabins\, while a couple participating together may prefer a smaller property. Verify each property’s current bedroom configuration\, parking limits\, pet policy\, kitchen\, laundry\, and other features directly on its live listing. \nA Chalet’s current website also notes an Every Stay Gives Back program in which A Chalet and Care for Big Bear contribute to local cleanup initiatives. That program is a broader stewardship effort and should not be interpreted as A Chalet sponsoring this specific Trail Work Day.  \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabins. \nTips for Booking a Trail Work Weekend Cabin\nRegister for the work day first. Registration is how you’ll receive the changing location information. \nDo not assume the meeting location. The exact trail site is normally emailed approximately one week ahead. \nChoose Big Bear Valley lodging. Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City keeps you within the same general area as the work sites without adding an unnecessary Lake Arrowhead commute. \nConsider arriving the night before. This provides time to confirm directions and avoids pairing a same-morning mountain drive with an unfamiliar trail meeting point. \nVerify cabin parking. If several volunteers are sharing one rental but arriving in separate cars\, check the property’s permitted vehicle count. \nLeave the afternoon flexible. Trail maintenance can be physical\, so a relaxed post-event schedule may be more comfortable. \nCheck the latest organizer instructions. Requirements can differ by date\, particularly when another organization is partnering on a specific work day. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Are the Remaining 2026 Trail Work Days?\nAs of September 10\, the remaining dates published by Visit Big Bear are September 12\, October 3\, and October 24\, 2026. Earlier sessions were held June 20\, July 18\, and August 15.  \nWhere Do the Trail Work Days Take Place?\nLocations vary throughout Big Bear Valley. Registered volunteers are normally sent the exact location by email roughly one week before the event.  \nWhat Kind of Work Will Volunteers Do?\nPublished tasks include dirt work\, brush work\, and litter control\, with the exact project determined by current trail conditions and visitor use.  \nWhat Should I Wear?\nThe organizer specifically instructs volunteers to wear long pants and closed-toed shoes. Gloves\, tools\, snacks\, and drinks are provided.  \nAre the Trail Work Days the Same as Maple Hills Trail Work Days?\nNo. Maple Hills Trail Work Days were separate afternoon events focused on the Maple Hills Trail Complex and ended September 10. The valley-wide 2026 Trail Work Days continue through October 24 and use changing Big Bear Valley locations.  \nHow Do I Register?\nUse the official Eventbrite registration page. For questions\, contact Trails@mountainsfoundation.org.  \nWhere Should I Stay for a Trail Work Day?\nBig Bear Lake or Big Bear City is the logical choice because work locations vary throughout Big Bear Valley. A Chalet offers cabins for couples and larger volunteer groups in both areas. Browse current A Chalet availability. \nPlan Your 2026 Trail Work Days Getaway With A Chalet\nThe 2026 Trail Work Days offer visitors a practical way to contribute to the same mountain landscape they come to enjoy. Organized by the Southern California Mountains Foundation\, the volunteer sessions help address dirt work\, vegetation\, litter\, and other maintenance needs on trails throughout Big Bear Valley.  \nAs of September 10\, three dates remain: September 12\, October 3\, and October 24. Register in advance\, watch for the email containing the exact work location\, wear long pants and closed-toed shoes\, and follow any additional instructions associated with your specific session.  \nThese valley-wide work days are separate from the Maple Hills Trail Work Days\, so they warrant their own event plan and article. The changing locations also make an overnight Big Bear stay useful: arrive the evening before\, confirm the work-site directions\, volunteer the next day\, and have a nearby place to rest afterward. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the 2026 Trail Work Days.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/2026-trail-work-days-4/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T080000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T093000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215619Z
CREATED:20261016T215619Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215619Z
UID:13949-1789200000-1789205400@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center
DESCRIPTION:Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center 2026: Date\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nWild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center 2026 is a free guided birding experience in Big Bear Lake led by birding expert Matthew Schreiner. Chirp Nature Center’s current 2026 schedule lists five walks—May 9\, June 13\, July 11\, August 8\, and September 12\, 2026—making September 12 the final published walk of the 2026 series. The organizer currently lists the walk itself from 8:00 AM to 9:30 AM.  \nParticipants meet at Chirp Nature Center\, 578 Bonanza Trail\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\, between 7:30 and 8:00 AM. The group then carpools to a birding location selected according to trail conditions and group size. After the walk\, participants return to Chirp for coffee\, refreshments\, and conversation about the birds observed that morning.  \nThe walk is free\, but advance registration is required and space is limited. Birders of all experience levels are welcome. Dogs are not permitted because they can disturb or scare away birds.  \nBecause the event starts early on Saturday morning\, staying in Big Bear on Friday night can make the outing considerably easier. A Chalet offers vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, allowing visitors to arrive the evening before\, sleep locally\, and reach Chirp without building an early-morning mountain drive into the schedule.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear birding weekend. \nWild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nWild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center\n\n\nFinal published 2026 date\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\n\nWalk time\n8:00 AM-9:30 AM according to Chirp Nature Center\n\n\nMeet-up window\n7:30 AM-8:00 AM\n\n\nMeet-up location\nChirp Nature Center\n\n\nAddress\n578 Bonanza Trail\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nPrice\nFree\n\n\nRegistration\nAdvance online registration required\n\n\nGuide\nMatthew Schreiner\n\n\nBirding location\nVaries according to conditions and group size\n\n\nTransportation\nParticipants carpool from Chirp to the trail site\n\n\nDogs\nNot permitted\n\n\nDifficulty\nGenerally leisurely paced\, but terrain and outdoor conditions can vary\n\n\nParking\nMeet and park at Chirp Nature Center; follow event instructions for the carpool\n\n\nPhone\n888-412-4477\n\n\nOfficial information\nChirp Nature Center 2026 Wild Bird Walks\n\n\n\nSome secondary event listings show the program as 8:00 AM to 10:00 AM and identify the guide as Michael Schreiner. Chirp Nature Center’s current organizer page instead lists Matthew Schreiner and an 8:00-9:30 AM walk. Because Chirp is the organizer\, its current information should be used for trip planning.  \nWhat Is the Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center?\nChirp Nature Center’s Wild Bird Walk is a guided introduction to birding in the Big Bear Lake area. Rather than meeting at one fixed trail every month\, participants gather at Chirp and then travel together to a birding location selected for the day’s conditions and group size. \nThe walks are designed for birders of all levels. That means visitors do not need to be experienced at identifying species by sight or sound to participate. A beginner can use the morning as an introduction to birdwatching\, while more experienced birders can enjoy exploring a mountain habitat with a knowledgeable guide.  \nThe pace is generally described as leisurely\, although Chirp cautions that terrain and outdoor conditions can vary. That distinction matters: this is not advertised as a strenuous hiking event\, but participants should still be prepared to walk outside on natural terrain.  \nThe social part of the experience continues after the walk. Participants return to Chirp for coffee and refreshments and can discuss the species and observations from the morning.  \nWhen Is the Chirp Nature Center Bird Walk in 2026?\nChirp Nature Center published five Wild Bird Walk dates for 2026: \n\nMay 9\, 2026\nJune 13\, 2026\nJuly 11\, 2026\nAugust 8\, 2026\nSeptember 12\, 2026\n\nAs of September 10\, the remaining event is Saturday\, September 12. No later 2026 Wild Bird Walk has been announced on Chirp’s current series page.  \nThe organizer lists the walk from 8:00 AM to 9:30 AM. Guests should meet at Chirp between 7:30 and 8:00 AM\, so anyone attending should treat 8:00 AM as the departure point rather than the ideal arrival time.  \nWhere Does the Wild Bird Walk Begin?\nParticipants meet at: \nChirp Nature Center\n578 Bonanza Trail\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe key planning detail is that Chirp is the meeting point\, not necessarily the location of the entire bird walk. Once everyone has checked in\, the group carpools to a trail or birding area selected according to conditions and group size.  \nThis flexible format allows the guide to choose a suitable location rather than promising one trail regardless of conditions. Visitors should therefore avoid making plans that depend on the walk taking place at a specific Big Bear trail. \nDo You Need to Register for the Wild Bird Walk?\nYes. Although the event is free\, Chirp says all guests must register in advance. Registered participants receive a confirmation email with check-in instructions.  \nSpace is limited\, so registration is especially important for the September 12 walk\, which is the final scheduled date in the 2026 series. Availability can change quickly and should be checked on the live registration page rather than assumed from an earlier listing. \nUse the official Chirp Wild Bird Walk page to check current registration status. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect During the Bird Walk?\nThe morning begins with check-in at Chirp Nature Center. Participants then carpool to the selected birding site\, where Matthew Schreiner leads the group through one of Big Bear Lake’s birding areas. \nThe exact species seen cannot be guaranteed. Wild bird activity changes with habitat\, weather\, season\, time of day\, and chance\, so the event should be viewed as an opportunity to observe and learn rather than a promise to see any particular species. \nThe organizer describes the outings as leisurely paced. Beginners can ask questions and learn basic observation techniques\, while photographers and experienced birders may focus more closely on behavior\, identification\, and habitat.  \nAfterward\, the group returns to Chirp for coffee and refreshments. That post-walk discussion gives participants an opportunity to review what they saw and compare observations.  \nWhat Should You Bring on a Chirp Bird Walk?\nChirp provides useful preparation guidance for participants. Recommended items include: \n\nLayered clothing appropriate for morning mountain temperatures\nComfortable walking shoes\nWater\nBinoculars or other optics if you have them\nA camera or phone with a camera\nSunglasses or other protective eyewear\nSunblock\nAn optional bird checklist\n\nChirp notes that water refill stations may not be available during the outing\, so participants should carry their own water. The organizer also recommends sun protection because ultraviolet exposure is stronger at altitude.  \nIf you want to record sightings\, Chirp offers a local Big Bear Valley bird checklist and may have printed copies available at check-in. Basic birding gear may also be available through the store.  \nDo You Need Binoculars?\nBinoculars are recommended if you already own them\, but Chirp’s published preparation information does not state that personal binoculars are mandatory. \nFor someone trying birding for the first time\, a phone or camera can still be useful\, and simply listening to the guide can make the experience worthwhile. If access to optics is important to you\, call Chirp at 888-412-4477 before the event to ask what equipment may be available. \nAre Dogs Allowed on the Bird Walk?\nNo. Chirp specifically asks participants not to bring dogs because their presence may frighten birds and interfere with wildlife observation.  \nThis differs from some other Big Bear hiking events that permit leashed dogs\, so pet owners should not assume standard trail rules apply to this organized bird walk. \nIf you are staying in a pet-friendly cabin\, make appropriate arrangements for your dog during the event and follow the property’s rules about whether animals may be left unattended. \nParking and Transportation\nParticipants begin at Chirp Nature Center\, where the Visit Big Bear listing identifies parking as available. From there\, the group carpools to the actual trail site.  \nBecause the final birding location can change with conditions and group size\, follow the directions provided by Chirp on the morning of the event. \nIf you are willing to help with the carpool\, make sure your vehicle is ready and that you understand any instructions from the organizer before leaving Chirp. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Wild Bird Walk\nFriday: Arrive in Big Bear Before the Early Start\nFor travelers coming from outside the mountain communities\, Friday night is the practical time to arrive. Check into your cabin\, have dinner\, prepare your birding gear\, fill a water bottle\, and set out your morning layers. \nStaying locally avoids having to combine a mountain drive with a 7:30-8:00 AM event check-in. \nCheck A Chalet availability for the September 12 bird walk weekend. \nSaturday Morning: Join the Bird Walk\nReach Chirp between 7:30 and 8:00 AM\, check in\, and follow the organizer’s carpool instructions. The walk is currently scheduled to end around 9:30 AM\, followed by coffee and refreshments back at Chirp.  \nWith the organized portion of the morning finishing relatively early\, you still have much of Saturday available for another Big Bear activity. \nSaturday Afternoon and Sunday\nAfter the walk\, consider an easy afternoon around Big Bear Lake\, a visit to The Village\, or another outdoor activity appropriate for current weather and trail conditions. \nStaying Saturday night as well gives you a more relaxed Sunday before returning home and turns a short bird walk into a fuller mountain weekend. \nWhere to Stay for the Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center\nBecause Chirp Nature Center is in Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear Lake is the most straightforward A Chalet destination for this event. Big Bear City can also work for visitors planning activities throughout the valley. \nA Chalet’s current collection includes different cabin sizes. Featured options include Heavenly Bay Retreat with two bedrooms and two baths\, Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms and one bath\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths\, and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths.  \nLarger groups can compare current four-bedroom properties such as Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape. A Chalet also currently lists Bear Den as a one-bedroom option.  \nFor example\, the current Conklin Canopy listing identifies it as a three-bedroom\, two-bath Big Bear Lake property with parking for up to three vehicles\, an in-unit washer and dryer\, and high-speed Wi-Fi. Property amenities vary\, so travelers should always verify the live listing before reserving.  \nFor this particular event\, the strongest reason to stay overnight is timing. A Friday-night cabin lets you wake up in Big Bear and reach the early-morning meeting point without treating the drive itself as part of your pre-dawn schedule. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabins. \nTips for Booking a Birding Weekend Cabin\nRegister for the bird walk before finalizing your itinerary. The event is free\, but advance registration is required and capacity is limited. \nArrive Friday. With check-in at Chirp beginning at 7:30 AM Saturday\, staying the night before is more convenient than making a same-morning drive into the mountains. \nChoose Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City. These locations are geographically relevant to the Chirp meeting point. \nPrepare your gear the night before. Set out layers\, shoes\, water\, binoculars\, sun protection\, and your camera so you do not have to organize everything early Saturday morning. \nDo not plan around a fixed trail. Chirp chooses the birding site based on conditions and group size. \nCheck pet rules carefully. Dogs cannot attend the bird walk\, and cabin pet policies vary. \nConsider staying Saturday night too. The bird walk ends early enough to leave most of the weekend open for other Big Bear activities. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Final Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center in 2026?\nThe final currently published walk is Saturday\, September 12\, 2026. Chirp’s 2026 series also included May 9\, June 13\, July 11\, and August 8.  \nWhat Time Is the Chirp Bird Walk?\nChirp Nature Center currently lists the walk from 8:00 AM to 9:30 AM\, with participants asked to meet at Chirp between 7:30 and 8:00 AM.  \nWhere Does the Bird Walk Start?\nMeet at Chirp Nature Center\, 578 Bonanza Trail\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. The group then carpools to a birding location selected according to current conditions and group size.  \nIs the Wild Bird Walk Free?\nYes. Chirp lists the event as free\, but all participants must register in advance because space is limited.  \nCan Beginners Attend?\nYes. Chirp welcomes birders of all levels. The walks are generally leisurely paced\, although trail conditions and terrain can vary.  \nCan I Bring My Dog?\nNo. Chirp asks participants not to bring dogs because they can scare birds and interfere with observation.  \nWhere Should I Stay for the Chirp Nature Center Bird Walk?\nBig Bear Lake is the most practical general lodging area because the group meets at Chirp Nature Center in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City for couples\, families\, and groups.  \nCheck A Chalet availability for your birding weekend. \nPlan Your Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center 2026 gives visitors a guided introduction to birding in the Big Bear Lake area without an admission charge. The final published 2026 outing is Saturday\, September 12\, with the walk scheduled from 8:00 AM to 9:30 AM and check-in at Chirp between 7:30 and 8:00 AM.  \nAdvance registration is required\, the specific birding site may vary\, and participants should bring water\, comfortable walking shoes\, layers\, sun protection\, and binoculars if available. Dogs should remain behind for this event.  \nFor visitors driving from outside Big Bear\, arriving Friday and staying overnight turns an early Saturday event into a much easier itinerary. Wake up locally\, meet the group at Chirp\, spend the morning birding\, and keep the rest of the weekend open for Big Bear Lake and the surrounding mountains. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the Wild Bird Walk with Chirp Nature Center 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/wild-bird-walk-with-chirp-nature-center/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T083000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T172500
DTSTAMP:20261016T215619Z
CREATED:20261016T215619Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215619Z
UID:13950-1789201800-1789233900@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Trolley To Trails
DESCRIPTION:Trolley to Trails 2026: Schedule\, Trail Stops\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nTrolley to Trails 2026 is a free seasonal Mountain Transit route around Big Bear Lake that connects riders with popular hiking and recreation stops without requiring them to drive to every trailhead. The route operates on Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays\, with current Visit Big Bear information showing service from 8:30 AM to 5:25 PM. The 2026 season runs through October 3\, 2026. \nAs of September 10\, the remaining published dates are September 12\, 13\, 19\, 20\, 26\, 27\, and October 3. Riders can begin at the Village-Knickerbocker stop at 630 Knickerbocker Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\, where parking is available at the public lot. \nThe route serves multiple outdoor stops\, including Towne Trail\, Stanfield Marsh Boardwalk\, Woodland Trail\, Nature Discovery Trail\, Cougar Crest Trail\, Grays Peak Trail\, Castle Rock Trail\, and Pine Knot Trail. You do not need to hike to enjoy the route; Visit Big Bear also promotes it as a free scenic ride around Big Bear Lake. \nFor visitors planning more than one trail or a full weekend outdoors\, staying locally can make the route more useful. A Chalet currently offers vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, so travelers can ride the trolley during the day and return to a cabin afterward instead of building a same-day mountain drive around the schedule. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Trolley to Trails weekend. \nTrolley to Trails 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nService\nTrolley to Trails\n\n\nOperator\nMountain Transit\n\n\nCost\nFree\n\n\nOperating days\nSaturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays\n\n\n2026 season\nMay 2-October 3\, 2026\n\n\nDaily service window\n8:30 AM-5:25 PM\n\n\nRemaining dates\nSeptember 12\, 13\, 19\, 20\, 26\, 27\, and October 3\n\n\nPrimary boarding point\nVillage-Knickerbocker Road\n\n\nAddress\n630 Knickerbocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nParking\nKnickerbocker Public Parking Lot\n\n\nAccessibility\nMountain Transit states that all of its vehicles are wheelchair accessible\n\n\nBikes\nMountain Transit vehicles are equipped with bike racks\n\n\nService animals\nWelcome aboard Mountain Transit vehicles\n\n\nPhone\n909-878-5200\n\n\nOfficial route information\nTrolley to Trails at Visit Big Bear\n\n\n\nMountain Transit’s own accessibility information confirms that its vehicles are wheelchair accessible\, equipped with bike racks\, and allow service animals. Big Bear fixed-route transportation is fare-free. \nWhat Is Trolley to Trails?\nTrolley to Trails is a seasonal Big Bear transportation service created by Mountain Transit in partnership with Visit Big Bear. Its purpose is to connect riders with hiking trails and outdoor recreation locations around Big Bear Lake while reducing the need to find parking at each trailhead. \nThe service is also useful for visitors who simply want to see the lake and mountain scenery. Visit Big Bear specifically notes that non-hikers can ride the trolley for the scenic experience\, so there is no requirement to get off and complete a trail. \nMountain Transit approved the route as a demonstration service through a partnership with Visit Big Bear\, with the partnership supporting fare-free operation. That makes Trolley to Trails different from a paid guided tour: riders use a public-transit-style route with scheduled stops rather than joining a fixed excursion. \nWhen Does Trolley to Trails Run in 2026?\nThe current public schedule lists Trolley to Trails on Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays from the first weekend of May through the first weekend of October. \nAs of September 10\, the remaining 2026 dates published by Visit Big Bear are: \n\nSaturday\, September 12\nSunday\, September 13\nSaturday\, September 19\nSunday\, September 20\nSaturday\, September 26\nSunday\, September 27\nSaturday\, October 3\n\nThe current event page lists October 3\, 2026 as the last scheduled date of the season. \nBecause public transportation schedules can change because of weather\, road conditions\, or operational needs\, check the latest route information before planning a day around the final trolley. \nWhat Is the Trolley to Trails Schedule?\nThe route currently begins at Village-Knickerbocker Road at 8:30 AM and completes its final listed return there at 5:25 PM. The published timetable shows repeated loops throughout the day. \n\n\n\nStop\nFirst Published Stop Time\nFinal Published Stop Time\n\n\n\n\nVillage – Knickerbocker Rd.\n8:30 AM\n5:25 PM return\n\n\nBig 5 – Conklin Rd. & Big Bear Blvd.\n8:32 AM\n4:27 PM\n\n\nTowne Trail – Snow Summit\n8:37 AM\n4:32 PM\n\n\nStater Bros – Big Bear Blvd.\n8:43 AM\n4:38 PM\n\n\nStanfield Marsh Boardwalk\n8:44 AM\n4:39 PM\n\n\nWoodland Trail\n8:47 AM\n4:42 PM\n\n\nNature Discovery Trail\n8:52 AM\n4:47 PM\n\n\nCougar Crest Trail\n8:55 AM\n4:50 PM\n\n\nFawnskin – Fire Station\n9:04 AM\n4:59 PM\n\n\nGrays Peak Trail\n9:07 AM\n5:02 PM\n\n\nCastle Rock Trail\n9:18 AM\n5:13 PM\n\n\nPine Knot Trail\n9:25 AM\n5:20 PM\n\n\n\nThe full published timetable includes several departures at each stop\, generally following the same loop approximately every 95 minutes. Riders should check the current full schedule before choosing a hike so they know when the trolley will return to that trailhead. \nWhich Trails Does Trolley to Trails Serve?\nThe 2026 route reaches a useful cross-section of Big Bear recreation areas rather than serving only one trail. Current stops include: \n\nTowne Trail near Snow Summit\nStanfield Marsh Boardwalk\nWoodland Trail\nNature Discovery Trail\nCougar Crest Trail\nGrays Peak Trail\nCastle Rock Trail\nPine Knot Trail\n\nVisit Big Bear also notes that Grays Peak Trail is now being serviced following its reopening. \nEach trail offers a different experience and level of difficulty. Do not assume that because the trolley serves a trail\, that trail is suitable for every rider. Check current trail distance\, elevation gain\, closures\, weather\, and your group’s abilities separately before getting off. \nWhere Do You Board Trolley to Trails?\nThe primary published pickup and drop-off location is: \nVillage – Knickerbocker Rd.\n630 Knickerbocker Rd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nVisit Big Bear lists parking at the Knickerbocker Public Parking Lot. The first trolley departs this stop at 8:30 AM. \nYou can also board at other scheduled stops along the route. If you are staying near one of those stops\, review the timetable before automatically driving to The Village. \nIs Trolley to Trails Really Free?\nYes. Visit Big Bear and Mountain Transit identify Trolley to Trails as a free seasonal service. \nNo event ticket is required simply to ride the trolley. However\, using the trolley does not automatically waive any separate recreation permit\, trail-use requirement\, admission fee\, or reservation that could apply at an individual destination. \nCheck the rules for the specific trail or recreation site you plan to visit rather than assuming the free ride makes every activity along the route free. \nIs Trolley to Trails Accessible?\nMountain Transit states that all of its vehicles are wheelchair accessible. Its vehicles are also equipped with bike racks\, and service animals are welcome on board. \nThat does not mean every trail stop itself is wheelchair accessible. Accessibility can differ significantly between a paved boardwalk\, parking area\, and natural hiking trail. Travelers who need accessible outdoor options should research the specific stop separately before choosing where to exit. \nFor transportation-specific accessibility questions\, Mountain Transit maintains dedicated accessibility information and rider services. \nCan You Bring a Bike?\nMountain Transit says its vehicles are equipped with bike racks. That can make the system useful for riders combining transit with cycling\, but rack capacity may be limited. \nIf transporting a bicycle is essential to your plans\, check Mountain Transit’s current bike-on-bus policies before departure and have a backup plan in case rack space is unavailable. \nWhat Should You Bring for Trolley to Trails?\nYour packing list should be based primarily on the trail you plan to hike\, not just the trolley ride. Useful basics include: \n\nWater appropriate for the length of your outing\nComfortable hiking or walking shoes\nWeather-appropriate layers\nSun protection\nTrail map or navigation information\nSnacks\nAny necessary medications\nA charged phone\nThe current trolley timetable\n\nBefore leaving the trolley\, note the return schedule for your stop. Build in extra time rather than planning to finish a hike only a few minutes before the final pickup. \nHow Should You Plan a Hike Around the Trolley Schedule?\nThe biggest planning mistake would be choosing a trail based only on the outbound trolley time. You also need to know how long the hike normally takes and when the next return trips are scheduled. \nFor example\, if you leave the trolley for a longer hike late in the afternoon\, the remaining service window may not be sufficient. The final published route reaches Pine Knot Trail at 5:20 PM and returns to Village-Knickerbocker at 5:25 PM\, so that final loop is not designed to drop riders off for a new multi-hour hike. \nChoose an earlier departure for longer trails. For shorter walks\, scenic stops\, or boardwalk experiences\, later loops may offer more flexibility. \nAlways consider your actual pace\, trail conditions\, daylight\, and weather rather than relying solely on an estimated hiking time. \nCan You Ride Trolley to Trails Without Hiking?\nYes. Visit Big Bear specifically encourages non-hikers to use the service as a scenic ride around Big Bear Lake. \nThat makes the route useful for mixed-interest groups. One person may want to hike while another prefers a scenic ride or a less demanding stop. \nIt can also be a simple way to see different parts of the lake without repeatedly looking for parking\, although riders should remember that this is scheduled public transportation rather than a narrated sightseeing tour. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Trolley to Trails\nFriday: Arrive and Plan Your Route\nArrive in Big Bear on Friday\, check into your cabin\, and decide which trail or stops you want to visit the next morning. Review the latest trail conditions and save the trolley timetable so you are not making route decisions at the last minute. \nIf your group has different hiking abilities\, choose stops that allow everyone to enjoy the day without forcing the same itinerary. \nSaturday: Ride From The Village to the Trails\nFor maximum flexibility\, consider boarding one of the earlier morning loops. Starting early provides more options for completing a hike and catching a later trolley back. \nYou might choose one main trail for the morning\, return toward town\, and use the remainder of the afternoon for The Village or another Big Bear activity. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Trolley to Trails weekend. \nSunday: Try a Different Stop\nBecause the service also runs Sundays\, a two-night stay gives you another opportunity to explore without moving your car from trailhead to trailhead. \nKeep Sunday’s plans realistic if you need to check out or drive home later that day. A short outdoor stop may work better than committing to a long hike close to your departure time. \nWhere to Stay for Trolley to Trails\nBecause the route begins in Big Bear Lake and circles recreation sites around Big Bear Lake and Fawnskin\, Big Bear Lake is the most straightforward A Chalet destination for this itinerary. Big Bear City can also work for visitors exploring the broader valley. \nA Chalet currently offers multiple Big Bear lodging sizes. Featured properties include Heavenly Bay Retreat with two bedrooms and two baths\, Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms and one bath\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths\, and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths. \nFor larger groups\, A Chalet currently lists Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape with four bedrooms and three baths. Bear Den is currently shown as a one-bedroom option. \nA cabin stay can work particularly well with this route because you can arrive the night before\, leave your main driving plans behind for part of the day\, ride to a trail\, and return to your lodging afterward. \nVerify occupancy limits\, parking\, kitchen facilities\, pet policies\, and other amenities on the current individual listing before booking\, since features vary from cabin to cabin. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking a Trolley to Trails Weekend Cabin\nChoose your hiking date first. Only seven published service dates remain after September 10\, with October 3 currently listed as the final day. \nStay Friday night for a Saturday hike. That allows you to use an early trolley without first making a morning drive into Big Bear. \nStudy both outbound and return times. A trail that fits the morning schedule may not fit the last return of the day. \nChoose the trail separately from the transportation. The trolley is free\, but trail difficulty\, access rules\, and current conditions still need independent research. \nConsider Big Bear Lake lodging. It places you in the same city as the Knickerbocker starting point. \nVerify parking at your cabin. Larger groups should check the number of permitted vehicles before booking. \nCheck current weather and closures. Late September and early October conditions can affect both hiking plans and mountain travel. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Does Trolley to Trails Run in 2026?\nTrolley to Trails runs Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays during its seasonal operating period. As of September 10\, remaining dates are September 12\, 13\, 19\, 20\, 26\, 27\, and October 3\, 2026. \nHow Much Does Trolley to Trails Cost?\nThe service is free. It is operated by Mountain Transit in partnership with Visit Big Bear. \nWhere Does Trolley to Trails Start?\nThe primary published starting point is Village-Knickerbocker Road\, 630 Knickerbocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. Parking is available in the Knickerbocker Public Parking Lot. \nWhich Trails Can You Reach?\nThe current route serves stops including Towne Trail\, Stanfield Marsh Boardwalk\, Woodland Trail\, Nature Discovery Trail\, Cougar Crest Trail\, Grays Peak Trail\, Castle Rock Trail\, and Pine Knot Trail. \nDo You Have to Be a Hiker to Ride?\nNo. Visit Big Bear encourages non-hikers to ride the trolley for the scenic mountain and lake views as well. \nIs the Trolley Wheelchair Accessible?\nMountain Transit states that all of its vehicles are wheelchair accessible. Accessibility of individual trails and recreation stops varies\, so research your intended destination separately. \nWhere Should I Stay for Trolley to Trails?\nBig Bear Lake is the most practical general lodging base because the primary trolley pickup is at Knickerbocker Road in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City for couples\, families\, and larger groups. \nCheck A Chalet availability for your Trolley to Trails dates. \nPlan Your Trolley to Trails 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nTrolley to Trails 2026 makes it easier to explore several Big Bear recreation areas without driving from one trailhead to the next. The free seasonal route runs on Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays\, with service between 8:30 AM and 5:25 PM and seven currently published dates remaining through October 3. \nThe route reaches hiking and recreation stops around Big Bear Lake\, including Woodland Trail\, Cougar Crest\, Grays Peak\, Castle Rock\, Pine Knot Trail\, and Stanfield Marsh. Mountain Transit vehicles are wheelchair accessible and equipped with bike racks\, while non-hikers are also welcome to ride simply for the scenery. \nFor a more relaxed trip\, arrive in Big Bear the night before\, choose an early trolley\, spend the day exploring the trails\, and return to a cabin instead of scheduling the entire outing around a same-day mountain drive. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Trolley to Trails 2026. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/trolley-to-trails-12/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T090000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T130000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215620Z
CREATED:20261016T215620Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215620Z
UID:13951-1789203600-1789218000@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Summit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail
DESCRIPTION:Summit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail 2026: Date\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nSummit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail 2026 is a guided Big Bear mountain hike on Cougar Crest Trail featuring forested switchbacks\, elevated views\, rest stops\, wildlife-watching opportunities\, and local trail insight from a guide. The hike is rated moderate and covers approximately 4.6 to 5 miles round trip with about 800 to 900 feet of elevation gain. \nThe final currently published 2026 outing is Saturday\, September 12\, 2026\, from 9:00 AM to 1:00 PM. Visit Big Bear lists Cougar Crest Trail in Big Bear\, California 92314 as the event destination. \nThe hike is designed for adventurous beginners as well as experienced hikers. The published recommended minimum age is 12+\, dogs are allowed on leash\, and participants should arrive early and ready to hike. Late arrivals may not be accommodated\, and the event information states that bookings are nonrefundable. \nOne important planning note: the current Visit Big Bear event page contains a conflicting structured field that says “Location: Castle Rock Trail\,” while the event title\, description\, map\, and hike details repeatedly identify Cougar Crest Trail. For this guide\, Cougar Crest Trail is treated as the intended trail\, but registered participants should follow the meeting instructions supplied by Big Bear Hiking Adventures. \nBecause the hike begins at 9:00 AM and lasts approximately four hours\, staying in Big Bear the night before can make the morning much easier. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, allowing hikers to arrive Friday\, prepare their gear\, sleep locally\, and start Saturday without an early mountain commute. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Cougar Crest Trail hiking weekend. \nSummit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nSummit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail\n\n\nOrganizer\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\nFinal published 2026 date\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\n\nTime\n9:00 AM-1:00 PM\n\n\nDuration\nApproximately 4 hours\n\n\nTrail\nCougar Crest Trail\n\n\nArea\nBig Bear\, CA 92314\n\n\nDifficulty\nModerate\n\n\nDistance\nApproximately 4.6-5 miles round trip\n\n\nElevation gain\nApproximately 800-900 feet\n\n\nRecommended age\n12+\n\n\nDogs\nAllowed on leash\n\n\nArrival\nArrive early and ready to hike at the scheduled start time\n\n\nLate arrivals\nMay not be accommodated\n\n\nRefund policy\nNo refunds\n\n\nBooking information\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\nOfficial event information\nVisit Big Bear\n\n\n\nWhat Is Summit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail?\nSummit to Serenity is a guided mountain hike designed to combine a meaningful physical challenge with time to enjoy the landscape of the San Bernardino National Forest. \nThe route follows Cougar Crest Trail through forested terrain and switchbacks toward higher viewpoints overlooking the Big Bear area. Rather than functioning as a race or high-speed fitness outing\, the experience includes rest stops\, opportunities for photography and wildlife observation\, and guidance about the local trail environment. \nThe published event description specifically positions the hike between beginner and advanced experiences. It is described as suitable for adventurous beginners and experienced hikers alike\, provided participants are comfortable with a moderate trail\, several miles of walking\, and sustained elevation gain. \nBig Bear Hiking Adventures also emphasizes trail knowledge\, Leave No Trace principles\, responsible recreation\, and trail etiquette in its broader guided-hiking programs\, making the outing an opportunity to learn as well as hike. \nWhen Is Summit to Serenity in 2026?\nThe published 2026 series includes two September dates: \n\nSeptember 6\, 2026\nSeptember 12\, 2026\n\nAs of September 10\, the September 6 outing has passed\, leaving Saturday\, September 12 as the final currently published Summit to Serenity hike. \nThe hike begins at 9:00 AM and is scheduled to finish at approximately 1:00 PM. \nNo additional Summit to Serenity dates later in 2026 are currently published on the Visit Big Bear event calendar reviewed for this guide. Check the live Big Bear Hiking Adventures booking page in case another outing is added. \nWhere Does Summit to Serenity Take Place?\nThe event is advertised as a guided hike on Cougar Crest Trail in the Big Bear area. \nThe Visit Big Bear page currently lists: \nCougar Crest Trail\nBig Bear\, California 92314 \nHowever\, visitors should be aware of an inconsistency in the event listing. A structured field on the same page says “Location: Castle Rock Trail”\, even though the event title\, main description\, hike-detail section\, and mapped trailhead identify Cougar Crest Trail. \nBecause the event-specific narrative overwhelmingly points to Cougar Crest Trail\, travelers should not substitute Castle Rock Trail on their own. Follow the meeting-point and parking instructions sent with your reservation from Big Bear Hiking Adventures. \nHow Difficult Is the Cougar Crest Trail Hike?\nThe guided Summit to Serenity outing is rated moderate. \nThe published hike statistics are: \n\nDistance: approximately 4.6-5 miles round trip\nElevation gain: approximately 800-900 feet\nDuration: approximately four hours\nRecommended minimum age: 12+\n\nA moderate rating means the hike should not be treated like a casual paved walk. Participants need enough fitness to remain active for several hours while climbing and descending natural mountain terrain. \nAt the same time\, it is not marketed only to advanced hikers. Adventurous beginners who are comfortable with the distance and elevation profile may find it an approachable introduction to a longer guided mountain hike. \nWhat Can Hikers Expect on the Trail?\nThe experience centers on four features: forest scenery\, ridgeline views\, guided interpretation\, and a moderate physical challenge. \nParticipants can expect forested switchbacks during the climb\, followed by increasingly open views as the route gains elevation. The event description highlights scenic overlooks and opportunities to stop for photos along the way. \nThe guide also builds rest periods into the outing. That can make the experience more comfortable for hikers who want time to catch their breath and enjoy the landscape rather than concentrating exclusively on pace. \nWildlife spotting is possible\, but wild animals are never guaranteed. Treat wildlife encounters as a potential bonus rather than something every September 12 participant will necessarily experience. \nDo You Need to Reserve Summit to Serenity?\nThe event directs participants to Big Bear Hiking Adventures for booking. Anyone planning to attend should reserve through the organizer rather than simply arriving at the trailhead expecting to join the group. \nCheck the Big Bear Hiking Adventures booking page for current availability. \nA reliable current ticket price was not published in the sources reviewed for this article\, so no price is stated here. Use the live booking system for the current rate and remaining capacity. \nThe event information also states no refunds. Review the organizer’s booking terms and any weather-related policies before purchasing. \nWhat Time Should You Arrive?\nThe hike begins at 9:00 AM\, and participants are specifically instructed to arrive early and be ready to hike at the scheduled starting time. \nUnlike some of Big Bear Hiking Adventures’ shorter events\, the published Summit to Serenity description does not provide a precise “arrive 10 minutes early” requirement. A practical approach is to allow enough time for parking\, gathering your pack\, finding the group\, and completing any check-in requested in your confirmation email. \nDo not plan to arrive at 9:00 AM exactly. The event warning says late arrivals may not be accommodated\, which means a delayed arrival could result in missing the hike. \nParking and Transportation\nThe published event information identifies the Cougar Crest Trail area but does not provide a detailed event-specific parking procedure or state that transportation from another meeting point is included. \nRegistered hikers should therefore follow the organizer’s confirmation instructions for the exact meeting and parking location. \nCougar Crest is also a stop on Big Bear’s seasonal Trolley to Trails route\, but hikers should not assume public trolley service will work for this organized event without comparing the schedules carefully. The guided hike begins at 9:00 AM\, and participation requires being at the designated meeting point before departure. \nIf you intend to use public transportation instead of driving\, verify the current Mountain Transit timetable and confirm the hike meeting location first. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nThe organizer recommends bringing: \n\nWater\nComfortable hiking shoes\nSun protection\nWeather-appropriate layers\n\nFor a four-hour moderate mountain hike\, those basics matter. Bring enough water for your own needs rather than relying on drinking water being available on the trail. \nSun protection may include sunscreen\, sunglasses\, and a hat. Even when temperatures feel comfortable in the mountains\, prolonged sun exposure can still be significant. \nLayers are useful because morning temperatures\, sun exposure\, wind\, and conditions at higher points on the trail can differ from those near the trailhead. \nYou may also want a small snack\, a charged phone\, and any personal medication you normally carry while hiking. \nCan You Bring a Dog?\nYes. The published event information states that dogs are allowed on leash. \nThat does not mean the hike will suit every dog. Owners should consider whether their pet is conditioned for roughly five miles of mountain terrain and 800-900 feet of elevation gain. \nBring appropriate water for your dog\, keep the leash under control around other participants\, and follow all trail and organizer instructions. \nIf you are staying in an A Chalet property with a dog\, verify that specific property’s current pet policy before booking. Pet rules vary by cabin. \nIs Summit to Serenity Good for Kids?\nThe event lists a recommended minimum age of 12+. \nFor teenagers who already enjoy hiking\, the approximately four-hour schedule can make this a rewarding family outing. The combination of rest stops\, scenery\, and a guided format may also be easier to manage than independently tackling an unfamiliar mountain trail. \nParents should still evaluate their child’s real hiking experience. Age alone does not determine whether someone is prepared for five miles and close to 900 feet of elevation gain. \nIf you are uncertain about the physical demands\, contact Big Bear Hiking Adventures before reserving. \nHow Is Summit to Serenity Different From an Easy Big Bear Guided Hike?\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures offers shorter and easier outings as well\, but Summit to Serenity is designed to provide more of a sustained hiking challenge. \nFor comparison\, guided experiences on Woodland Trail may cover roughly 1.5 miles on easier terrain. Summit to Serenity increases both the distance and climbing requirement\, with approximately 4.6-5 miles and 800-900 feet of elevation gain. \nChoose Summit to Serenity if you want several hours on the trail and are comfortable earning the higher viewpoints through a moderate climb. Visitors primarily seeking a relaxing walk may prefer one of the organizer’s easier outings. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Summit to Serenity\nFriday: Arrive and Prepare for the Hike\nArrive in Big Bear on Friday afternoon or evening rather than attempting to combine a long morning drive with the Saturday 9:00 AM start. \nAfter checking into your cabin\, prepare your hiking shoes\, fill water bottles\, organize layers and sun protection\, and review the organizer’s meeting instructions. \nHave a good dinner and keep Friday evening relatively relaxed. A four-hour hike is more enjoyable when Saturday morning does not begin with rushed travel and last-minute packing. \nCheck A Chalet availability for the September 12 hiking weekend. \nSaturday Morning: Hike Cougar Crest Trail\nEat breakfast early enough to reach the meeting point comfortably before the 9:00 AM start. \nThe guided hike runs until approximately 1:00 PM. Expect the morning to include sustained walking\, climbing\, rest stops\, forest scenery\, and elevated views. \nAfterward\, return to your cabin for lunch or a break. Having local accommodations can be particularly appealing after several hours on the trail because you have somewhere comfortable to change clothes\, eat\, and recover before your evening plans. \nSaturday Afternoon and Evening\nKeep the rest of Saturday relatively flexible. After a moderate four-hour hike\, some travelers may want another activity while others will be happiest relaxing at their cabin. \nIf you head back out\, choose something that fits your energy level rather than automatically scheduling another demanding hike. \nSunday: Enjoy a Slower Big Bear Morning\nA two-night trip leaves Sunday for breakfast and a shorter Big Bear experience before departure. Depending on current conditions\, that might include lakeside time\, The Village\, or another easy outdoor stop. \nThis schedule turns the hike into the centerpiece of a weekend rather than a four-hour event surrounded by several more hours of driving. \nWhere to Stay for Summit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail\nFor a Cougar Crest Trail event\, Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City are the most relevant A Chalet destinations. Both keep visitors within the broader Big Bear Valley rather than adding a separate mountain-to-mountain commute from Lake Arrowhead. \nA Chalet’s current featured collection includes smaller and larger options. Heavenly Bay Retreat is currently listed with two bedrooms and two baths\, Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms and one bath\, Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths\, and Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths. \nFor groups wanting more space\, A Chalet currently lists Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape with four bedrooms and three baths. Bear Den is currently listed as a one-bedroom option. \nOne currently verified example for hikers is Conklin Canopy in Big Bear Lake. Its listing identifies three bedrooms and two bathrooms and states that it has an in-unit washer and dryer and parking for up to three vehicles. It also permits up to two well-behaved dogs under its published pet rules and fee structure\, which may be relevant for hikers bringing a dog to the event. \nAlways check the individual listing before reserving. Occupancy\, parking\, pet rules\, kitchens\, outdoor amenities\, and other features vary from property to property. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabins. \nTips for Booking a Cougar Crest Hiking Weekend Cabin\nReserve the guided hike before building the rest of the weekend. September 12 is the final currently published 2026 Summit to Serenity date. \nArrive Friday. The 9:00 AM Saturday start is much easier when you are already sleeping in the Big Bear area. \nConfirm the meeting point. The Visit Big Bear page contains a location-field conflict\, so follow Big Bear Hiking Adventures’ direct instructions rather than choosing a trailhead based only on one database field. \nChoose a cabin that fits your group. Check bedroom count\, occupancy\, and parking rather than booking based on photos alone. \nCheck the pet policy if bringing your dog. The hike allows leashed dogs\, but individual vacation-rental rules are separate. \nLeave Saturday afternoon flexible. After nearly five miles and several hours of hiking\, a relaxing afternoon may be more appealing than another tightly scheduled activity. \nCheck weather and trail conditions. Mountain conditions can change\, and the organizer’s latest guidance should take priority over an itinerary prepared in advance. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Summit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail in 2026?\nThe final currently published event is Saturday\, September 12\, 2026\, from 9:00 AM to 1:00 PM. An earlier outing was held on September 6. \nWhere Is Summit to Serenity Held?\nThe event is advertised as a guided hike on Cougar Crest Trail in Big Bear\, CA 92314. The Visit Big Bear listing contains a conflicting “Castle Rock Trail” structured location field\, so registered hikers should follow the organizer’s direct meeting instructions. \nHow Long Is the Summit to Serenity Hike?\nThe guided outing lasts approximately four hours and covers roughly 4.6 to 5 miles round trip. \nHow Difficult Is the Hike?\nThe event is rated moderate\, with approximately 800 to 900 feet of elevation gain. It is marketed to adventurous beginners and experienced hikers. \nCan Kids Attend?\nThe recommended minimum age is 12+. Parents should also consider the child’s fitness and experience with several-mile mountain hikes. \nAre Dogs Allowed?\nYes. Dogs are allowed on leash according to the published event information. Owners should make sure their dogs are conditioned for the trail’s distance and climbing. \nWhere Should I Stay for Summit to Serenity?\nBig Bear Lake and Big Bear City are the most practical A Chalet destinations for this Cougar Crest Trail event. Staying Friday night allows you to wake up locally for the 9:00 AM hike rather than beginning the day with a long mountain drive. \nBrowse A Chalet availability for your hiking weekend. \nPlan Your Summit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nSummit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail 2026 is a strong choice for visitors who want more than a casual nature walk without committing to an extreme mountain trek. The guided route combines approximately 4.6 to 5 miles of hiking\, 800 to 900 feet of elevation gain\, forested switchbacks\, scenic overlooks\, rest stops\, and several hours outdoors in the Big Bear mountains. \nThe final currently published outing is Saturday\, September 12\, from 9:00 AM to 1:00 PM. Bring water\, proper hiking shoes\, sun protection\, and layers\, arrive early\, and confirm the exact Cougar Crest meeting instructions with Big Bear Hiking Adventures before setting out. \nFor travelers coming from outside the valley\, turning the hike into an overnight trip makes the schedule easier. Arrive Friday\, prepare your gear at the cabin\, start Saturday without rushing\, enjoy the full guided hike\, and return to a comfortable base afterward instead of immediately beginning the drive home. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Summit to Serenity on the Cougar Crest Trail 2026. \n\n“` \nThe current Visit Big Bear event page confirms the September 12\, 2026 date\, 9:00 AM–1:00 PM hours\, Cougar Crest Trail framing\, and the conflicting “Castle Rock Trail” location field.  A Chalet’s current site confirms its Big Bear destinations and featured property bedroom/bath counts; the Conklin Canopy listing confirms its current Big Bear Lake location\, 3-bedroom/2-bath configuration\, parking\, laundry\, and dog policy.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/summit-to-serenity-on-the-cougar-crest-trail-2/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T100000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T140000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215631Z
CREATED:20261016T215631Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215631Z
UID:13861-1789207200-1789221600@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Golf Club Demos | Weekend 3
DESCRIPTION:Golf Club Demos Weekend 3 2026: Date\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nGolf Club Demos Weekend 3 2026 takes place on Saturday\, September 12\, 2026\, from 10:00 AM to 2:00 PM at the Bear Mountain Golf Course Driving Range in Big Bear Lake. \nBig Bear Mountain Resort is hosting free golf club demos\, fittings\, and related equipment experiences from Cleveland Golf and Srixon. Attendance is free and open to the public\, and the resort says no advance registration or waiver is required. Golfers can simply arrive during the event window. \nThe driving range is located between holes 4 and 6. The resort directs visitors to park at the Cedar Club Lot and walk a short distance to the range. Its current event page lists the driving range location as 905 Club View Drive\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\, while the Bear Mountain Golf Course Pro Shop is at 43092 Goldmine Drive. \nDemo clubs will also be available for purchase through the Pro Shop\, making the event especially useful for golfers who want to compare equipment before deciding whether to buy. \nIf you are coming from outside the mountains\, turning the demo day into an overnight golf getaway can make the trip more enjoyable. An A Chalet cabin gives you time to arrive Friday\, attend the Saturday demo without rushing\, play or practice elsewhere during the weekend\, and relax in Big Bear before heading home. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for Golf Club Demos Weekend 3. \nGolf Club Demos Weekend 3 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nGolf Club Demos | Weekend 3\n\n\nDate\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\n\nTime\n10:00 AM-2:00 PM\n\n\nVenue\nBear Mountain Golf Course Driving Range\n\n\nDriving range address\n905 Club View Drive\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nGolf course / Pro Shop address\n43092 Goldmine Drive\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nBrands\nCleveland Golf and Srixon\n\n\nActivities\nFree club demos\, fittings\, and equipment testing\n\n\nAdmission\nFree and open to the public\n\n\nAdvance registration\nNot required\n\n\nWaiver\nNot required for attendance\, according to the current event page\n\n\nDemo clubs for sale\nYes\, through the Bear Mountain Golf Course Pro Shop\n\n\nParking\nCedar Club Lot\, followed by a short walk to the driving range\n\n\nContact\nBig Bear Mountain Resort\n\n\nPhone\n844-462-2327\n\n\nOfficial event page\nBig Bear Mountain Resort Club Demo Day\n\n\nGolf course information\nBear Mountain Golf Course\n\n\n\nWhat Is Golf Club Demos Weekend 3?\nGolf Club Demos Weekend 3 is a free equipment-testing event at Bear Mountain Golf Course that gives golfers an opportunity to try clubs from Cleveland Golf and Srixon before making a purchase. \nThe event is held on the Bear Mountain driving range rather than on the golf course itself. That setup allows participants to focus on club feel\, ball flight\, setup\, and fitting feedback without needing to play a full round. \nBig Bear Mountain Resort describes the event as including club demos\, fittings\, and more. The current public listing does not specify exactly which club models\, shaft combinations\, lofts\, or fitting systems will be available\, so golfers who are hoping to test one particular model should contact the resort or Pro Shop before making the trip. \nThis is the third weekend in the resort’s 2026 club-demo series\, which is why the event appears as “Weekend 3” on Visit Big Bear’s calendar. \nWhen and Where Is Golf Club Demos Weekend 3?\nThe event takes place: \nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n10:00 AM to 2:00 PM \nThe official Big Bear Mountain Resort event page lists the location as: \nBear Mountain Golf Course Driving Range\n905 Club View Drive\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe range is located between holes 4 and 6. \nThe Bear Mountain Golf Course Pro Shop is located separately at the base of Bear Mountain Ski Resort: \n43092 Goldmine Drive\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThis distinction matters because some event listings use the general golf course address while the resort’s current event page provides the more specific Club View Drive location for the driving range. \nWhat Can Golfers Expect at the Demo Day?\nThe main purpose is to give golfers direct experience with Cleveland and Srixon equipment. \nConfirmed activities include: \n\nGolf club demos\nClub fittings\nOpportunities to test Cleveland Golf equipment\nOpportunities to test Srixon equipment\nAccess to golf equipment specialists during the event\nOpportunity to purchase available demo clubs through the Pro Shop\n\nThe resort has not published a fixed fitting schedule or appointment calendar. Because attendance is drop-in\, there may be periods when several golfers want to test equipment at the same time. \nIf a fitting is your main reason for attending\, arriving closer to the 10:00 AM start may provide more time to work through different options before the event ends at 2:00 PM. \nIs the Golf Club Demo Event Free?\nYes. Big Bear Mountain Resort states that attendance is free and open to the public. \nThe resort also says that no advance registration or waiver is required. Visitors can simply arrive on the day of the event. \nFree attendance applies to the demo event itself. It should not be interpreted as free green fees\, free golf rounds\, free merchandise\, or free equipment purchases. \nIf you decide to buy a demo club or another item at the Pro Shop\, normal retail pricing applies. \nDo You Need a Tee Time to Attend?\nNo tee time is required simply to attend the Golf Club Demos event. \nThe demo is being held on the driving range and is separate from booking a round of golf at Bear Mountain Golf Course. \nIf you want to play before or after the demo\, book a tee time separately through Bear Mountain Golf Course. Operating conditions and availability can change with weather and resort operations\, so do not assume a same-day tee time will be available. \nGolfers trying to combine a round with the 10:00 AM-2:00 PM demo should leave enough time between activities rather than creating a schedule that depends on an exact pace of play. \nWhat Is a Golf Club Fitting?\nA club fitting is a process used to match golf equipment more closely to an individual player’s swing and physical characteristics. \nDepending on the fitting setup and available equipment\, that may involve comparing factors such as clubhead design\, shaft characteristics\, loft\, length\, lie\, feel\, launch\, and ball flight. \nA fitting does not automatically mean the most expensive or newest club will be the best choice. The point is to compare equipment and determine what produces useful results for your swing. \nThe exact fitting process offered during Golf Club Demos Weekend 3 has not been published in detail\, so participants should not assume that every specification can be custom-measured or every product configuration will be available. \nWhy Try Clubs Before Buying?\nGolf clubs can feel very different even when their specifications look similar on paper. \nA driver may launch higher or lower than expected. An iron may feel more stable through impact. A wedge may suit your preferred turf interaction better than another model. Trying equipment on a range gives golfers useful information that cannot be gained simply by reading product specifications. \nThe opportunity is particularly valuable for golfers considering a significant equipment change\, such as: \n\nReplacing an older driver\nChanging iron models\nTesting game-improvement equipment\nComparing wedges\nExploring different shaft characteristics\nUpdating clubs after a major swing change\n\nThe event does not require you to buy anything\, so it can also be useful simply for learning what types of equipment feel comfortable. \nCan You Buy the Demo Clubs?\nYes. Big Bear Mountain Resort specifically states that demo clubs will be available for purchase at the Pro Shop. \nThe public event information does not list individual club prices\, available models\, inventory quantities\, or whether every club being demonstrated will be offered for sale. \nIf you find a club you like\, ask staff about the specific item rather than assuming another identical demo unit will be available later. \nThe Pro Shop is located at the base of Bear Mountain Ski Resort at 43092 Goldmine Drive. \nWhere Should You Park?\nBig Bear Mountain Resort instructs event visitors to park at the Cedar Club Lot and then walk a short distance to the driving range. \nDo not navigate only to the Pro Shop and assume that is the event parking location. \nOnce you arrive at the Cedar Club area\, follow current signs and resort staff directions to the driving range between holes 4 and 6. \nThe event begins at 10:00 AM\, so arrive with enough time to park and walk to the range before you want to start testing clubs. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nYou do not need to bring a full set of clubs simply to test demo equipment\, but a few items can make the experience more useful. \n\nGolf shoes or comfortable athletic shoes\nYour golf glove\nWater\nSun protection\nLayers for changing mountain temperatures\nYour current club if you want a familiar comparison point\nNotes about your usual distances or equipment specifications\nA payment method if you may purchase a demo club\n\nIf you bring one of your existing clubs for comparison\, keep track of it carefully around the fitting area. \nSeptember weather in Big Bear can change during the day\, so dressing in layers is more practical than assuming the 10:00 AM temperature will remain the same through 2:00 PM. \nIs the Event Good for Beginner Golfers?\nYes\, beginners can benefit from a demo day\, especially if they are starting to think about buying their own equipment. \nYou do not need a low handicap to notice whether one club feels easier to swing than another. \nHowever\, newer golfers should avoid assuming they need a complete premium set simply because they are attending a brand demo. Use the event as an opportunity to ask questions and learn how different designs affect performance. \nIf you have never played golf or used a driving range before\, let event staff know your experience level so they can advise you appropriately. \nWhat Is Bear Mountain Golf Course?\nBear Mountain Golf Course is Big Bear Mountain Resort’s mountain golf venue in Big Bear Lake. \nThe course is a nine-hole\, par-35 layout situated near the base of Bear Mountain. Its setting combines golf with the surrounding San Bernardino Mountains\, making it a popular summer and fall recreation option. \nThe facility includes the golf course\, driving range\, and Pro Shop\, with rental and tee-time services offered during normal golf operations. \nGolf operations remain weather dependent\, and the resort notes that operating dates can change because of conditions or other circumstances. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Golf Club Demos Weekend 3\nFriday: Arrive in Big Bear Lake\nCheck into your cabin Friday afternoon or evening instead of combining Saturday morning mountain traffic with a fixed 10:00 AM event start. \nHave dinner\, inspect your existing equipment if you plan to bring comparison clubs\, and make a short list of what you actually want to test. \nSaturday Morning: Head to Bear Mountain\nHave breakfast at the cabin and head toward the Cedar Club Lot with enough time to park and walk to the range. \nIf you are particularly interested in a fitting\, arriving near the beginning of the event gives you the full four-hour window. \n10:00 AM-2:00 PM: Test Clubs and Ask Questions\nTry Cleveland Golf and Srixon equipment\, compare options\, and take advantage of fitting guidance where available. \nAvoid rushing through every club simply to hit more balls. A smaller number of thoughtful comparisons may be more useful than testing everything on the rack. \nSaturday Afternoon: Continue Your Golf Weekend\nAfter the demo\, stop at the Pro Shop if you are considering a purchase or have follow-up questions. \nIf you have a separate tee time\, head to the course according to your reservation. Otherwise\, use the rest of the afternoon to explore Big Bear Lake or return to your cabin and relax. \nCheck A Chalet availability for September 11–13. \nSunday: Play\, Practice\, or Explore\nSunday can be used for a round of golf if tee times are available\, another outdoor activity\, or a relaxed morning in Big Bear before heading home. \nIf you purchased a club Saturday\, resist the temptation to judge it from only a few swings the next morning. Equipment changes often feel more useful after several practice sessions. \nWhere to Stay for Golf Club Demos Weekend 3\nBecause the demo takes place at Bear Mountain Golf Course in Big Bear Lake\, an A Chalet property in Big Bear Lake is the most practical lodging choice. Big Bear City can also work well if a particular cabin better matches your group size and plans. \nFor golfers who want to stay close to the mountain recreation side of Big Bear\, A Chalet’s current inventory includes properties with different group capacities and layouts. \nOne currently listed option is Butte Bungalow\, which the live A Chalet booking site lists for up to nine guests with three bedrooms and two bathrooms. Current listing highlights include an outdoor grill\, hot tub\, and Wi-Fi. \nFor a larger golf group\, Pegasus is currently listed for up to 15 guests with four bedrooms and three bathrooms\, with an outdoor grill\, video games\, and hot tub among its listed features. \nSmaller groups may prefer one of A Chalet’s two-bedroom options rather than booking more space than they need. \nA vacation rental can be useful for a golf weekend because the group has shared living space\, room to organize equipment\, and a kitchen for breakfast before an early tee time or demo session. \nAlways check the live listing before booking to confirm current occupancy\, parking limits\, amenities\, and house rules. \nBrowse current A Chalet rentals for Golf Club Demos Weekend 3. \nTips for Booking a Big Bear Golf Weekend Cabin\nArrive Friday. Staying the night before makes it easier to be at the range near the 10:00 AM start without an early drive into the mountains. \nChoose Big Bear Lake first. Bear Mountain Golf Course is in Big Bear Lake\, so local lodging keeps the weekend centered near the event. \nConfirm parking for your group. Golf trips often involve several vehicles and bulky equipment\, so check the rental’s parking allowance. \nChoose enough storage and living space. A full golf group may bring multiple bags\, shoes\, luggage\, and purchases from the Pro Shop. \nBook golf separately. Attending the free demo does not reserve a tee time or include green fees. \nCheck operating conditions close to the trip. Mountain golf is weather dependent\, and resort operations can change. \nLeave room in your vehicle. If you plan to buy a club\, make sure golf bags and luggage do not already fill every available space. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Golf Club Demos Weekend 3 2026?\nGolf Club Demos Weekend 3 is Saturday\, September 12\, 2026\, from 10:00 AM to 2:00 PM. \nWhere Is the Golf Club Demo Event?\nThe event is at the Bear Mountain Golf Course Driving Range\, 905 Club View Drive\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. The range is between holes 4 and 6. \nIs the Club Demo Free?\nYes. Big Bear Mountain Resort states that attendance is free and open to the public\, with no advance registration or waiver required. \nWhich Golf Brands Will Be There?\nThe confirmed participating brands are Cleveland Golf and Srixon. \nCan You Buy Clubs at the Event?\nYes. Demo clubs will be available for purchase through the Bear Mountain Golf Course Pro Shop\, subject to actual event-day inventory. \nWhere Do You Park?\nBig Bear Mountain Resort instructs visitors to park at the Cedar Club Lot and walk a short distance to the driving range. \nWhere Should Golfers Stay?\nAn A Chalet cabin in Big Bear Lake is the most practical base for an event at Bear Mountain Golf Course. Staying overnight makes it easier to attend the demo\, add a tee time or another activity\, and enjoy the mountain weekend without a rushed same-day drive. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for the September 12 golf weekend. \nPlan Your Golf Club Demos Weekend 3 Getaway With A Chalet\nGolf Club Demos Weekend 3 2026 gives golfers a free opportunity to test Cleveland Golf and Srixon equipment at the Bear Mountain Golf Course Driving Range on Saturday\, September 12\, from 10:00 AM to 2:00 PM. \nAttendance is free\, no advance registration or waiver is required\, and demo clubs will be available for purchase at the Pro Shop. Visitors should park at the Cedar Club Lot and walk to the range between holes 4 and 6. \nWhether you are seriously shopping for new equipment or simply curious about how different clubs feel\, the event can fit easily into a Big Bear golf weekend. \nStay Friday night\, attend the Saturday demo\, add a separately booked round or other mountain activity\, and return to a comfortable cabin afterward rather than driving home immediately. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Golf Club Demos Weekend 3 2026 getaway. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/__trashed-24__trashed/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T163000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T193000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215620Z
CREATED:20261016T215620Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215620Z
UID:13952-1789230600-1789241400@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Skyline at Sundown
DESCRIPTION:Skyline at Sundown 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nSkyline at Sundown 2026 is a ticketed mountaintop dining and live-music experience at Snow Summit in Big Bear Lake. Guests ride Chair 1 to the top of the mountain for an outdoor buffet-style BBQ dinner\, live entertainment\, mountain views\, and sunset before downloading back to the Snow Summit base area. \nThe broader 2026 Skyline at Sundown season is published as running from June 5 through September 12\, 2026 on select dates. The final published dates are September 10\, September 11\, and September 12. Activities run approximately 4:30 PM to 7:30 PM\, with Chair 1 beginning guest loading at 4:30 PM and the final chair returning guests to the base by 7:30 PM.  \nA special event ticket is required\, and reservations are date specific. If you plan to attend more than one Skyline at Sundown date\, Big Bear Mountain Resort states that a separate reservation is required for each event date.  \nFor visitors traveling from outside Big Bear\, staying overnight is especially useful for this event because the experience finishes after sunset. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear communities\, allowing you to return to a mountain rental after the chairlift ride rather than immediately beginning a nighttime drive home.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Skyline at Sundown trip. \nSkyline at Sundown 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nSkyline at Sundown\n\n\n2026 season\nJune 5-September 12\, 2026\, on select dates\n\n\nFinal published dates\nSeptember 10\, 11\, and 12\, 2026\n\n\nEvent hours\n4:30 PM-7:30 PM\n\n\nVenue\nSnow Summit\n\n\nAddress\n880 Summit Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nExperience\nChairlift ride\, mountaintop buffet-style BBQ dinner\, live entertainment\, and sunset views\n\n\nChair 1 loading\nBegins at 4:30 PM\n\n\nLast chair up\n5:30 PM\n\n\nFood service\n5:30 PM-6:30 PM\n\n\nLive entertainment\n4:45 PM-7:15 PM\n\n\nDownload begins\n6:30 PM\n\n\nLast chair down\n7:30 PM\n\n\nTickets\nSpecial event ticket required; reservations are date specific\n\n\nParking\nSnow Summit parking lot\n\n\nContact\nBig Bear Mountain Resort — 844.GO2.BEAR\n\n\nOfficial website\nBig Bear Mountain Resort Skyline at Sundown\n\n\n\nBig Bear Mountain Resort’s current event calendar confirms that Skyline at Sundown is a special event requiring a ticket\, while Visit Big Bear confirms the Snow Summit address\, parking location\, operating schedule\, and September 12 end date.  \nWhat Is Skyline at Sundown?\nSkyline at Sundown takes a familiar Big Bear activity—the scenic chairlift ride at Snow Summit—and turns it into an evening dining experience at elevation. \nRather than simply riding to the top for daytime sightseeing\, guests take Chair 1 up during the late afternoon\, spend the evening at the summit for BBQ dining and live music\, watch the mountain light change toward sunset\, and then ride back to the Snow Summit base area. \nThe centerpiece is an outdoor\, buffet-style BBQ dinner. Live entertainment runs alongside the dining portion of the evening\, giving visitors time to eat\, take in the views\, listen to music\, and enjoy the mountaintop setting rather than treating the chairlift as a quick round trip.  \nIt is a particularly natural fit for couples looking for an evening activity\, families that enjoy scenic mountain experiences\, and groups of friends who want to combine dinner and entertainment without leaving the Big Bear area. \nBecause the experience takes place at the top of Snow Summit\, guests should remember that conditions at elevation can be cooler and windier than temperatures around Big Bear Lake or The Village. \nWhen Is Skyline at Sundown in 2026?\nThe published Skyline at Sundown 2026 season spans June 5 through September 12\, with events held on selected dates rather than every evening during that period.  \nFor visitors planning at the end of the season\, the final published dates are: \n\nThursday\, September 10\, 2026\nFriday\, September 11\, 2026\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\nVisit Big Bear currently lists all three dates as upcoming events\, while Big Bear Mountain Resort’s event calendar confirms the closing September 11-12 sessions and identifies September 12 as the final date.  \nDo not assume that Skyline at Sundown continues beyond September 12. No later 2026 event dates are currently published. \nWhat Is the Skyline at Sundown Schedule?\nSkyline at Sundown follows a structured chairlift\, food-service\, and entertainment schedule: \n\n\n\nTime\nActivity\n\n\n\n\n4:30 PM\nChair 1 opens for guest loading\n\n\n4:45 PM\nLive entertainment begins\n\n\n5:30 PM\nLast chair up to the summit\n\n\n5:30-6:30 PM\nBuffet-style BBQ food service\n\n\n6:30 PM\nChair 1 download begins\n\n\n7:15 PM\nLive entertainment concludes\n\n\n7:30 PM\nLast chair down; guests return to the base area\n\n\n\nThe 5:30 PM last-chair-up time is especially important. Arriving after it could prevent you from reaching the mountaintop event even though entertainment continues later in the evening. Give yourself enough time to park\, check in\, and reach the loading area well before that cutoff.  \nWho Is Performing at the Final Skyline at Sundown Events?\nBig Bear Mountain Resort has published live entertainment for the final 2026 dates. The current schedule lists: \n\nSeptember 10: Luke Metzler\nSeptember 11: Nikki Sparks\nSeptember 12: Josh Rogan\n\nLive entertainment is scheduled from approximately 4:45 PM until 7:15 PM.  \nBecause entertainment schedules can occasionally change\, check the Big Bear Mountain Resort event calendar again on your event date before traveling if seeing a particular performer is important to your plans. \nTickets\, Reservations\, Parking\, and Transportation\nDo You Need a Ticket for Skyline at Sundown?\nYes. Big Bear Mountain Resort identifies Skyline at Sundown as a special event requiring its own event ticket. A regular plan to visit Snow Summit should not be assumed to include access to the dinner experience.  \nThe current public event information reviewed for this guide does not publish a single universal 2026 ticket price. Check the live reservation system for your selected date rather than relying on an older price. \nAre Skyline at Sundown Reservations Date Specific?\nYes. Reservations are date specific. Big Bear Mountain Resort states that guests attending multiple special-event dates need a separate booking for each date.  \nThat makes it important to double-check the date shown in your confirmation\, especially during the September 10-12 closing run when events occur on consecutive evenings. \nWhere Do You Park?\nParking is listed at the Snow Summit parking lot. The resort address is: \nSnow Summit\n880 Summit Blvd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nParking availability can vary depending on resort activity and overall visitation. Since the last chair up departs at 5:30 PM\, arriving early is more important than trying to minimize time at the base area.  \nHow Early Should You Arrive?\nNo universal early-arrival requirement is published on the event listing\, but Chair 1 opens at 4:30 PM and the last chair up is at 5:30 PM. \nA practical plan is to arrive early enough to park\, complete any ticket or check-in steps\, and be ready to load without depending on the final chair. Guests traveling into Big Bear from outside the valley should add even more time for mountain traffic or road conditions. \nWhat Should You Bring to Skyline at Sundown?\nThe event takes place outdoors at the top of Snow Summit\, so pack for an evening at mountain elevation rather than only for the daytime temperature around Big Bear Lake. \n\nA warm layer or jacket: Temperatures can drop quickly toward sunset.\nClosed-toed or secure footwear: Choose shoes suitable for walking around a mountain resort environment.\nYour reservation confirmation: Keep your date-specific event details accessible.\nSun protection: Sunglasses and sunscreen can still be useful during the late-afternoon portion.\nA charged phone or camera: The event is built around elevated mountain and sunset views.\nAny personal medication or necessities: Once at the summit\, returning to your vehicle is not as simple as stepping out of a restaurant.\n\nAvoid carrying more than you need. You’ll be riding a chairlift to and from the summit\, so a compact layer and small personal bag are generally easier to manage than bulky belongings. \nIs Skyline at Sundown Good for Families?\nThe event is promoted by Big Bear Mountain Resort as an experience to share with family or friends\, and its combination of a chairlift ride\, BBQ dinner\, live music\, and views can work well for multigenerational groups.  \nHowever\, the event information reviewed for this guide does not publish a specific universal minimum age or detailed accessibility policy for Skyline at Sundown. \nFamilies with young children\, and anyone with concerns about loading or unloading a chairlift\, should review Big Bear Mountain Resort’s current lift policies or contact the resort at 844.GO2.BEAR before purchasing tickets. \nLikewise\, visitors requiring specific mobility accommodations should confirm accessibility for both Chair 1 and the summit event setup rather than assuming every part of the experience will meet their needs. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Skyline at Sundown\nArrival Day: Check Into Big Bear Lake\nConsider reaching Big Bear before the event day or arriving early enough that you do not have to move directly from mountain traffic to the chairlift. \nCheck into your cabin\, settle in\, and confirm your ticket date and the current Snow Summit event status. A relaxed afternoon gives you time to change clothes and pack a jacket before heading to the resort. \nEvent Evening: Head to Snow Summit Early\nDrive to Snow Summit with enough time to park well ahead of the 5:30 PM last-chair-up deadline. \nChair 1 begins loading at 4:30 PM\, and live entertainment starts at 4:45 PM. Getting to the summit earlier gives you more time to take in the surroundings before food service begins at 5:30 PM. \nEnjoy the buffet-style BBQ\, live music\, and changing light across the mountains. Chair download begins at 6:30 PM\, but you do not have to leave immediately; entertainment continues until 7:15 PM\, with the last chair down at 7:30 PM.  \nOnce you’re back at the Snow Summit base\, an overnight cabin gives you somewhere nearby to end the evening without turning a sunset event into a late mountain drive. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for Skyline at Sundown. \nNext Morning: Explore More of Big Bear\nUse the following morning for another Big Bear experience before departure. Depending on weather\, operating conditions\, and your interests\, that could mean spending time around Big Bear Lake\, exploring The Village\, or choosing another seasonal mountain activity. \nA slower morning is also useful for groups that stayed for the entire Skyline at Sundown program and returned to the cabin after dark. \nWhere to Stay for Skyline at Sundown\nBecause Skyline at Sundown is held at Snow Summit in Big Bear Lake\, accommodations in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear communities make the most geographic sense. There is little benefit to staying in Lake Arrowhead solely for an event centered at Snow Summit. \nA Chalet currently offers vacation rentals across Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear City\, and Lake Arrowhead\, with cabin sizes ranging from smaller one-bedroom stays to larger multi-bedroom properties. For Skyline at Sundown\, focus on the company’s Big Bear inventory.  \nCouples can compare smaller properties such as the currently listed one-bedroom Bear Den\, while families can consider two-bedroom options such as Heavenly Bay Retreat\, Jaybird Cabin\, or Maverick’s Cabin. Larger groups can compare three- and four-bedroom listings including Conklin Canopy\, Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape.  \nFor example\, A Chalet’s current listing for Conklin Canopy identifies it as a three-bedroom\, two-bathroom Big Bear Lake property with parking for up to three vehicles.  \nIf amenities such as a kitchen\, hot tub\, pet-friendly policy\, laundry facilities\, or specific parking capacity matter to your trip\, verify them on the current individual property page. Do not assume that features listed at one A Chalet cabin apply to all properties. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nSecure your Skyline at Sundown reservation first. Tickets are date specific\, so confirm your event night before choosing lodging dates. \nStay in Big Bear. Snow Summit is in Big Bear Lake\, making Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear City the practical lodging areas. \nPlan around the evening finish. The last chair down is at 7:30 PM\, so a cabin booked for that night lets you return somewhere comfortable after dark. \nChoose enough space for your group. Couples can keep the stay simple with a smaller cabin\, while families or friend groups may benefit from multiple bedrooms and a shared living area. \nVerify every important amenity. Parking capacity\, kitchens\, pet policies\, outdoor features\, and other amenities vary by cabin. \nConsider arriving one night early. This removes the stress of trying to reach a fixed chairlift departure window after a long drive into the mountains. \nCheck the event again before leaving. Mountain weather and resort operations can change. Review current Big Bear Mountain Resort information on your event day. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen is Skyline at Sundown 2026?\nThe overall season is published from June 5 through September 12\, 2026 on select dates. The final published events are September 10\, September 11\, and September 12.  \nWhere is Skyline at Sundown?\nThe event takes place at the top of Snow Summit\, 880 Summit Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. Guests use Chair 1 to travel between the base and summit.  \nDo You Need a Ticket for Skyline at Sundown?\nYes. Skyline at Sundown requires a special event ticket\, and reservations are date specific. A separate booking is required for each event date you attend.  \nWhat Does Skyline at Sundown Include?\nThe published experience includes the mountaintop setting\, an outdoor buffet-style BBQ dinner\, live entertainment\, sunset views\, and Chair 1 access associated with the event schedule. Confirm the live booking description for the exact inclusions attached to your ticket.  \nWhere Do You Park?\nParking is available at the Snow Summit parking lot. Arrive with enough time to park and reach Chair 1 well before the 5:30 PM last-chair-up deadline.  \nWhat Should I Bring?\nBring a jacket or warm layer\, secure footwear\, your reservation information\, and appropriate sun protection for the late-afternoon portion. Conditions at the top of Snow Summit may be cooler than at lake level. \nWhere Should I Stay for Skyline at Sundown?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is the most practical choice because the event is at Snow Summit. A Chalet offers cabins for couples\, families\, and larger groups throughout the Big Bear area. Browse A Chalet’s current Big Bear availability. \nPlan Your Skyline at Sundown 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nSkyline at Sundown 2026 combines several classic Big Bear experiences into one evening: a scenic chairlift ride\, mountain views\, outdoor dining\, live music\, and sunset from the top of Snow Summit. \nThe 2026 season concludes on September 12\, with final published events on September 10\, 11\, and 12. Chair 1 begins loading at 4:30 PM\, the last ride up is at 5:30 PM\, food is served from 5:30 PM to 6:30 PM\, live entertainment continues until 7:15 PM\, and the final chair returns guests to the base area at 7:30 PM.  \nReserve your date-specific ticket through Big Bear Mountain Resort\, check resort conditions before leaving\, and arrive early enough that you are not relying on the final chair to reach the summit. \nFor visitors coming from outside the mountains\, staying overnight makes the evening easier to enjoy. Check into your cabin before the event\, ride to the summit without worrying about an immediate drive home\, return after sunset\, and use the following morning for another Big Bear activity. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Skyline at Sundown 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/skyline-at-sundown-7/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T170000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T200000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215628Z
CREATED:20261016T215628Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215628Z
UID:13953-1789232400-1789243200@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Live Music at Barrel 33
DESCRIPTION:Live Music at Barrel 33 2026: September & October Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 brings acoustic afternoons and evening performances to Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake throughout September and into early October. The venue combines live music with its food\, craft beer\, and wine offerings at 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. Performance times vary by artist and date\, so checking the schedule before arriving is important.  \nAs of September 10\, the next confirmed performances begin with Matt & Emily on September 11 from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM\, followed by Local Legends on September 12. Additional September performers include Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, Matt & Emily\, and The Blackwells. Ryan Bieber is currently scheduled for October 2 and October 3.  \nOne schedule detail deserves attention: Visit Big Bear currently lists Brad on September 30 and again on October 6\, but Barrel 33’s own live event calendar currently identifies September 30 as Locals Night and a Pirate Ship Wine Cruise rather than a Brad performance\, and it does not currently display an October 6 Brad event. Because the venue is the primary source\, this guide treats those two performances as unconfirmed and recommends checking Barrel 33 directly before planning around them.  \nVisitors traveling from outside Big Bear can easily build a cabin stay around one of these performances. A Chalet currently offers Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City vacation rentals for couples\, families\, and groups\, making an overnight stay practical if you’d rather enjoy the evening without immediately driving down the mountain afterward.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear live music trip. \nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nLive Music at Barrel 33\n\n\nCurrent event period\nSeptember 2026 into early October 2026\n\n\nVenue\nBarrel 33\n\n\nAddress\n40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nPerformance times\nVary by date\, generally between 1:30 PM and 8:00 PM\n\n\nConfirmed upcoming artists\nMatt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, The Blackwells\, and Ryan Bieber\n\n\nAdmission\nNo universal live-music admission charge is currently published on Barrel 33’s event listings\n\n\nFood and drinks\nFood\, craft beer\, and wine are promoted alongside the live music\n\n\nParking\nUse appropriate public parking serving The Village and follow posted restrictions\n\n\nPhone\n909-878-0838\n\n\nRecommended arrival\nNo official early-arrival time is published; arriving 15-30 minutes before your chosen performance is a practical buffer\n\n\nOfficial venue calendar\nBarrel 33 Events\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear describes the live-music series as a recurring event from September 1 through October 6\, while Barrel 33’s own calendar confirms individual performances through October 3 at the time of writing. Because performer schedules can change\, use the venue calendar as the final source before traveling.  \nWhat Is Live Music at Barrel 33?\nLive Music at Barrel 33 is a series of individual acoustic and live-band performances at Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake’s Village area. Rather than one large concert with a fixed lineup and ticket package\, the venue schedules different performers on selected afternoons and evenings. \nBarrel 33 promotes these performances alongside food\, craft beer\, wine\, and a casual social atmosphere. That makes the series easy to add to a Big Bear itinerary without dedicating an entire day to an event.  \nSome performances are early-afternoon acoustic sets\, while many Friday and Saturday appearances run from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM. This variation is useful for travelers: an afternoon Brad performance can fit between daytime activities\, while an evening show can serve as the main plan after hiking\, lake time\, shopping\, or sightseeing. \nThe current event descriptions do not publish reserved seating arrangements\, a universal cover charge\, or a formal concert-style admission process. Visitors should therefore check the listing for their specific date rather than assuming every performance operates identically. \nWhen Is Live Music at Barrel 33 in 2026?\nThe official Barrel 33 calendar and Visit Big Bear currently confirm a substantial September schedule\, followed by Ryan Bieber performances on October 2 and October 3.  \nAs of September 10\, the confirmed upcoming schedule is: \n\n\n\nDate\nPerformer\nTime\n\n\n\n\nSeptember 11\, 2026\nMatt & Emily\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 12\, 2026\nLocal Legends\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 15\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nSeptember 17\, 2026\nTanner\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 18\, 2026\nSergio Snow\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 19\, 2026\nSergio Snow\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 22\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nSeptember 25\, 2026\nMatt & Emily\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 26\, 2026\nThe Blackwells\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 29\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nOctober 2\, 2026\nRyan Bieber\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nOctober 3\, 2026\nRyan Bieber\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\n\nThese dates and times are confirmed on Barrel 33’s current official event calendar.  \nEarlier September performances included Brad on September 1 and September 8\, Katie on September 4\, Austin Rogers on September 5\, and Dana on September 6.  \nWhat About the September 30 and October 6 Performances?\nThere is currently a discrepancy between published sources. \nVisit Big Bear’s event page lists Brad on September 30 from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM and Brad on October 6 from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM.  \nHowever\, Barrel 33’s own current calendar lists September 30 as Locals Night from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM and also lists a Pirate Ship Wine Cruise that evening. It does not currently show a September 30 Brad performance or October 6 Brad event.  \nBecause Barrel 33 is the venue and primary source\, travelers should not plan a trip specifically around September 30 or October 6 live music unless the venue confirms those performances. This is exactly the kind of schedule detail worth rechecking shortly before your visit. \nWhere Is Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake?\nBarrel 33 is located at: \nBarrel 33\n40754 Village Dr.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315\nPhone: 909-878-0838 \nVisit Big Bear confirms the venue at 40754 Village Dr. in Big Bear Lake. Barrel 33’s own event calendar also lists the Village Drive location and the same phone number.  \nThe location places visitors in The Village area\, so a live-music performance can be combined naturally with time spent walking through central Big Bear Lake before or afterward. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect?\nThe experience depends somewhat on the day you attend. Brad’s Tuesday appearances are promoted as Afternoon Acoustic sessions and currently run from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM. Friday and Saturday live-music events usually run in the early evening\, often from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM.  \nBarrel 33 promotes live music alongside: \n\nFood\nCraft beer\nWine\nIndividual acoustic artists and bands\nA casual Village setting\n\nThe venue’s current event descriptions do not publish a detailed set list\, number of performance breaks\, stage schedule\, reserved-seat system\, or performer-specific admission fee. Those details should not be invented or assumed from another date. \nIf seeing a particular artist is the reason for your trip\, check Barrel 33’s calendar on the day of the performance. Live entertainment schedules can change due to artist availability\, weather\, or venue considerations. \nTickets\, Parking\, and Transportation\nDo You Need Tickets for Live Music at Barrel 33?\nBarrel 33’s current individual live-music listings do not publish a universal ticket price or cover charge. The venue simply invites guests to attend for live music\, food\, craft beer\, and wine.  \nThat does not guarantee that every future performance will always operate without special admission terms. Check your chosen date or call 909-878-0838 if admission arrangements are important to your plans. \nWhere Should You Park?\nBarrel 33 is located in The Village area of Big Bear Lake. Visitors should use appropriate public parking serving The Village and follow all posted parking restrictions. \nWeekend evenings can bring more activity to The Village\, so leave enough time to park and walk to Barrel 33 rather than arriving exactly when the band is scheduled to begin. \nHow Early Should You Arrive?\nNo official early-arrival requirement is published. A practical approach is to reach the area 15 to 30 minutes before the scheduled start\, particularly for Friday and Saturday evening performances. \nThis is a travel-planning recommendation rather than an official Barrel 33 check-in rule. If the venue publishes different instructions for your date\, follow those instead. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nLive music at Barrel 33 requires relatively little preparation\, but a few items can make your evening easier: \n\nValid identification: Bring appropriate ID if you intend to purchase alcoholic beverages.\nA warm layer: Big Bear evenings can cool quickly\, even after a warm afternoon.\nYour chosen event details: Confirm the artist and start time before leaving.\nA transportation plan: Decide how you’ll return to your cabin if you plan to drink.\nA charged phone: Useful for navigation\, parking\, and checking last-minute venue updates.\n\nBecause the performances are at an established Village venue rather than a trail\, lake\, or mountaintop event\, you do not need specialized outdoor equipment. \nIs Live Music at Barrel 33 Family Friendly?\nThe current live-music listings do not publish a universal age restriction. However\, Barrel 33 serves craft beer and wine\, so families should not assume that every scheduled event has the same age policy. \nIf you’re considering attending with children or teenagers\, contact Barrel 33 at 909-878-0838 to confirm the venue’s current policy for that particular performance. \nSimilarly\, no detailed accessibility information is included in the individual live-music listings. Visitors requiring specific accommodations should contact the venue directly before arrival. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Live Music at Barrel 33\nArrival Day: Check Into Big Bear\nIf you’re coming from outside the mountains for a Friday or Saturday performance\, consider arriving earlier in the afternoon rather than trying to time a mountain drive around a 5:00 PM start. \nCheck into your cabin\, unpack\, and review the latest Barrel 33 listing. That gives your group time to settle in before heading toward The Village. \nBefore the Music: Explore The Village\nArriving in The Village ahead of the performance gives you flexibility if parking takes longer than expected. Spend some time walking around the area and then head to Barrel 33 before your chosen artist begins. \nFor Tuesday afternoon performances with Brad\, the 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM schedule leaves plenty of time for another Big Bear activity afterward. Friday and Saturday shows running until 8:00 PM work better as the main evening plan.  \nAfter the Performance: Return to Your Cabin\nAfter an evening performance\, an overnight cabin provides an easy place for your group to wind down without immediately starting a long drive out of Big Bear. \nIf anyone has been drinking alcohol\, use a safe transportation plan rather than driving. Planning that before the performance keeps the evening simple. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Barrel 33 live-music dates. \nNext Morning: Enjoy More of Big Bear\nUse the following morning for another local experience before departure. Depending on the season and conditions\, that could mean time around Big Bear Lake\, an appropriate trail outing\, or a relaxed morning in The Village. \nIf you’re attending Ryan Bieber on October 2 or October 3\, remember that early October mountain conditions can differ noticeably from September. Check the weather before packing and before any outdoor plans. \nWhere to Stay for Live Music at Barrel 33\nBecause Barrel 33 is in Big Bear Lake\, visitors should concentrate on Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear City accommodations. Staying in Lake Arrowhead solely for an evening at Barrel 33 would add unnecessary mountain travel. \nA Chalet currently lists vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, with properties suited to different group sizes. Its current collection includes two-bedroom stays such as Heavenly Bay Retreat\, Jaybird Cabin\, and Maverick’s Cabin; three-bedroom Conklin Canopy; and four-bedroom choices including Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape.  \nFor a couple attending a single acoustic or evening performance\, a smaller cabin can keep the trip straightforward. A group of friends planning dinner\, live music\, and another day in Big Bear may appreciate additional bedrooms and common living space. \nA Chalet’s current site also lists a one-bedroom Bear Den\, providing another smaller-stay option.  \nDo not assume that every property has identical amenities. If a kitchen\, hot tub\, pet-friendly policy\, laundry facilities\, or a particular number of parking spaces matters to your trip\, verify that feature on the current property listing before booking. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nChoose your performer first. Start with the live schedule so you know whether you’re planning around a Tuesday acoustic afternoon\, a Thursday performance\, or a Friday or Saturday evening show. \nVerify the date directly with Barrel 33. This is especially important for September 30 and October 6 because the tourism calendar and venue calendar currently conflict. \nStay in the Big Bear area. Barrel 33 is in Big Bear Lake\, making Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City the logical lodging choice. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Couples can compare smaller stays\, while groups of friends may prefer several bedrooms and shared gathering space. \nCheck parking rules at your cabin. If several friends are arriving in separate vehicles\, verify the property’s maximum allowed vehicle count. \nPlan for the evening after the music. An overnight stay is particularly useful for shows finishing at 8:00 PM and for anyone who wants to enjoy Barrel 33’s beverage selection without a long drive afterward. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen is Live Music at Barrel 33 in 2026?\nThe current series includes numerous September dates and confirmed performances on October 2 and October 3. Visit Big Bear lists the broader recurring period through October 6\, but Barrel 33’s own current calendar should be treated as the final source for individual performances.  \nWhere is Live Music at Barrel 33?\nThe performances take place at Barrel 33\, 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315.  \nWho is performing at Barrel 33 in September 2026?\nUpcoming confirmed September performers include Matt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, and The Blackwells. Performance dates and times vary.  \nDo you need tickets for the live music?\nNo universal ticket price or cover charge is currently published for the standard live-music performances. Check Barrel 33’s calendar or call the venue before attending if admission terms are important to your trip. \nWhere do you park for Barrel 33?\nBarrel 33 is in The Village area. Use appropriate public parking serving The Village\, obey posted restrictions\, and allow extra time on busy evenings. \nCan kids attend Live Music at Barrel 33?\nThe current event listings do not publish a universal age restriction. Because Barrel 33 serves beer and wine\, contact the venue to confirm its current policy before bringing younger guests. \nWhere should I stay for Live Music at Barrel 33?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is the most convenient area. A Chalet currently offers both smaller cabins and multi-bedroom vacation rentals in the Big Bear area. Browse A Chalet’s current availability for your music weekend. \nPlan Your Live Music at Barrel 33 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 gives Big Bear visitors an easy way to add local entertainment to a mountain trip without committing to an all-day festival. The remaining September schedule includes afternoon acoustic sessions and evening performances by Matt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, and The Blackwells\, followed by Ryan Bieber on October 2 and October 3.  \nCheck the venue calendar before traveling\, especially if you’re planning around a particular artist. The September 30 and October 6 entries shown by Visit Big Bear are not currently matched by Barrel 33’s primary event calendar\, so those dates should be confirmed directly with the venue.  \nFor travelers coming from outside the mountains\, an overnight stay can make the experience much easier. Arrive earlier\, check into your cabin\, spend time in The Village\, enjoy the performance\, and return somewhere comfortable afterward instead of immediately driving out of Big Bear. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Live Music at Barrel 33 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/live-music-at-barrel-33-30/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T173000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T203000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215631Z
CREATED:20261016T215631Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215631Z
UID:13954-1789234200-1789245000@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series
DESCRIPTION:Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nBig Bear Lake Summer Concert Series 2026 is a free\, all-ages live music series held in The Village at Big Bear Lake. The 2026 season features eight concerts spanning rock\, reggae\, country\, R&B\, punk\, funk\, Latin-influenced music\, and other styles\, with an emphasis on original artists.  \nAs of September 10\, only one concert remains: Saturday\, September 12\, 2026. The finale is Latin Rock & Funk Night featuring Bardo and Mestizo Beat. The official Visit Big Bear schedule lists the event beginning at 5:30 PM\, with the first band scheduled from 6:00 PM to 7:15 PM and the second band from 7:30 PM to 8:30 PM. The City of Big Bear Lake separately lists the September 12 concert beginning at 6:00 PM\, so arriving by 5:30 PM is the safer plan.  \nThe concert takes place at the corner of Pine Knot Avenue and Village Drive in The Village. Admission is free\, all ages are welcome\, family-friendly games are planned\, and the City says guests may bring their own chairs and blankets. Food from nearby restaurants is available\, along with a beer garden offering beer and wine.  \nFor visitors traveling up the mountain\, an overnight stay can make the evening more relaxed. A Chalet offers vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, allowing guests to check in before the concert\, walk or drive into The Village depending on their location\, and return to a cabin after the music instead of heading down the mountain at night.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series finale. \nBig Bear Lake Summer Concert Series 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nBig Bear Lake Summer Concert Series\n\n\n2026 season\nJune 20-September 12\, 2026\n\n\nFinal concert\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\n\nFinal concert theme\nLatin Rock & Funk Night\n\n\nArtists\nBardo and Mestizo Beat\n\n\nEvent start\n5:30 PM according to Visit Big Bear\n\n\nFirst band\n6:00 PM-7:15 PM\n\n\nSecond band\n7:30 PM-8:30 PM\n\n\nVenue\nThe Village at Big Bear Lake\n\n\nLocation\nCorner of Pine Knot Ave. & Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nAdmission\nFree\n\n\nAge policy\nAll ages welcome\n\n\nSeating\nGuests may bring chairs and blankets\n\n\nFood and drinks\nNearby restaurant food plus a beer garden with beer and wine\n\n\nParking\nPublic parking lots in and around The Village; availability is limited\n\n\nOrganizer\nCity of Big Bear Lake and Visit Big Bear\n\n\nOfficial website\nBig Bear Lake Summer Concert Series\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear confirms that the series is free and all-ages\, while the City of Big Bear Lake lists the September 12 finale at Christmas Tree Corner in The Village.  \nWhat Is the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series?\nThe Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series is a seasonal outdoor music program hosted by the City of Big Bear Lake and Visit Big Bear. Rather than focusing on one musical style\, the 2026 lineup was built around a variety of genres and original music. \nThe season began June 20 and included eight scheduled concert nights. Performers ranged from established touring acts to Southern California artists\, with individual evenings themed around styles including reggae\, country\, rockabilly\, R&B\, punk\, Latin rock\, and funk.  \nThe setting is part of the appeal. Concerts take place in the middle of The Village\, where guests can combine music with dinner\, shopping\, and an evening stroll through downtown Big Bear Lake. \nThe series is designed to be accessible to a wide audience. Admission is free and all ages are welcome\, making it an easy addition to a family weekend\, couples getaway\, or group trip without requiring everyone to purchase a separate concert ticket.  \nWhen Is the Final Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series Concert?\nThe final event of the 2026 season is: \nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\nLatin Rock & Funk Night\nBardo & Mestizo Beat\nThe Village at Big Bear Lake \nVisit Big Bear currently publishes this general event schedule: \n\n5:30 PM: Event begins\n6:00 PM-7:15 PM: First band\n7:30 PM-8:30 PM: Second band\n\nThe City of Big Bear Lake calendar lists the September 12 concert itself at 6:00 PM. These sources are not necessarily contradictory: 5:30 PM appears to represent the overall event opening\, while the performance schedule begins at 6:00 PM. Visitors who want time to park\, choose a viewing spot\, and get food should plan to arrive by 5:30 PM.  \nWho Is Performing on September 12?\nBardo\nBardo is one of the featured artists for the finale. The City of Big Bear Lake describes him as an artist raised in La Mirada by a Mexican father and Colombian mother\, with music that blends Latin rhythms with influences from post-punk\, disco\, soul\, and experimental rock.  \nMestizo Beat\nMestizo Beat joins Bardo for the September 12 concert. The City describes the group as an Afro-Latin soul band\, fitting the finale’s Latin Rock & Funk Night theme.  \nIf you want to become familiar with the artists before the show\, Visit Big Bear promotes an official 2026 Summer Concert Series Spotify playlist featuring performers from the lineup. \nWhat Was the Full 2026 Concert Lineup?\n\n\n\nDate\nTheme\nArtists\n\n\n\n\nJune 20\n80s Rock & Village Wine Walk\nThe English Beat & Sweet & Tender Hooligans\n\n\nJune 27\nPunk Rock Night in Moonridge\nThe High Curbs\, Alien Ant Farm\, Nitro Circus & OC Ramps programming\n\n\nJuly 4\nReggae & 4th of July Celebration\nHepcat & The Aggrolites\n\n\nJuly 18\nCountry with Free Line Dancing Lessons\nJoe Peters & Elizabeth Bowersox\n\n\nAugust 8\nRockabilly & Big Bear Fun Run\nReverend Horton Heat & The Rhythm Shakers\n\n\nAugust 29\nR&B Night\nNick Waterhouse & The McCharmlys\n\n\nSeptember 3\nReggae Locals Night\nLong Beach Dub AllStars & Common Sense\n\n\nSeptember 12\nLatin Rock & Funk Night\nBardo & Mestizo Beat\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear’s current lineup page confirms all eight dates and identifies Bardo and Mestizo Beat as the final performers of the season.  \nWhere Is the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series?\nThe primary Summer Concert Series venue is in The Village at Big Bear Lake\, at the corner of: \nPine Knot Avenue & Village Drive\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe City of Big Bear Lake refers to this location as Christmas Tree Corner.  \nThe Village location makes it practical to arrive early for dinner or remain in the area after the final performance. Restaurants\, shops\, and other businesses are concentrated around the concert area\, though individual operating hours vary. \nIs the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series Free?\nYes. Admission to the Summer Concert Series is free. Visit Big Bear also confirms that all ages are welcome.  \nYou do not need to purchase a concert ticket to enter the general event area. Food\, drinks\, shopping\, lodging\, and other activities are separate expenses. \nBecause the concert is free and takes place in a public Village setting\, there is no assigned seating. Arriving early can help you find a comfortable place to enjoy the show. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect at the September 12 Concert?\nThe final concert combines live performances with a casual outdoor festival atmosphere in The Village. \nThe City says family-friendly games will be available\, making the event suitable for groups traveling with children. Picnic tables are provided in the beer garden\, where adults can purchase beer and wine\, and food from local restaurants is available nearby.  \nGuests are also welcome to bring their own chairs and blankets. If you want to sit for most of the evening\, bringing lightweight portable seating is a useful choice.  \nThe September 12 music begins at 6:00 PM after the event opens\, so arriving earlier gives you time to settle in before the first band. \nParking and Transportation\nParking for Summer Concert Series events is available in public lots around The Village\, but the City cautions that Village parking is limited during concert nights. \nFor earlier 2026 concerts\, the City identified public parking at lots including Bartlett\, Knickerbocker\, Pennsylvania\, Cottage\, Beaver\, and Indian Village. It also promoted free Mountain Transit service into The Village.  \nBecause parking arrangements and street restrictions may differ by concert date\, check current signs and any September 12 instructions rather than assuming every detail from an earlier concert applies unchanged. \nIf you are staying nearby\, consider whether walking\, being dropped off\, or using Mountain Transit is practical for your group. Avoid planning to arrive just before the first band if you expect to need parking in The Village. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nA simple concert setup is usually enough: \n\nPortable chairs or a blanket\nA light jacket or evening layer\nComfortable walking shoes\nSun protection if arriving early\nA charged phone\nWater as appropriate\nA small bag that is easy to manage in a crowd\n\nThe City specifically says guests may bring chairs and blankets. Since the show continues into the evening\, layers are also useful as mountain temperatures change after sunset.  \nCheck current event rules before bringing large coolers\, oversized equipment\, or anything else that could be restricted in the concert area. \nIs the Summer Concert Series Family-Friendly?\nYes. The official event information describes the series as all ages\, and the City promotes family-friendly games at concert nights.  \nFamilies may appreciate arriving early enough to find a good spot before the crowd grows. Bringing a blanket or portable chairs can also make the evening more comfortable for younger attendees. \nThe beer garden serves alcoholic beverages\, but it is only one component of the broader public event. Families can enjoy the music\, games\, restaurants\, and Village atmosphere without participating in the beer garden. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series\nFriday: Arrive and Settle Into Big Bear\nArrive Friday afternoon or evening and check into your cabin before the concert weekend begins. Use the evening for dinner\, a relaxed walk\, and organizing anything you want to bring to the show. \nStaying Friday night means Saturday can begin without a mountain drive and gives you more flexibility for daytime activities before heading into The Village. \nSaturday Afternoon: Enjoy Big Bear Before the Concert\nKeep Saturday morning and early afternoon open for an activity appropriate to your group and current weather conditions. You might spend time around the lake\, explore shops\, or choose a shorter outdoor experience rather than scheduling something that risks making you late for the concert. \nReturn to your cabin with enough time to change\, grab layers and chairs\, and head toward The Village before the 5:30 PM event opening. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for the September 12 concert weekend. \nSaturday Evening: Dinner and Free Live Music\nArrive in The Village early enough to manage parking and choose a viewing area. You can get food nearby before or during the event\, enjoy the family games\, and settle in before the first performance begins at 6:00 PM. \nBardo and Mestizo Beat close the 2026 series with Latin Rock & Funk Night\, and the scheduled music concludes around 8:30 PM.  \nAfterward\, return to your cabin instead of immediately beginning a nighttime drive down the mountain. \nSunday: Slow Down Before Heading Home\nUse Sunday morning for breakfast and one final Big Bear activity. A two-night stay lets the concert become the centerpiece of a weekend rather than an evening squeezed between long drives. \nWhere to Stay for the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series\nBecause the concert is held in The Village at Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear Lake is the most convenient general A Chalet destination. Big Bear City can also work for visitors planning activities throughout the valley. \nA Chalet’s current Big Bear collection includes a range of cabin sizes. Current listings include Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths\, Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths\, Boulder Landing with four bedrooms and three baths\, Whispering Pines with two bedrooms and one-and-a-half baths\, Rustic Ridge with four bedrooms and three baths\, and Golden Hour with two bedrooms and two baths.  \nGolden Hour is currently listed in Big Bear Lake\, while A Chalet’s broader destination collection includes both Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City stays.  \nFor this event\, consider the practical details that matter most after an evening in The Village: group size\, legal occupancy\, parking allowance\, kitchen access\, pet policies\, and the cabin’s actual location. Verify all amenities on the live property page before booking. \nA cabin can also give groups a shared place to relax after the concert rather than splitting up among separate hotel rooms. \nBrowse current A Chalet cabins for the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series. \nTips for Booking a Summer Concert Weekend Cabin\nPlan around September 12. It is the final currently scheduled concert of the 2026 series. \nArrive the night before if possible. A Friday check-in removes the need to combine Saturday traffic\, a mountain drive\, parking\, and concert arrival into one schedule. \nChoose Big Bear Lake for the most direct event base. The concert takes place in The Village at Big Bear Lake. \nVerify cabin parking. This matters if several friends or families are arriving in separate vehicles. \nGive yourself extra time for Village parking. The City notes that public parking is limited during concert events. \nBring layers and portable seating. Chairs and blankets are permitted\, and temperatures may cool as the evening progresses. \nCheck official information before leaving the cabin. Event timing\, parking restrictions\, and weather conditions can change. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Final Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series 2026 Concert?\nThe final concert is Saturday\, September 12\, 2026. It is Latin Rock & Funk Night featuring Bardo and Mestizo Beat.  \nWhat Time Does the September 12 Concert Start?\nVisit Big Bear says the event begins at 5:30 PM\, with the first band from 6:00 PM to 7:15 PM and the second band from 7:30 PM to 8:30 PM. The City calendar lists the concert at 6:00 PM\, so arriving by 5:30 PM is recommended.  \nWhere Is the Concert?\nThe concert takes place in The Village at Big Bear Lake at the corner of Pine Knot Avenue and Village Drive\, an area the City also identifies as Christmas Tree Corner.  \nIs the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series Free?\nYes. Admission is free\, and all ages are welcome.  \nCan I Bring a Chair or Blanket?\nYes. The City of Big Bear Lake says guests may bring their own chairs and blankets to enjoy the concert.  \nIs Parking Available?\nPublic parking is available in The Village area\, although the City notes that space is limited during concerts. For earlier series dates\, lots including Bartlett\, Knickerbocker\, Pennsylvania\, Cottage\, Beaver\, and Indian Village were identified as public parking options. Follow current September 12 signage and event instructions.  \nWhere Should I Stay for the Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series?\nBig Bear Lake is the most convenient general lodging area because the concert is in The Village. A Chalet offers multiple cabin sizes across Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, giving couples\, families\, and groups several options for an overnight concert weekend.  \nCheck A Chalet availability for September 12. \nPlan Your Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series 2026 wraps up on Saturday\, September 12 with Bardo and Mestizo Beat performing for Latin Rock & Funk Night in The Village. Admission is free\, all ages are welcome\, and the evening combines original live music with family-friendly games\, food\, a beer garden\, and the energy of downtown Big Bear Lake.  \nVisit Big Bear lists the event beginning at 5:30 PM\, followed by music from 6:00 PM through approximately 8:30 PM. Bring a chair or blanket\, allow extra time for parking\, and arrive early enough to settle in before the first performance.  \nFor visitors coming from outside the mountains\, staying overnight makes the concert easier to turn into a complete getaway. Arrive Friday\, enjoy Big Bear during the day Saturday\, spend the evening listening to free live music in The Village\, and return to a cabin afterward instead of ending the night with a long drive home. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series 2026 getaway. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/big-bear-lake-summer-concert-series-3/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T180000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T210000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215627Z
CREATED:20261016T215627Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215627Z
UID:13955-1789236000-1789246800@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Live Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany's Bistro
DESCRIPTION:Live Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro 2026: Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro 2026 is a recurring Friday and Saturday evening music series at Chateau Big Bear in Big Bear Lake. The current venue schedule lists live music every Friday and Saturday from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM\, with pianist Mike Cross and rotating guest performers playing beneath the Chateau’s restored Tiffany dome. \nTiffany’s Bistro is located inside Chateau Big Bear at 42200 Moonridge Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. The bistro is currently open Thursday\, Friday\, and Saturday from 4:00 PM to 11:00 PM\, with food served until 9:30 PM. That makes it easy to combine dinner\, drinks\, and live music in one evening. \nVisit Big Bear’s current event calendar shows the music series continuing through the 2026-27 winter season\, with upcoming dates beginning September 11 and 12 and continuing on Fridays and Saturdays into March 2027. \nFor travelers coming from outside the mountains\, an overnight Big Bear stay can make the evening more relaxed. Instead of driving down the mountain after a 9:00 PM set\, guests can return to a nearby A Chalet cabin and continue their trip the following morning. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear live-music weekend. \nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro\n\n\nSchedule\nFridays and Saturdays\n\n\nLive music hours\n6:00 PM-9:00 PM\n\n\nVenue\nTiffany’s Bistro at Chateau Big Bear\n\n\nAddress\n42200 Moonridge Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nRegular featured artist\nMike Cross with rotating guest performers\n\n\nBistro hours\nThursday-Saturday\, 4:00 PM-11:00 PM\n\n\nFood service\n4:00 PM-9:30 PM\n\n\nAdmission\nNo universal live-music cover charge is published on the current official venue page\n\n\nParking\nParking available at Chateau Big Bear\n\n\nPhone\n909-866-6666\n\n\nOfficial venue page\nTiffany’s Bistro at Chateau Big Bear\n\n\n\nThe official venue currently states that Mike Cross and selected guests perform every Friday and Saturday from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. Visit Big Bear independently lists the same recurring event and venue address. \nWhat Is Live Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro?\nThe event is a recurring live-music night inside Tiffany’s Bistro\, the restaurant and lounge at Chateau Big Bear. Rather than functioning as a stand-alone concert with a fixed touring lineup\, it is designed as an ongoing dinner-and-music experience. \nThe Chateau has a long connection with performing arts. Its own current event description recalls productions and entertainment held there during the late 1980s and early 1990s\, including opera\, theater\, and dance events. Today\, the venue continues that tradition through weekly live music beneath its distinctive stained-glass dome. \nPianist Mike Cross is a regular headliner. Chateau Big Bear says he performs with a rotating selection of guest musicians\, including vocalists and instrumentalists. The venue’s recent guide describes musical styles that can include blues\, jazz standards\, and original material. \nBecause the performers may change from one weekend to another\, guests interested in a particular artist should check Chateau Big Bear’s current social media or contact the venue rather than assuming every Friday and Saturday has the same lineup. \nWhen Is Live Music at Chateau Big Bear in 2026?\nThe current recurring schedule is simple: \n\nFridays: 6:00 PM-9:00 PM\nSaturdays: 6:00 PM-9:00 PM\n\nAs of September 10\, Visit Big Bear lists upcoming 2026 dates including: \n\nFriday\, September 11\nSaturday\, September 12\nFriday\, September 18\nSaturday\, September 19\nFriday\, September 25\nSaturday\, September 26\nFriday\, October 2\nSaturday\, October 3\nFriday\, October 9\nSaturday\, October 10\n\nThe calendar continues with additional Friday and Saturday performances later in fall and winter and currently shows the recurring series extending into March 2027. \nBecause this is an ongoing venue series rather than a one-time concert\, check the official Tiffany’s Bistro page before your trip for weekly performer updates. \nWhere Is Tiffany’s Bistro?\nLive music takes place at: \nTiffany’s Bistro at Chateau Big Bear\n42200 Moonridge Road\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nChateau Big Bear sits in Big Bear Lake’s Moonridge area. Visit Big Bear confirms the same address and identifies Tiffany’s Bistro as the hotel’s restaurant\, cocktail\, wine\, and live-music venue. \nThe venue phone number is 909-866-6666. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect?\nThe experience combines three elements: live music\, dinner service\, and the setting beneath Chateau Big Bear’s stained-glass Tiffany dome. \nMusic generally runs from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM\, while Tiffany’s Bistro opens at 4:00 PM and serves food until 9:30 PM. Guests can therefore arrive before the music begins for an early meal or plan dinner during the performance. \nThe venue serves casual bistro fare along with cocktails and wine. Chateau Big Bear also promotes its own private-label wines\, while its current bar program includes classic and house cocktails. \nThe music lineup is not identical every weekend. Mike Cross is the recurring featured performer\, but guest musicians rotate. Chateau Big Bear advises visitors to follow its social accounts for the latest weekly artist announcements. \nWhat Is Special About the Tiffany Dome?\nThe dome above Tiffany’s Bistro is one of the most distinctive features of the space. Chateau Big Bear says the stained-glass dome has been extensively restored and remains a centerpiece of the room. \nThe venue’s history article says the dome originally came from Paris and was later dismantled and reconstructed in Big Bear Lake. Chateau Big Bear reports that a recent restoration project cost roughly $500\,000. \nFor guests choosing between a conventional restaurant and somewhere with more atmosphere\, the combination of live music and the historic dome is part of what distinguishes Tiffany’s Bistro. \nDo You Need Tickets for Live Music at Tiffany’s Bistro?\nThe current official venue page does not publish a universal live-music ticket price or regular cover charge for the Friday and Saturday series. \nTiffany’s Bistro is open to the public\, not just hotel guests\, so visitors can come for dinner\, drinks\, and live music without staying at Chateau Big Bear itself. \nBecause individual special events or holiday weekends may operate differently\, call 909-866-6666 if you need to confirm reservations\, seating policies\, cover charges\, or special-event arrangements for a specific date. \nShould You Make a Dinner Reservation?\nThe current public event information does not state that every live-music night requires a reservation. However\, if your evening depends on having a dinner table during a particular set\, contacting the venue ahead of time is sensible. \nThe live music falls directly within dinner service\, so Friday and Saturday evenings may draw both hotel guests and local visitors. \nA practical schedule would be to arrive between 5:00 PM and 5:30 PM for dinner before the 6:00 PM music begins. This is a planning recommendation\, not an official arrival requirement. \nWhere Do You Park?\nVisit Big Bear’s event listing states that parking is available at Chateau Big Bear. \nNo separate shuttle or event-specific remote parking system is currently published. Follow posted signs and any instructions from hotel staff when you arrive. \nAllowing a little extra time is useful on Friday and Saturday evenings\, especially if you want to be seated before the music starts. \nIs Tiffany’s Bistro Open Before the Music Starts?\nYes. Tiffany’s Bistro currently opens at 4:00 PM on Thursday\, Friday\, and Saturday. Live music begins at 6:00 PM on Friday and Saturday\, while food service continues until 9:30 PM and the bistro remains open until 11:00 PM. \nThe venue also currently advertises a happy hour from 4:00 PM to 6:00 PM\, which lines up directly with the period before the live music begins. \nHappy-hour offerings can change\, so check the current menu or venue information before planning around a specific drink or food special. \nIs Live Music at Chateau Big Bear Family-Friendly?\nThe current event listing does not publish a universal minimum age for the live-music series. Tiffany’s Bistro operates as a restaurant and bar serving food\, cocktails\, and wine. \nFamilies planning to bring children should contact the venue before visiting if age policies\, seating arrangements\, or evening atmosphere are important to their plans. Do not assume bar-area policies based on another Big Bear restaurant. \nThe current event pages also do not provide detailed accessibility information for the live-music seating area. Guests needing a specific accommodation should call Chateau Big Bear at 909-866-6666 in advance. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Live Music at Chateau Big Bear\nFriday: Check In and Head to Tiffany’s Bistro\nArrive in Big Bear during the afternoon\, check into your cabin\, and give yourself time to settle in before heading to Moonridge. \nIf you want dinner before the music begins\, arrive at Tiffany’s Bistro ahead of the 6:00 PM set. Alternatively\, plan your meal during the performance since food service continues until 9:30 PM. \nAfter the music ends at 9:00 PM\, return to your cabin rather than immediately starting a nighttime drive out of the mountains. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your live-music weekend. \nSaturday: Enjoy Big Bear During the Day\nKeep Saturday open for the part of Big Bear that interests you most. Depending on the season and current operating conditions\, that could include time around Big Bear Lake\, hiking\, The Village\, or another local attraction. \nIf you enjoyed Friday’s performance\, the recurring schedule gives you the option of returning Saturday evening for another live-music session. Because guest performers can rotate\, the experience may not be identical both nights. \nSunday: Relax Before Departure\nA two-night cabin stay gives you a slower Sunday morning rather than requiring a late-night departure after Saturday’s show. Have breakfast\, enjoy one final Big Bear activity\, and then begin the drive home during daylight if your schedule allows. \nWhere to Stay for Live Music at Chateau Big Bear\nBecause Chateau Big Bear is on Moonridge Road in Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear Lake is the most straightforward lodging area for this event. Big Bear City can also work for visitors planning activities throughout the valley. \nA Chalet currently offers rentals across Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City. Current featured options include Heavenly Bay Retreat with two bedrooms and two baths\, Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms and one bath\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths\, and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths. \nFor larger groups\, A Chalet’s current collection also shows Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape\, each currently listed with four bedrooms and three baths. Smaller parties can also compare options such as Bear Den. \nBedroom counts are only one part of choosing a rental. Verify current occupancy limits\, parking\, kitchens\, pet policies\, outdoor amenities\, and other features on the live individual listing before booking. \nFor a live-music weekend\, the main benefit of staying nearby is schedule flexibility: enjoy dinner and the full 6:00-9:00 PM music set without building the evening around an immediate drive down the mountain. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking a Live-Music Weekend Cabin\nChoose Friday\, Saturday\, or both. Live music currently runs on both evenings from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nCheck the weekly artist lineup. Mike Cross is a recurring featured performer\, but guest musicians rotate. \nConfirm dining plans. If you want a table at a specific time\, contact Tiffany’s Bistro before the weekend rather than assuming walk-in availability. \nStay in Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City. These destinations are more geographically relevant to Moonridge than Lake Arrowhead for this event. \nVerify cabin parking. Groups arriving in several vehicles should check each rental’s permitted vehicle count. \nConsider two nights. Staying Friday and Saturday gives you a full mountain day between evening performances. \nCheck weather before traveling. The recurring series continues into winter\, when mountain road and weather conditions can materially affect travel plans. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Live Music at Chateau Big Bear in 2026?\nLive music is currently scheduled every Friday and Saturday from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM\, with the recurring Visit Big Bear calendar extending into March 2027. \nWhere Is Live Music at Tiffany’s Bistro?\nThe performances take place at Tiffany’s Bistro inside Chateau Big Bear\, 42200 Moonridge Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. \nWho Performs at Chateau Big Bear?\nMike Cross is the venue’s recurring featured musician\, joined by rotating guest performers. Chateau Big Bear recommends checking its social channels for weekly lineup updates. \nDo You Need Tickets?\nThe current official venue information does not publish a universal ticket price or regular cover charge for the Friday and Saturday music series. Contact Tiffany’s Bistro for any date-specific requirements. \nCan You Eat During the Live Music?\nYes. Tiffany’s Bistro currently serves food from 4:00 PM to 9:30 PM\, while live music runs from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nIs Parking Available?\nYes. Visit Big Bear states that parking is available at Chateau Big Bear. \nWhere Should I Stay for Live Music at Chateau Big Bear?\nBig Bear Lake is the most practical general lodging area for an event on Moonridge Road. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City for couples\, families\, and larger groups. \nBrowse A Chalet availability for your live-music dates. \nPlan Your Live Music at Chateau Big Bear 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nLive Music at Chateau Big Bear / Tiffany’s Bistro 2026 offers a straightforward Friday or Saturday night plan: arrive for dinner or drinks\, settle in beneath the restored Tiffany dome\, and hear Mike Cross and rotating guest musicians from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nThe venue is at 42200 Moonridge Road in Big Bear Lake\, parking is available at Chateau Big Bear\, and Tiffany’s Bistro currently serves food until 9:30 PM. The live-music series continues regularly through fall and winter\, so check the latest performer information before choosing your weekend. \nFor travelers coming from outside Big Bear\, staying overnight turns the evening into a more comfortable mountain trip. Check into a cabin before the show\, enjoy the full performance without rushing toward a late-night departure\, and leave the following day open for Big Bear Lake\, Moonridge\, or another local activity. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Live Music at Chateau Big Bear 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/live-music-at-chateau-big-bear-tiffanys-bistro-16/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T200000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T213000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215629Z
CREATED:20261016T215629Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215629Z
UID:13956-1789243200-1789248600@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Hike Big Bear Under the Stars
DESCRIPTION:Hike Big Bear Under the Stars 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nHike Big Bear Under the Stars 2026 is a guided nighttime hike on Woodland Trail near Big Bear Lake. Organized by Big Bear Hiking Adventures\, the experience takes visitors on an easy 1.5-mile forest walk from 8:00 PM to 9:30 PM\, with time to experience the pines\, nighttime forest sounds\, and stars after dark. \nThe published 2026 event season runs into September 12\, 2026. As of September 10\, the official Visit Big Bear event page lists Saturday\, September 12 as the remaining upcoming date. The hike begins at Woodland Trail\, 41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92314.  \nThe hike is described as easy and suitable for all experience levels\, with a minimum recommended age of 8+. Leashed dogs are allowed. Participants should bring water\, comfortable walking or hiking shoes\, a flashlight or headlamp\, layers for cooler evening temperatures\, and any necessary personal medication. Guests are instructed to arrive 10 minutes early for check-in and the trail briefing.  \nBecause the hike finishes at 9:30 PM\, an overnight Big Bear stay can make the evening considerably easier for visitors coming from outside the mountains. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City for couples\, families\, and groups\, giving hikers somewhere nearby to return to after the nighttime walk.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear night-hike trip. \nHike Big Bear Under the Stars 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nHike Big Bear Under the Stars\n\n\nRemaining published 2026 date\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\n\nTime\n8:00 PM-9:30 PM\n\n\nCheck-in\nArrive 10 minutes early\n\n\nLocation\nWoodland Trail\n\n\nAddress\n41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92314\n\n\nDistance\n1.5 miles\n\n\nDifficulty\nEasy\n\n\nRecommended minimum age\n8+\n\n\nDogs\nAllowed on leash\n\n\nRefund policy\nNo refunds\n\n\nLate arrivals\nMay not be accommodated\n\n\nAdmission\nAdvance reservation is encouraged because space is limited; verify the current price during booking\n\n\nOrganizer\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\nOfficial booking page\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear currently identifies September 12 as the upcoming final date for the published 2026 series. Big Bear Hiking Adventures also describes its public guided hikes as seasonal experiences built around nighttime forests\, sunsets\, stars\, and other mountain settings.  \nWhat Is Hike Big Bear Under the Stars?\nHike Big Bear Under the Stars is a guided evening walk designed to show visitors a different side of the Big Bear forest. Instead of hiking during the busiest daylight hours\, participants begin after dark and walk beneath the trees while the night sky becomes visible overhead. \nThe route follows Woodland Trail and is promoted as a calm\, accessible outdoor experience rather than a strenuous backcountry trek. The official event listing describes it as suitable for all experience levels and particularly relevant for nature lovers\, couples\, solo adventurers\, photographers\, and visitors looking for a quieter way to experience the mountains.  \nThe hike covers approximately 1.5 miles during a 90-minute event window. That leisurely schedule gives the group time to move through the forest without treating the outing like a speed hike. \nBig Bear Hiking Adventures focuses more broadly on guided mountain experiences and education about responsible recreation. Visit Big Bear notes the company’s commitment to trail etiquette and Leave No Trace principles as part of its approach to sharing the local mountains.  \nWhen and Where Is Hike Big Bear Under the Stars?\nThe event takes place at Woodland Trail\, 41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92314. The official 2026 listing identifies the season as continuing through September 12.  \nAs of September 10\, the remaining published event is: \n\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026 — 8:00 PM to 9:30 PM\n\nEarlier versions of the event calendar show the experience recurring during the summer\, but travelers planning now should focus on the remaining September 12 session rather than past July and August dates. Visit Big Bear’s current directory likewise identifies September 12 as the end of the listed 2026 run.  \nNo later 2026 Hike Big Bear Under the Stars dates are currently announced in the official sources reviewed for this guide. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect on the Night Hike?\nThe experience is built around a peaceful forest walk after dark. As daylight disappears\, hikers can listen to the nighttime forest\, walk beneath the pines\, and look toward the stars away from the brighter lights of developed areas. \nThe published hike details are: \n\nDistance: 1.5 miles\nDifficulty: Easy\nDuration: Approximately 90 minutes\nStart time: 8:00 PM\nTrail: Woodland Trail\n\nThe official event description says the hike is designed for all experience levels. However\, “easy” should not be interpreted as identical to walking on a paved city sidewalk. This is still a forest trail at night\, so appropriate shoes\, lighting\, and attention to footing matter.  \nThe event does not promise a particular astronomical object\, meteor shower\, wildlife sighting\, or guaranteed clear sky. The value of the experience is the guided nighttime forest setting rather than a guaranteed celestial show. \nReservations\, Check-In\, and Parking\nDo You Need a Reservation?\nThe event description says space is limited and directs visitors to reserve a spot. Travelers should therefore book through Big Bear Hiking Adventures rather than assuming walk-up space will be available.  \nA current universal ticket price for this specific Under the Stars session was not confirmed in the official information reviewed for this guide. Check the live booking page for the price attached to your selected date rather than relying on pricing for another Big Bear Hiking Adventures experience. \nWhen Should You Arrive?\nParticipants are specifically instructed to arrive 10 minutes early for check-in and the trail briefing. For an 8:00 PM hike\, plan to be at the meeting location by approximately 7:50 PM.  \nThe event also warns that late arrivals may not be accommodated. This is particularly important for a guided night hike because the group cannot simply leave participants behind at a trailhead and expect them to catch up safely in darkness. \nWhere Should You Park?\nThe event listing identifies Woodland Trail at 41948 N Shore Dr. as the meeting location but does not publish a separate event-specific parking plan. Follow the directions provided with your reservation and all posted parking rules when you arrive. \nGive yourself more than the required 10-minute check-in buffer if you’re unfamiliar with the North Shore area. Finding the trail location for the first time in fading light can take longer than navigating there during the day. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nThe organizer publishes a specific packing list for the nighttime hike. Bring: \n\nComfortable walking shoes or hiking shoes\nWater\nA light jacket or layers for cooler evening temperatures\nA flashlight or headlamp\nNecessary medication\, such as an EpiPen\, inhaler\, or other personal medication you may need\n\nThese are not merely generic hiking suggestions; they are items specifically identified in the event information.  \nA headlamp can be particularly convenient because it keeps your hands free while walking\, but the organizer accepts either a flashlight or headlamp. \nBig Bear temperatures can feel considerably cooler after dark than during the afternoon. Even if the day has been warm\, bring the recommended layer rather than assuming you’ll remain comfortable in daytime clothing. \nCan Kids and Dogs Join Hike Big Bear Under the Stars?\nThe published minimum recommended age is 8+. That wording is important: it is a recommendation rather than a statement that every child over eight will automatically enjoy the hike. Parents should consider whether their child is comfortable walking 1.5 miles on a forest trail after dark.  \nDogs are permitted on leash according to the event listing.  \nIf bringing a dog\, consider whether your pet is comfortable around unfamiliar people\, darkness\, forest sounds\, and other dogs. Keep the leash under control and follow any additional instructions given by the guide. \nVisitors with mobility or accessibility concerns should contact Big Bear Hiking Adventures before booking. The event is classified as easy\, but the current listing does not publish detailed accessibility specifications for the trail. \nWhat Is the Cancellation and Late-Arrival Policy?\nThe current event information states “No refunds” and warns that late arrivals may not be accommodated.  \nThose policies make advance planning particularly important. Check the date carefully when reserving\, confirm your route before leaving your cabin\, and arrive early enough to complete check-in before the group begins walking. \nIf weather or another circumstance creates uncertainty about whether the hike will operate\, contact the organizer for current instructions rather than assuming your reservation has automatically been canceled. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Hike Big Bear Under the Stars\nArrival: Check Into Big Bear Before the Hike\nAn 8:00 PM event may look easy to fit into a same-day drive\, but arriving in Big Bear shortly before sunset can create unnecessary pressure. Consider reaching the mountains earlier\, checking into your cabin\, and having time to eat and change before the hike. \nUse the afternoon for a low-key Big Bear activity rather than a strenuous hike that leaves you tired before the guided evening walk. \nHike Night: Arrive Before 7:50 PM\nHave dinner early enough that you are not rushing afterward. Pack your water\, light source\, jacket\, and any medication before leaving your cabin. \nReach Woodland Trail ahead of the required 10-minute check-in period. The guided hike runs from 8:00 PM until approximately 9:30 PM.  \nAfterward\, return to your cabin rather than immediately beginning a long nighttime drive down the mountain. This is one of the events where staying locally has a practical advantage: the experience itself is intentionally scheduled after dark. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Under the Stars hike. \nNext Morning: See Big Bear in Daylight\nThe following morning offers an interesting contrast to the night hike. Spend time around Big Bear Lake\, enjoy breakfast at your cabin\, or choose another appropriate outdoor activity after checking current conditions. \nIf the nighttime experience makes you interested in more guided hiking\, Big Bear Hiking Adventures also operates other seasonal public and private hiking experiences.  \nWhere to Stay for Hike Big Bear Under the Stars\nBecause the hike takes place on Woodland Trail in the Big Bear area\, visitors should focus on Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City accommodations. Choosing Lake Arrowhead solely for this event would add unnecessary driving after a hike that does not finish until 9:30 PM. \nA Chalet currently offers rentals across Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, with options ranging from smaller one-bedroom stays to larger multi-bedroom cabins.  \nFor a couple planning the nighttime hike\, A Chalet’s current collection includes smaller options such as Bear Den. Two-bedroom choices currently shown include Dream Lake Cabin\, Golden Hour\, Whispering Pines\, and Maverick’s Cabin.  \nFamilies or groups can compare larger options such as Conklin Canopy\, Starlight Sanctuary\, Hideaway Haven\, Boulder Landing\, and Elevated Escape. Current bedroom and bathroom configurations vary by property\, so review the live listing before choosing.  \nA cabin can be especially useful for this particular event because you have somewhere to prepare before the hike and return to afterward. If a kitchen\, pet-friendly policy\, hot tub\, laundry\, or specific parking capacity matters to your trip\, verify that feature on the current individual listing rather than assuming it is available at every property. \nThis is especially important if you plan to bring the dog joining you on the hike: the event permits leashed dogs\, but that does not mean every vacation rental automatically permits pets. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nReserve the hike before finalizing your lodging dates. Space is limited\, and September 12 is currently the final published 2026 date. \nStay in the Big Bear area. Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City keeps you in the same general destination as Woodland Trail. \nPlan around the 9:30 PM finish. An overnight cabin avoids turning a peaceful night hike into an immediate late-night mountain drive. \nCheck pet rules carefully. Dogs may participate in the hike on leash\, but your cabin must separately allow pets if you intend to bring one. \nChoose enough space for your group. Couples may only need a smaller cabin\, while families or friends can compare multi-bedroom properties. \nVerify amenities on the live listing. Kitchens\, parking capacity\, pet policies\, outdoor features\, and other amenities differ between properties. \nConsider arriving before event day. If your schedule allows it\, an extra night removes the pressure of combining a mountain drive with a fixed 8:00 PM guided departure. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Hike Big Bear Under the Stars in 2026?\nThe remaining published event is Saturday\, September 12\, 2026\, from 8:00 PM to 9:30 PM. No later 2026 dates are currently announced on the official event page.  \nWhere Is Hike Big Bear Under the Stars?\nThe guided hike takes place on Woodland Trail at 41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92314.  \nHow Difficult Is the Hike?\nThe event is rated easy and covers approximately 1.5 miles. It is promoted for all experience levels\, although participants should still be comfortable walking on a forest trail after dark.  \nWhat Should I Bring?\nBring comfortable walking or hiking shoes\, water\, a light jacket or layers\, a flashlight or headlamp\, and any necessary personal medication.  \nCan Kids Attend?\nThe published minimum recommended age is 8+. Parents should consider their child’s comfort with a 1.5-mile nighttime forest walk before booking.  \nCan I Bring My Dog?\nYes. The event permits dogs on leash. Remember to separately confirm that your lodging allows pets if you’re staying overnight.  \nWhere Should I Stay for Hike Big Bear Under the Stars?\nBig Bear Lake or Big Bear City is the practical lodging choice for a Woodland Trail night hike. A Chalet offers smaller cabins for couples as well as larger properties for families and groups in the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability for your hike dates. \nPlan Your Hike Big Bear Under the Stars 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nHike Big Bear Under the Stars 2026 offers a different way to experience the mountains: after daytime visitors begin winding down\, the group heads onto Woodland Trail for a quiet 1.5-mile guided walk beneath the pines and night sky. \nThe remaining published 2026 hike takes place Saturday\, September 12\, from 8:00 PM to 9:30 PM. Participants should arrive 10 minutes early\, wear comfortable walking or hiking shoes\, and bring water\, layers\, a flashlight or headlamp\, and any necessary medication. The recommended minimum age is 8+\, and dogs are allowed on leash.  \nReserve through Big Bear Hiking Adventures\, confirm the latest instructions before leaving\, and do not plan on arriving late because late participants may not be accommodated. \nFor travelers coming from outside the mountains\, staying overnight makes particular sense for an event ending at 9:30 PM. Check into a Big Bear cabin earlier\, enjoy the guided night hike without worrying about an immediate drive home\, return to your rental afterward\, and spend another morning in the mountains before departing. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Hike Big Bear Under the Stars 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/hike-big-bear-under-the-stars/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T200000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260912T220000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215632Z
CREATED:20261016T215632Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215632Z
UID:13864-1789243200-1789250400@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Band of Brothers at The CAVE
DESCRIPTION:Band of Brothers at The CAVE 2026: Date\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nBand of Brothers at The CAVE 2026 is listed by Visit Big Bear for Saturday\, September 12\, 2026\, from 8:00 PM to 10:00 PM at The CAVE\, 40789 Village Drive in Big Bear Lake. Visit Big Bear describes Band of Brothers as a local power trio featuring Michael Koch on bass and vocals\, Matthew Koch on lead guitar and vocals\, and Andrew Eredia on drums and vocals.  \nHowever\, travelers should not currently treat that performance as confirmed. The CAVE’s own live event calendar—the venue’s primary and more authoritative source—currently identifies The Moon Colony\, not Band of Brothers\, as its live music act for Saturday\, September 12. The venue’s homepage was updated recently and shows The Moon Colony between Tanner Strickland on September 11 and Tanner Strickland on September 18.  \nThat means the public tourism calendar and the venue calendar are presently in conflict. If Band of Brothers is the reason for your trip\, contact The CAVE at 909-878-0099 or check its current event calendar immediately before going. The venue is still operating at 40789 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\, with live music\, food\, and drinks.  \nIf you are planning a Big Bear weekend regardless of which band performs\, staying overnight can still make sense. A Chalet offers vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, giving you a local base for an evening in The Village and other Saturday activities without scheduling a nighttime drive down the mountain.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for a September 12 Big Bear weekend. \nBand of Brothers at The CAVE 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nAdvertised event\nBand of Brothers at The CAVE\n\n\nVisit Big Bear date\nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n\n\nVisit Big Bear time\n8:00 PM-10:00 PM\n\n\nVenue\nThe CAVE\n\n\nAddress\n40789 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nBand listed by Visit Big Bear\nBand of Brothers\n\n\nBand currently listed by The CAVE\nThe Moon Colony\n\n\nCurrent status\nConflicting listings; verify directly with The CAVE before attending specifically for Band of Brothers\n\n\nBand of Brothers members\nMichael Koch\, Matthew Koch\, Andrew Eredia\n\n\nParking\nVisit Big Bear lists parking at The CAVE and Village public parking lots\n\n\nVenue phone\n909-878-0099\n\n\nVisit Big Bear listing\nBand of Brothers at The CAVE\n\n\nVenue schedule\nThe CAVE\n\n\n\nIs Band of Brothers Still Playing at The CAVE on September 12?\nAt the moment\, the answer is uncertain. \nVisit Big Bear maintains an active event page stating that Band of Brothers will perform at The CAVE on September 12 from 8:00 PM to 10:00 PM. The listing includes the venue address\, band description\, members\, and parking information.  \nThe CAVE’s official website now publishes a different September 12 act: The Moon Colony. Because The CAVE is the actual venue and its homepage is advertising its current upcoming shows\, that listing should receive greater weight when deciding who is expected to perform.  \nThis could reflect a lineup change that has not yet propagated to the tourism calendar\, or another scheduling update. Neither source reviewed provides an explanation for the discrepancy. \nFor that reason\, visitors should not drive to Big Bear solely to see Band of Brothers without first confirming the performer directly with The CAVE. \nWhat Is Band of Brothers?\nBand of Brothers is a rock power trio with roots in Big Bear Lake. The September event listing identifies the lineup as: \n\nMichael Koch: bass and vocals\nMatthew Koch: lead guitar and vocals\nAndrew Eredia: drums and vocals\n\nVisit Big Bear describes the group simply as a power trio originating from Big Bear Lake.  \nAdditional historical information about the group indicates that Michael and Matthew are twin brothers and Andrew is their brother-in-law. The band built a substantial local performance history\, playing hundreds of shows before an earlier breakup and later reunion appearances. A past reunion listing described their repertoire as combining original material with classic and modern rock covers.  \nThat Big Bear connection is an important part of the appeal. Rather than being an unrelated touring act passing through the mountains\, Band of Brothers has an established local history tied to the community’s live music scene. \nWhen and Where Is the Advertised Band of Brothers Show?\nThe Visit Big Bear calendar lists: \nSaturday\, September 12\, 2026\n8:00 PM-10:00 PM\nThe CAVE\n40789 Village Dr.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe CAVE is located in The Village area of Big Bear Lake. Its current website describes the venue as a live music destination offering food\, drinks\, and climate-controlled entertainment.  \nThe venue’s location also makes it easy to combine a show with dinner\, shopping\, or another activity in The Village before the music begins. \nAgain\, the date and venue are not the disputed part of the listing. The conflict concerns which artist is performing September 12. \nWhat Is Currently Scheduled at The CAVE on September 12?\nThe CAVE’s current official homepage lists: \n\nFriday\, September 11: Tanner Strickland\nSaturday\, September 12: The Moon Colony\nFriday\, September 18: Tanner Strickland\n\nAll are categorized as live music by the venue.  \nTherefore\, anyone simply looking for live music at The CAVE on Saturday night may still find an event taking place\, even if Band of Brothers is no longer the scheduled act. \nIf your plans depend on the specific performer rather than merely visiting The CAVE\, verify before departure. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect at The CAVE?\nThe CAVE currently promotes itself as a Big Bear live music venue with food\, drinks\, and live entertainment. The venue has recently emphasized an updated menu and dining room alongside its concert programming.  \nThat makes it possible to build the evening around more than the performance itself. Depending on the operating schedule for September 12\, guests may be able to arrive for food and drinks before settling in for the show. \nThe CAVE is an indoor\, climate-controlled venue\, which distinguishes it from Big Bear’s outdoor summer concert events. That can be particularly useful during September evenings when mountain temperatures may fall after sunset.  \nSpecific seating arrangements\, ticketing procedures\, admission rules\, and age restrictions for the September 12 performance should be confirmed through the venue’s current event information rather than inferred from other CAVE shows. \nTickets and Admission\nThe Visit Big Bear Band of Brothers listing does not publish a ticket price\, and the current CAVE homepage does not confirm Band of Brothers as the September 12 act. \nFor that reason\, this guide does not state a ticket price or claim that admission is free. \nThe CAVE sometimes offers free-admission events—for example\, other 2026 event pages on its official site explicitly identify certain shows as free—but that does not establish the admission terms for every performance.  \nCheck the current The CAVE event calendar for the September 12 performer and any applicable ticket information. \nParking and Transportation\nVisit Big Bear says parking for the advertised Band of Brothers event is available at The CAVE and Village public parking lots.  \nBecause The CAVE is in The Village\, visitors should allow additional time for parking on a busy Saturday evening. September 12 also has several other Big Bear events scheduled\, including the final Big Bear Lake Summer Concert Series event\, which could contribute to visitor activity around town.  \nIf you are staying nearby\, consider whether walking\, a designated driver\, rideshare availability\, or local transportation is practical. Do not assume that the closest public lot will have spaces immediately before showtime. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nThis is an indoor music venue\, so the packing list is much simpler than for a Big Bear hiking or outdoor concert event. Useful items include: \n\nA valid ID\, particularly if purchasing alcoholic beverages\nYour ticket or reservation confirmation if the final event requires one\nA charged phone\nA light layer for walking through The Village before or after the show\nA payment method for food\, drinks\, and other purchases\n\nCheck The CAVE’s current venue policies before bringing large bags\, outside food or beverages\, professional camera equipment\, or other items that may be restricted. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the September 12 Show\nFriday: Arrive in Big Bear\nCheck into your cabin on Friday afternoon or evening and use the first night to settle into the mountains. The CAVE currently has Tanner Strickland listed for Friday\, September 11\, so travelers especially interested in live music may find entertainment available on both nights of the weekend.  \nBefore Saturday\, check The CAVE’s live event calendar again. That is particularly important for this weekend because of the conflicting Band of Brothers and Moon Colony listings. \nSaturday: Explore Big Bear Before the Show\nKeep the morning or early afternoon available for another Big Bear activity. September is well suited to combining an evening show with time around the lake\, a scenic walk\, shopping\, or a relaxed afternoon at your cabin\, subject to current weather and operating conditions. \nReturn to your cabin with enough time to change and head into The Village without rushing. \nCheck A Chalet availability for the September 12 weekend. \nSaturday Evening: Dinner and Live Music\nHead toward The Village early enough to find parking and\, if desired\, eat before the show. The CAVE promotes both dining and live entertainment\, so checking the venue’s current menu and opening time can help you decide whether to eat there or elsewhere in The Village.  \nIf the venue confirms Band of Brothers\, Visit Big Bear currently lists that performance from 8:00 PM to 10:00 PM. If The CAVE’s own current schedule remains unchanged\, expect The Moon Colony instead.  \nSunday: Enjoy a Slower Departure\nAn overnight stay means you do not have to leave The Village after a late concert and immediately begin the drive home. Instead\, return to your cabin Saturday night and use Sunday morning for breakfast and a final Big Bear stop before departure. \nWhere to Stay for Band of Brothers at The CAVE\nBecause The CAVE is located in Big Bear Lake\, an A Chalet property in Big Bear Lake is the most natural lodging choice for an event-centered trip. Big Bear City can also work for visitors planning activities throughout the valley. \nA Chalet currently offers rentals across both Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, with options ranging from one-bedroom cabins to larger homes for groups. Current featured listings include Heavenly Bay Retreat\, Jaybird Cabin\, Conklin Canopy\, Maverick’s Cabin\, Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, Golden Hour\, Elevated Escape\, and Bear Den.  \nFor example\, Conklin Canopy is currently listed in Big Bear Lake with three bedrooms and two bathrooms and sleeping accommodations for up to eight guests. Its verified listing includes a game room\, equipped kitchen\, washer and dryer\, Wi-Fi\, and parking for up to three vehicles.  \nThat kind of setup can work well for a group attending a concert together: prepare dinner or drinks at the cabin before heading out\, spend the evening in The Village\, then return to a shared space afterward. \nProperty locations\, occupancy limits\, parking allowances\, pet policies\, and amenities vary. Always review the current individual listing before booking. \nBrowse current A Chalet cabins in the Big Bear area. \nTips for Booking a Concert Weekend Cabin\nConfirm the performer first. This is unusually important for September 12 because Visit Big Bear lists Band of Brothers while The CAVE currently lists The Moon Colony. \nStay Saturday night. An overnight cabin removes the need to begin a longer mountain drive immediately after an evening show. \nConsider arriving Friday. A Friday arrival leaves Saturday open for exploring Big Bear instead of spending much of the day traveling. \nChoose the right cabin size. Check the actual bedroom count and maximum occupancy when traveling with friends. \nVerify parking. If several people are meeting at the cabin in separate vehicles\, make sure the property legally accommodates the number of cars your group plans to bring. \nCheck the venue calendar again before leaving. Performer\, showtime\, ticketing\, and admission details can change. \nDo not build the entire weekend around an unverified act. If Band of Brothers is essential to your plans\, confirmation directly from The CAVE should come before committing to the trip specifically for that performance. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Band of Brothers at The CAVE Listed for 2026?\nVisit Big Bear lists Band of Brothers at The CAVE for Saturday\, September 12\, 2026\, from 8:00 PM to 10:00 PM.  \nIs Band of Brothers Confirmed for September 12?\nNot by the venue’s current calendar. While Visit Big Bear still lists Band of Brothers\, The CAVE’s official site currently identifies The Moon Colony as the September 12 performer. Contact the venue before attending specifically for Band of Brothers.  \nWhere Is The CAVE?\nThe CAVE is at 40789 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\, in The Village area.  \nWho Are the Members of Band of Brothers?\nThe current Visit Big Bear listing identifies Michael Koch on bass and vocals\, Matthew Koch on lead guitar and vocals\, and Andrew Eredia on drums and vocals.  \nIs Parking Available at The CAVE?\nVisit Big Bear says parking is available at The CAVE and in Village public parking lots. Allow additional time on a busy Saturday evening.  \nHow Much Are Tickets?\nNo reliable current admission price for a September 12 Band of Brothers performance is published in the sources reviewed for this guide. Check The CAVE’s current schedule for the actual performer and applicable admission details. \nWhere Should I Stay for a Show at The CAVE?\nBig Bear Lake is the most convenient general A Chalet destination because The CAVE is located in The Village at Big Bear Lake. Big Bear City can also be a practical base for a broader weekend itinerary.  \nCheck A Chalet availability for September 12. \nPlan Your Band of Brothers at The CAVE 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe advertised Band of Brothers at The CAVE 2026 event is scheduled by Visit Big Bear for Saturday\, September 12 from 8:00 PM to 10:00 PM at 40789 Village Drive. The local rock trio is listed as Michael Koch\, Matthew Koch\, and Andrew Eredia.  \nThere is\, however\, a significant current scheduling conflict: The CAVE itself lists The Moon Colony for September 12. Because the venue is the primary source for its own stage schedule\, anyone specifically hoping to see Band of Brothers should verify the lineup directly before traveling.  \nIf your larger goal is a weekend of Big Bear activities and live music\, the venue remains a useful evening option in The Village regardless of the final performer. Staying locally lets you enjoy the show\, return to your cabin afterward\, and save the drive home for the following day. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your September live-music weekend in Big Bear Lake. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/__trashed-23__trashed/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215623Z
CREATED:20261016T215623Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215623Z
UID:13396-1789257600-1789257600@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Plein Air Art Competition
DESCRIPTION:Plein Air Art Competition 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 is Visit Big Bear’s third annual plein air competition and a month-long celebration of outdoor painting across the Big Bear Valley. Artists can create their competition work between September 12 and October 10\, 2026\, with gallery events beginning in September and the main Competition Gallery and awards scheduled for October. \nRegistered artists first complete online registration\, then visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard to have their painting substrates stamped. The Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. Artists may have multiple substrates stamped\, but the competition information says there is one submission per artist for galleries.  \nThe main submitted works will be displayed at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake. Visit Big Bear lists the principal competition awards as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. The awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nThis event is particularly well suited to an overnight or multi-night Big Bear trip because artists are intentionally given time to explore the valley\, choose landscapes\, return to locations\, and continue developing their work. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City that can serve as a base between painting sessions\, gallery visits\, and other fall activities.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear art trip. \nPlein Air Art Competition 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nBig Bear Plein Air Art Competition & Festival of Artist Events\n\n\nOrganizer\nVisit Big Bear\n\n\nCompetition year\n2026 — 3rd annual event\n\n\nCreate period\nSeptember 12-October 10\, 2026\n\n\nArtist registration\nOnline registration required before arrival\n\n\nMaximum artists\n75 participants\n\n\nSubstrate stamping\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n\n\nVisitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nVisitor Center hours\nDaily\, 9:00 AM-5:00 PM\n\n\nCompetition Gallery\nDestination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\n\n\nMain gallery period\nOctober 14-18\, 2026\n\n\nAwards ceremony\nOctober 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM\n\n\nMain awards\n1st: $2\,000; 2nd: $1\,500; 3rd: $500\n\n\nPublic gallery access\nPublic invited; artwork available for purchase\n\n\nParking\nNo single competition-wide parking plan is published; follow instructions and posted rules at each location\n\n\nOfficial website\nVisit Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear confirms the September 12-October 10 creation period and lists every day in that period as part of the recurring competition calendar.  \nWhat Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition?\nThe Plein Air Art Competition invites artists to create landscapes outdoors in the Big Bear Valley\, working directly from the scenery rather than solely from photographs or studio references. \nWhat distinguishes the Big Bear format is its extended creation period. Artists do not have to arrive on one morning and complete their work under a short time limit. Visit Big Bear gives participants from September 12 through October 10 to explore\, select a location\, paint\, and potentially return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nThat format encourages artists to experience the valley during early fall\, when the character of the landscape can change with light\, weather\, and seasonal conditions. Participants choose their own Big Bear landscape subject rather than being assigned one specific painting location for the main competition. \nFor 2026\, Visit Big Bear has expanded the program with a Festival of Artist Events. Registration in the main competition includes access to the highlighted festival activities\, and artists may choose to participate in one or several. The competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhen Is the Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nThe competition is not a single-day event. Instead\, it unfolds across several phases. \nSeptember 12-October 10: Create\nArtists may visit Big Bear at any point during this period to create their competition work. Before arriving\, participants are instructed to complete online registration. \nAfter reaching Big Bear\, artists must stop at the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center\, 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, to have their painting substrates stamped. Visit Big Bear says artists can have as many substrates stamped as they wish. Completed competition artwork is then returned to the Visitor Center for storage before the gallery opens.  \nOctober 14-18: Competition Gallery\nVisit Big Bear’s dedicated competition page identifies the main gallery and awards period as October 14-18. The event calendar separately shows the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition Gallery running during this same mid-October period at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nThe public is invited to view the competition artwork\, and Visit Big Bear states that artwork at the galleries will be available for purchase.  \nOctober 18: Awards Ceremony\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for Sunday\, October 18 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhat Special Artist Events Are Part of the 2026 Festival?\nThe expanded 2026 Festival of Artist Events adds several opportunities beyond the main competition. \nArtist’s Best Work en Plein Air Gallery — September 18-19\nThis gallery gives participating artists another chance to exhibit and sell plein air work. Visit Big Bear lists a $500 Best of Show award for this portion of the festival.  \nThe Village Paint-Out — September 19\nA dedicated Paint-Out is scheduled in The Village Big Bear Lake on September 19. This provides a more concentrated event within the broader month-long competition period.  \nMoonridge Corridor Paint-Out — October 3\nAnother Paint-Out takes place in the Moonridge Corridor on October 3\, followed by a gallery on October 4. Visit Big Bear lists a separate $500 Best of Show award for this event.  \nMain Competition Gallery and Awards — October 14-18\nThe main competition concludes with the complete collection of submitted works and the awards ceremony. The principal prizes currently published are: \n\nFirst Place: $2\,000\nSecond Place: $1\,500\nThird Place: $500\n\nVisit Big Bear lists John Budicin\, Diane Moore\, and Lisa Mozzini-McDill as distinguished judges associated with the 2026 competition.  \nHow Do Artists Register and Submit Their Work?\nArtists should begin at the official Visit Big Bear Plein Air Competition page and complete the linked registration before traveling to Big Bear. \nThe currently published process is: \n\nComplete registration online before arriving.\nVisit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center during operating hours.\nHave the painting substrates you may use stamped.\nExplore Big Bear and create the work during the September 12-October 10 competition period.\nReturn the completed competition painting to the Visitor Center.\nSubmitted artwork is stored until the Competition Gallery opens.\n\nVisit Big Bear states that the 2026 competition has a maximum of 75 participating artists and allows one submission per artist for the galleries.  \nThe public page reviewed for this guide does not display a clearly stated universal competition registration price in its main event information. Artists should check the live registration form for the current fee and full participation terms rather than relying on a prior year’s price. \nWhere Are the Visitor Center and Competition Gallery?\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM and is the location where artists get substrates stamped and return completed competition paintings.  \nDestination Big Bear Event Room\n713 Stocker Rd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA \nThis is the published location for the Competition Gallery\, the October 18 awards ceremony\, and the public pop-up galleries associated with the festival.  \nNo single parking plan covering every competition location is published. Artists and gallery visitors should follow event instructions and posted parking regulations at the Visitor Center\, The Village\, Moonridge\, and the Destination Big Bear Event Room. \nCan Non-Artists Attend the Plein Air Events?\nYes. The competition is not only for participating painters. \nVisit Big Bear specifically invites art enthusiasts\, collectors\, and members of the community to attend the pop-up galleries and view the complete collection of 2026 competition artwork. Artwork will also be available for purchase.  \nThat makes the October gallery period a good option for visitors who enjoy art but do not plan to enter the competition themselves. \nA public admission charge for the galleries is not stated on the current competition page. Visitors should check the individual gallery listing closer to their chosen date if admission\, opening hours\, or purchasing procedures are important to their plans. \nWhat Should Artists Bring?\nVisit Big Bear does not publish one universal equipment list because plein air painters work with different media and setups. Participants should therefore prepare according to their own painting method and the outdoor mountain environment. \nA practical artist packing list may include: \n\nYour preferred paints\, brushes\, and painting tools\nMultiple eligible substrates to have stamped at the Visitor Center\nPortable easel or pochade setup\nWater or appropriate painting medium\nSun protection\nWeather-appropriate layers\nWater and snacks\nProtective equipment for transporting wet artwork\nAny personal medications or necessities\n\nBecause artists choose their own locations around Big Bear\, conditions can vary significantly between lakefront areas\, forested locations\, The Village\, and higher-elevation viewpoints. Check the forecast and current access conditions before setting up outdoors. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Plein Air Art Competition\nDay 1: Arrive\, Register\, and Scout Locations\nComplete online registration before leaving home. After arriving in Big Bear\, check into your cabin and visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center between 9:00 AM and 5:00 PM to get your substrates stamped. \nInstead of immediately committing to the first landscape you see\, use part of the afternoon to explore Big Bear Valley and observe how light falls across different areas. \nDay 2: Paint en Plein Air\nStart early enough to work during the light conditions you want to capture. Because the competition gives artists nearly a month to create\, there is no need to treat the trip like a speed-painting contest unless you’re participating in a specific Paint-Out. \nReturning to a cabin between sessions can be useful for organizing supplies\, resting\, eating\, and preparing for another painting period. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for your Plein Air Competition dates. \nReturn for the Gallery or Awards\nArtists do not have to treat the September-October creation period and October gallery as a single continuous stay. Visit Big Bear explicitly allows artists to visit once or return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nYou might therefore plan one trip for painting and another for the Competition Gallery and October 18 awards ceremony. \nWhere to Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition\nBecause the competition spans the Big Bear Valley and important event locations are in Big Bear Lake\, staying in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City makes practical sense. \nA Chalet currently offers cabins in both destinations\, with properties ranging from smaller two-bedroom stays to larger three- and four-bedroom rentals. Current examples shown in A Chalet’s collection include Heavenly Bay Retreat and Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms\, and Boulder Landing and Rustic Ridge with four bedrooms.  \nFor an artist traveling alone or with a partner\, a smaller cabin can provide a straightforward base between painting sessions. Friends participating together may prefer additional bedrooms and common space for organizing the trip. \nIf you need particular features for an art-focused stay—such as parking capacity\, a kitchen\, laundry facilities\, pet permission\, or additional indoor space—verify them on the current individual property listing before booking. Amenities differ by cabin and should not be assumed. \nA multi-night stay may be especially useful for this competition because participants are encouraged to explore the landscape rather than paint against a single-day deadline. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Art Competition Weekend Cabin\nChoose your competition phase first. A September painting trip\, October 3 Moonridge Paint-Out weekend\, and October 14-18 gallery trip have different schedules. \nComplete artist registration before traveling. Visit Big Bear specifically instructs participants to register online before arriving. \nAllow time for the Visitor Center. Substrates need to be stamped\, and current Visitor Center hours are 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. \nConsider more than one night. One of the main advantages of this competition is the ability to explore different Big Bear landscapes and work without a short painting deadline. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Solo artists and couples may prefer smaller accommodations\, while several artists traveling together can compare multi-bedroom rentals. \nVerify amenities directly. Parking\, kitchens\, pet policies\, and other property features vary across A Chalet’s inventory. \nRecheck event details before your trip. Gallery hours\, registration availability\, and individual festival-event instructions can change. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nArtists can create competition work from September 12 through October 10\, 2026. The main gallery period follows in mid-October\, with the awards ceremony scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nWhere Is the Plein Air Art Competition?\nPainting can take place across the Big Bear Valley. Substrate stamping and artwork drop-off are handled through the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, while the main Competition Gallery is held at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nDo Artists Need to Register?\nYes. Visit Big Bear directs artists to complete online registration before arriving. The 2026 competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhat Are the 2026 Plein Air Competition Prizes?\nThe main competition awards are currently listed as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. Separate $500 Best of Show prizes are also listed for certain festival galleries.  \nCan the Public Visit the Galleries?\nYes. Visit Big Bear invites the public\, art enthusiasts\, and collectors to attend the galleries. Artwork is expected to be available for purchase.  \nWhen Is the Awards Ceremony?\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhere Should I Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is practical because the competition is centered throughout the Big Bear Valley and key administrative and gallery locations are in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers cabins of several sizes in the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability. \nPlan Your Plein Air Art Competition 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 gives painters something many competitions do not: time. From September 12 through October 10\, registered artists can explore Big Bear\, choose their landscape\, paint\, return to refine their work\, and participate in an expanded schedule of festival events.  \nThe 2026 festival includes the Artist’s Best Work gallery on September 18-19\, The Village Paint-Out on September 19\, the Moonridge Paint-Out on October 3\, the Moonridge gallery on October 4\, and the main Competition Gallery and awards activities in mid-October. The awards ceremony is set for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nArtists should register online before arriving\, visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center to have substrates stamped\, and verify the latest competition instructions before beginning their work. \nFor a trip built around several painting sessions—or a separate return visit for the gallery and awards—an overnight cabin gives you a comfortable base in the Big Bear Valley instead of forcing the creative process into a single day. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the Plein Air Art Competition 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/plein-air-art-competition-3/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215626Z
CREATED:20261016T215626Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215626Z
UID:13957-1789257600-1789257600@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours
DESCRIPTION:Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 offer approximately 90-minute narrated sightseeing cruises on Big Bear Lake from Pine Knot Marina. The published 2026 season runs from August 19 through November 1\, with daytime departures at 12:00 PM\, 2:00 PM\, and 4:00 PM. A 6:00 PM Twilight Cruise is listed for Friday\, Saturday\, and Sunday evenings. Tours are weather permitting and require a minimum number of passengers to operate.  \nThe cruise combines lake views with narration covering Big Bear history dating back to 1845\, folklore\, local stories\, and possible celebrity sightings. Pine Knot Marina recommends advance reservations and asks guests to arrive 15 to 30 minutes before departure.  \nFor visitors coming from outside the mountains\, the cruise is easy to turn into a one- or two-night Big Bear trip. A Chalet offers vacation cabins in Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear City\, and other nearby mountain communities\, giving couples\, families\, and groups a place to relax before or after a day on the lake.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Miss Liberty cruise weekend. \nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours\n\n\n2026 season\nAugust 19-November 1\, 2026\n\n\nTour length\nApproximately 90 minutes\n\n\nDaytime departures\n12:00 PM\, 2:00 PM\, and 4:00 PM\n\n\nTwilight Cruise\n6:00 PM Friday\, Saturday\, and Sunday\n\n\nVenue\nPine Knot Marina\n\n\nAddress\n439 Pine Knot Ave\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nAdult daytime ticket\n$32 for ages 13 and older\, Wednesday-Friday\n\n\nChild daytime ticket\n$21 for ages 4-14\, Wednesday-Friday\n\n\nSenior / military daytime ticket\n$26\, Wednesday-Friday\n\n\nTwilight adult ticket\n$36 for ages 13 and older\n\n\nTwilight child ticket\n$26 for ages 4-14\n\n\nParking\nAvailable at Pine Knot Marina\n\n\nRecommended arrival\n15-30 minutes before departure\n\n\nOfficial tour website\nPine Knot Marina Miss Liberty Tours\n\n\n\nThe 2026 schedule and ticket information above are currently published by Visit Big Bear. Pine Knot Marina notes that schedules and pricing can change\, so travelers should verify the details shown during booking for their specific cruise date.  \nWhat Is the Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour?\nMiss Liberty is a narrated sightseeing boat operating from Pine Knot Marina on Big Bear Lake. Instead of renting a boat and navigating the lake yourself\, you can board for a guided cruise while learning more about the history and character of Big Bear Valley. \nThe approximately 90-minute narration covers highlights of Big Bear history dating to 1845\, along with folklore\, interesting facts\, and local stories. This makes the cruise especially appealing for first-time visitors who want to understand more about the destination while enjoying views from the water.  \nPine Knot Marina identifies Miss Liberty as a 64-foot Skipperliner 1500LX built in 1994 and refurbished in 2006. The operator currently lists a shaded upper deck\, enclosed and heated main salon\, modern restrooms\, small-group seating areas\, and capacity for 80 passengers.  \nThe vessel also has a galley where passengers can purchase light snacks and beverages. The current operator information mentions soft drinks as well as beer\, wine\, and champagne. Available items can change\, so do not plan a meal around the onboard selection without checking first.  \nMiss Liberty can work well for couples\, families\, multigenerational groups\, and visitors looking for an activity that does not require operating their own watercraft. The combination of an outdoor upper deck and enclosed salon also provides flexibility when mountain temperatures change. \nWhen and Where Are Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours in 2026?\nThe published Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 season runs from August 19 through November 1\, 2026.  \nThe current daytime schedule lists departures at: \n\n12:00 PM\n2:00 PM\n4:00 PM\n\nFriday\, Saturday\, and Sunday also have a published 6:00 PM Twilight Cruise.  \nAll cruises depart from: \nPine Knot Marina\n439 Pine Knot Ave\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nPine Knot Marina describes its location as the point “where the Village meets the lake\,” which makes the cruise easy to combine with time around Big Bear Lake’s Village area.  \nThe marina asks guests to arrive approximately 15 to 30 minutes before departure. Give yourself additional time if you’re driving into Big Bear on the same day\, since parking\, mountain traffic\, weather\, or road conditions can affect your arrival.  \nWhat Can Visitors Expect on Miss Liberty?\nThe Miss Liberty experience is primarily a scenic and educational cruise rather than a high-speed boating activity. Once onboard\, passengers can settle in and enjoy approximately an hour and a half on Big Bear Lake while listening to the narrated tour. \nHistory is a central part of the experience. The narration highlights Big Bear’s past beginning in the mid-19th century while mixing in folklore and other stories connected to the valley.  \nThe shaded upper deck provides an open-air vantage point\, while the heated enclosed salon offers another place to sit when conditions are cooler. This can be particularly useful later in the 2026 season\, when an evening on the lake may feel noticeably colder than an afternoon in town.  \nPine Knot Marina states that Miss Liberty is handicapped accessible. Travelers with particular mobility needs should still contact the operator before booking to ask about boarding\, seating\, restroom access\, and any assistance they may require.  \nThe boat is also available for private parties\, corporate groups\, and other group arrangements. Travelers interested in a private use of the vessel should contact Pine Knot Marina for current rates\, capacity requirements\, and available amenities rather than relying on standard tour ticket pricing.  \nHow Much Are Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour Tickets?\nThe current 2026 event listing publishes the following prices:  \n\n\n\nTicket\nPublished Price\nSchedule\n\n\n\n\nAdult\, age 13+\n$32\nWednesday-Friday daytime\n\n\nChild\, ages 4-14\n$21\nWednesday-Friday daytime\n\n\nSenior 65+ / Military\n$26\nWednesday-Friday daytime\n\n\nTwilight Cruise adult\, age 13+\n$36\nFriday-Sunday\n\n\nTwilight Cruise child\, ages 4-14\n$26\nFriday-Sunday\n\n\n\nThose are the currently published 2026 rates rather than guaranteed future prices. Pine Knot Marina specifically states that its schedules and pricing are subject to change\, so confirm the amount shown during the reservation process.  \nTickets\, Parking\, and Transportation\nDo You Need to Reserve Miss Liberty Tickets in Advance?\nPine Knot Marina says reservations are suggested and should be made early. Booking ahead is particularly useful if you want a specific departure time or a weekend Twilight Cruise.  \nThe operator also notes that all tours are weather permitting. In addition\, the published 2026 event information states that a minimum number of guests is required for the boat to tour the lake. Check any communication from the marina before traveling\, especially if weather conditions are uncertain.  \nWhere Do You Park for Miss Liberty?\nThe 2026 event listing states that parking is available at Pine Knot Marina.  \nArriving early is still important\, especially during busy weekends. The marina is close to The Village\, so the surrounding area can see additional pedestrian and vehicle activity during popular travel periods. \nHow Early Should You Arrive?\nPlan to arrive 15 to 30 minutes before your departure time. This gives you time to park\, locate the correct boarding area\, check in\, and be ready before the vessel departs.  \nIf you’re driving up the mountain on the day of your cruise\, leave considerably more than a 15-minute buffer. Traffic\, road work\, weather\, and mountain driving conditions can all affect travel time. \nWhat Should You Bring on a Miss Liberty Cruise?\nYou do not need much equipment for a 90-minute sightseeing cruise\, but these items can make the outing more comfortable: \n\nLayers: Big Bear Lake can feel cooler on the water than conditions onshore.\nA jacket: Particularly useful for the 6:00 PM Twilight Cruise or late-season departures.\nSun protection: Bring sunscreen\, sunglasses\, and a hat for daytime tours.\nYour reservation information: Keep your booking confirmation accessible.\nA charged phone or camera: Expect plenty of lake and mountain views.\nPersonal accessibility necessities: Contact Pine Knot Marina before your trip if you need assistance boarding.\n\nThe vessel has a shaded upper deck and an enclosed heated salon\, but passengers should still check the day’s forecast and dress appropriately.  \nHow to Make a Weekend of Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours\nArrival Day: Check In and Explore Big Bear\nArrive in Big Bear Lake the afternoon or evening before your cruise if your schedule allows. Checking into your cabin before tour day eliminates the need to coordinate a mountain drive with a fixed boat departure. \nOnce settled\, spend some time around The Village or enjoy a relaxed dinner. Pine Knot Marina’s location close to The Village makes it straightforward to combine shopping\, dining\, and the waterfront within the same portion of your trip.  \nCruise Day: See Big Bear Lake From the Water\nFor a daytime tour\, have a relaxed morning and head to the marina early enough to be there 15 to 30 minutes before departure. \nAfter your approximately 90-minute cruise\, keep the remainder of the day flexible. You could spend additional time near the lake or return to the cabin for a slower afternoon. \nFor a Friday\, Saturday\, or Sunday Twilight Cruise\, leave your late afternoon relatively open. The current Twilight departure is at 6:00 PM\, so you do not want another activity running late and forcing you to rush to the marina.  \nOnce the boat returns\, having an overnight cabin means you can enjoy the rest of your evening in Big Bear rather than immediately starting a drive down the mountain. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Miss Liberty weekend. \nDeparture Day: Enjoy More of the Lake\nUse the following morning for another Big Bear experience before heading home. Pine Knot Marina currently offers additional boating and water activities beyond Miss Liberty\, including seasonal rentals and recreation. Verify what’s operating on your travel date before adding another lake activity.  \nA slower departure morning also gives your group time to eat\, pack\, and leave the mountains without turning the entire weekend into a tight driving schedule. \nWhere to Stay for Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours\nBecause Miss Liberty departs from Big Bear Lake\, accommodations in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear communities are the logical choices for most visitors. Staying in Lake Arrowhead solely for a Miss Liberty trip would add unnecessary mountain travel. \nA Chalet currently offers vacation rentals across Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear City\, and Lake Arrowhead\, with a mix of smaller and larger properties. For this particular cruise\, focus your search on the Big Bear inventory.  \nA couple can consider a smaller one- or two-bedroom cabin for a simple lake weekend. Families often benefit from two or three bedrooms and a shared living area\, while groups traveling together can compare larger properties that keep everyone under one roof. \nA Chalet’s current collection includes examples ranging from the one-bedroom Bear Den to two-bedroom properties such as Heavenly Bay Retreat and Jaybird Cabin\, three-bedroom options such as Conklin Canopy\, and four-bedroom properties including Boulder Landing and Rustic Ridge. Bedroom and bathroom counts should always be rechecked on the live listing before booking.  \nIf cooking at the cabin is important to your trip\, confirm that the particular property you choose currently lists a kitchen. The same rule applies to hot tubs\, pet-friendly policies\, parking\, air conditioning\, and other amenities: different A Chalet properties have different features. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your 2026 Big Bear Lake cruise dates. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nReserve your cruise first. Knowing whether you have a noon\, afternoon\, or Twilight departure makes it easier to choose check-in and checkout dates. \nStay in the Big Bear area. The tour leaves from Pine Knot Marina in Big Bear Lake\, so prioritize Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear communities. \nChoose the correct cabin size. A couple does not necessarily need a large group property\, while families and friends may appreciate additional bedrooms and gathering space. \nVerify current property details. Check guest capacity\, bedrooms\, parking\, amenities\, house rules\, and cancellation terms on the current listing. \nConsider arriving the day before. This removes much of the risk associated with combining mountain traffic and a fixed cruise departure. \nConsider staying after a Twilight Cruise. An extra night allows you to relax after the evening cruise rather than immediately making a nighttime drive home. \nKeep weather flexibility in mind. Miss Liberty cruises are weather permitting\, so avoid building a trip where every other reservation depends on the boat operating exactly as planned.  \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen are Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours in 2026?\nThe published season runs from August 19 through November 1\, 2026. Daytime cruises are listed at 12:00 PM\, 2:00 PM\, and 4:00 PM\, with 6:00 PM Twilight Cruises on Friday\, Saturday\, and Sunday.  \nWhere is the Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour?\nMiss Liberty departs from Pine Knot Marina\, 439 Pine Knot Ave\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315.  \nDo You Need Tickets for Miss Liberty?\nYes. The cruise is a ticketed attraction\, and Pine Knot Marina recommends making reservations early. Published 2026 prices vary by passenger category and cruise type.  \nIs Miss Liberty Good for Children?\nThe sightseeing format can work well for families\, and the published 2026 ticket structure includes a child category for ages 4-14. Families traveling with younger children should confirm current ticket and boarding requirements directly with Pine Knot Marina.  \nWhere Do You Park for the Miss Liberty Tour?\nParking is currently listed as available at Pine Knot Marina. Arrive 15 to 30 minutes before the cruise to give yourself time to park and board.  \nWhat Should I Bring on the Cruise?\nBring layers\, a jacket for cooler departures\, sun protection for daytime cruises\, your reservation details\, and a phone or camera. Check the forecast because conditions can feel cooler on the water. \nWhere Should I Stay for Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours?\nBig Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear communities are the most practical lodging areas. A Chalet offers cabins for couples\, families\, and groups across the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability for your Miss Liberty cruise dates. \nPlan Your Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nMiss Liberty Paddlewheel Tours 2026 offer an easy way to experience Big Bear Lake from the water while learning about the valley’s history\, folklore\, and local stories. The 2026 season is currently scheduled through November 1\, with approximately 90-minute daytime tours and weekend Twilight Cruises.  \nStart by choosing your cruise and confirming the current schedule with Pine Knot Marina. Arrive 15 to 30 minutes early\, check the weather before traveling\, and keep enough flexibility in your itinerary for changing lake or mountain conditions. \nFor visitors coming from outside Big Bear\, an overnight stay makes it easier to enjoy the cruise without planning the entire day around driving. Arrive early\, spend some time in The Village\, cruise the lake\, return to your cabin afterward\, and enjoy another morning in the mountains before heading home. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and reserve a Big Bear stay that fits your 2026 Miss Liberty Paddlewheel Tour plans.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/miss-liberty-paddlewheel-tours-37/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T083000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T172500
DTSTAMP:20261016T215619Z
CREATED:20261016T215619Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215619Z
UID:13959-1789288200-1789320300@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Trolley To Trails
DESCRIPTION:Trolley to Trails 2026: Schedule\, Trail Stops\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nTrolley to Trails 2026 is a free seasonal Mountain Transit route around Big Bear Lake that connects riders with popular hiking and recreation stops without requiring them to drive to every trailhead. The route operates on Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays\, with current Visit Big Bear information showing service from 8:30 AM to 5:25 PM. The 2026 season runs through October 3\, 2026. \nAs of September 10\, the remaining published dates are September 12\, 13\, 19\, 20\, 26\, 27\, and October 3. Riders can begin at the Village-Knickerbocker stop at 630 Knickerbocker Road\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\, where parking is available at the public lot. \nThe route serves multiple outdoor stops\, including Towne Trail\, Stanfield Marsh Boardwalk\, Woodland Trail\, Nature Discovery Trail\, Cougar Crest Trail\, Grays Peak Trail\, Castle Rock Trail\, and Pine Knot Trail. You do not need to hike to enjoy the route; Visit Big Bear also promotes it as a free scenic ride around Big Bear Lake. \nFor visitors planning more than one trail or a full weekend outdoors\, staying locally can make the route more useful. A Chalet currently offers vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, so travelers can ride the trolley during the day and return to a cabin afterward instead of building a same-day mountain drive around the schedule. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Trolley to Trails weekend. \nTrolley to Trails 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nService\nTrolley to Trails\n\n\nOperator\nMountain Transit\n\n\nCost\nFree\n\n\nOperating days\nSaturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays\n\n\n2026 season\nMay 2-October 3\, 2026\n\n\nDaily service window\n8:30 AM-5:25 PM\n\n\nRemaining dates\nSeptember 12\, 13\, 19\, 20\, 26\, 27\, and October 3\n\n\nPrimary boarding point\nVillage-Knickerbocker Road\n\n\nAddress\n630 Knickerbocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nParking\nKnickerbocker Public Parking Lot\n\n\nAccessibility\nMountain Transit states that all of its vehicles are wheelchair accessible\n\n\nBikes\nMountain Transit vehicles are equipped with bike racks\n\n\nService animals\nWelcome aboard Mountain Transit vehicles\n\n\nPhone\n909-878-5200\n\n\nOfficial route information\nTrolley to Trails at Visit Big Bear\n\n\n\nMountain Transit’s own accessibility information confirms that its vehicles are wheelchair accessible\, equipped with bike racks\, and allow service animals. Big Bear fixed-route transportation is fare-free. \nWhat Is Trolley to Trails?\nTrolley to Trails is a seasonal Big Bear transportation service created by Mountain Transit in partnership with Visit Big Bear. Its purpose is to connect riders with hiking trails and outdoor recreation locations around Big Bear Lake while reducing the need to find parking at each trailhead. \nThe service is also useful for visitors who simply want to see the lake and mountain scenery. Visit Big Bear specifically notes that non-hikers can ride the trolley for the scenic experience\, so there is no requirement to get off and complete a trail. \nMountain Transit approved the route as a demonstration service through a partnership with Visit Big Bear\, with the partnership supporting fare-free operation. That makes Trolley to Trails different from a paid guided tour: riders use a public-transit-style route with scheduled stops rather than joining a fixed excursion. \nWhen Does Trolley to Trails Run in 2026?\nThe current public schedule lists Trolley to Trails on Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays from the first weekend of May through the first weekend of October. \nAs of September 10\, the remaining 2026 dates published by Visit Big Bear are: \n\nSaturday\, September 12\nSunday\, September 13\nSaturday\, September 19\nSunday\, September 20\nSaturday\, September 26\nSunday\, September 27\nSaturday\, October 3\n\nThe current event page lists October 3\, 2026 as the last scheduled date of the season. \nBecause public transportation schedules can change because of weather\, road conditions\, or operational needs\, check the latest route information before planning a day around the final trolley. \nWhat Is the Trolley to Trails Schedule?\nThe route currently begins at Village-Knickerbocker Road at 8:30 AM and completes its final listed return there at 5:25 PM. The published timetable shows repeated loops throughout the day. \n\n\n\nStop\nFirst Published Stop Time\nFinal Published Stop Time\n\n\n\n\nVillage – Knickerbocker Rd.\n8:30 AM\n5:25 PM return\n\n\nBig 5 – Conklin Rd. & Big Bear Blvd.\n8:32 AM\n4:27 PM\n\n\nTowne Trail – Snow Summit\n8:37 AM\n4:32 PM\n\n\nStater Bros – Big Bear Blvd.\n8:43 AM\n4:38 PM\n\n\nStanfield Marsh Boardwalk\n8:44 AM\n4:39 PM\n\n\nWoodland Trail\n8:47 AM\n4:42 PM\n\n\nNature Discovery Trail\n8:52 AM\n4:47 PM\n\n\nCougar Crest Trail\n8:55 AM\n4:50 PM\n\n\nFawnskin – Fire Station\n9:04 AM\n4:59 PM\n\n\nGrays Peak Trail\n9:07 AM\n5:02 PM\n\n\nCastle Rock Trail\n9:18 AM\n5:13 PM\n\n\nPine Knot Trail\n9:25 AM\n5:20 PM\n\n\n\nThe full published timetable includes several departures at each stop\, generally following the same loop approximately every 95 minutes. Riders should check the current full schedule before choosing a hike so they know when the trolley will return to that trailhead. \nWhich Trails Does Trolley to Trails Serve?\nThe 2026 route reaches a useful cross-section of Big Bear recreation areas rather than serving only one trail. Current stops include: \n\nTowne Trail near Snow Summit\nStanfield Marsh Boardwalk\nWoodland Trail\nNature Discovery Trail\nCougar Crest Trail\nGrays Peak Trail\nCastle Rock Trail\nPine Knot Trail\n\nVisit Big Bear also notes that Grays Peak Trail is now being serviced following its reopening. \nEach trail offers a different experience and level of difficulty. Do not assume that because the trolley serves a trail\, that trail is suitable for every rider. Check current trail distance\, elevation gain\, closures\, weather\, and your group’s abilities separately before getting off. \nWhere Do You Board Trolley to Trails?\nThe primary published pickup and drop-off location is: \nVillage – Knickerbocker Rd.\n630 Knickerbocker Rd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nVisit Big Bear lists parking at the Knickerbocker Public Parking Lot. The first trolley departs this stop at 8:30 AM. \nYou can also board at other scheduled stops along the route. If you are staying near one of those stops\, review the timetable before automatically driving to The Village. \nIs Trolley to Trails Really Free?\nYes. Visit Big Bear and Mountain Transit identify Trolley to Trails as a free seasonal service. \nNo event ticket is required simply to ride the trolley. However\, using the trolley does not automatically waive any separate recreation permit\, trail-use requirement\, admission fee\, or reservation that could apply at an individual destination. \nCheck the rules for the specific trail or recreation site you plan to visit rather than assuming the free ride makes every activity along the route free. \nIs Trolley to Trails Accessible?\nMountain Transit states that all of its vehicles are wheelchair accessible. Its vehicles are also equipped with bike racks\, and service animals are welcome on board. \nThat does not mean every trail stop itself is wheelchair accessible. Accessibility can differ significantly between a paved boardwalk\, parking area\, and natural hiking trail. Travelers who need accessible outdoor options should research the specific stop separately before choosing where to exit. \nFor transportation-specific accessibility questions\, Mountain Transit maintains dedicated accessibility information and rider services. \nCan You Bring a Bike?\nMountain Transit says its vehicles are equipped with bike racks. That can make the system useful for riders combining transit with cycling\, but rack capacity may be limited. \nIf transporting a bicycle is essential to your plans\, check Mountain Transit’s current bike-on-bus policies before departure and have a backup plan in case rack space is unavailable. \nWhat Should You Bring for Trolley to Trails?\nYour packing list should be based primarily on the trail you plan to hike\, not just the trolley ride. Useful basics include: \n\nWater appropriate for the length of your outing\nComfortable hiking or walking shoes\nWeather-appropriate layers\nSun protection\nTrail map or navigation information\nSnacks\nAny necessary medications\nA charged phone\nThe current trolley timetable\n\nBefore leaving the trolley\, note the return schedule for your stop. Build in extra time rather than planning to finish a hike only a few minutes before the final pickup. \nHow Should You Plan a Hike Around the Trolley Schedule?\nThe biggest planning mistake would be choosing a trail based only on the outbound trolley time. You also need to know how long the hike normally takes and when the next return trips are scheduled. \nFor example\, if you leave the trolley for a longer hike late in the afternoon\, the remaining service window may not be sufficient. The final published route reaches Pine Knot Trail at 5:20 PM and returns to Village-Knickerbocker at 5:25 PM\, so that final loop is not designed to drop riders off for a new multi-hour hike. \nChoose an earlier departure for longer trails. For shorter walks\, scenic stops\, or boardwalk experiences\, later loops may offer more flexibility. \nAlways consider your actual pace\, trail conditions\, daylight\, and weather rather than relying solely on an estimated hiking time. \nCan You Ride Trolley to Trails Without Hiking?\nYes. Visit Big Bear specifically encourages non-hikers to use the service as a scenic ride around Big Bear Lake. \nThat makes the route useful for mixed-interest groups. One person may want to hike while another prefers a scenic ride or a less demanding stop. \nIt can also be a simple way to see different parts of the lake without repeatedly looking for parking\, although riders should remember that this is scheduled public transportation rather than a narrated sightseeing tour. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Trolley to Trails\nFriday: Arrive and Plan Your Route\nArrive in Big Bear on Friday\, check into your cabin\, and decide which trail or stops you want to visit the next morning. Review the latest trail conditions and save the trolley timetable so you are not making route decisions at the last minute. \nIf your group has different hiking abilities\, choose stops that allow everyone to enjoy the day without forcing the same itinerary. \nSaturday: Ride From The Village to the Trails\nFor maximum flexibility\, consider boarding one of the earlier morning loops. Starting early provides more options for completing a hike and catching a later trolley back. \nYou might choose one main trail for the morning\, return toward town\, and use the remainder of the afternoon for The Village or another Big Bear activity. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Trolley to Trails weekend. \nSunday: Try a Different Stop\nBecause the service also runs Sundays\, a two-night stay gives you another opportunity to explore without moving your car from trailhead to trailhead. \nKeep Sunday’s plans realistic if you need to check out or drive home later that day. A short outdoor stop may work better than committing to a long hike close to your departure time. \nWhere to Stay for Trolley to Trails\nBecause the route begins in Big Bear Lake and circles recreation sites around Big Bear Lake and Fawnskin\, Big Bear Lake is the most straightforward A Chalet destination for this itinerary. Big Bear City can also work for visitors exploring the broader valley. \nA Chalet currently offers multiple Big Bear lodging sizes. Featured properties include Heavenly Bay Retreat with two bedrooms and two baths\, Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms and one bath\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths\, and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths. \nFor larger groups\, A Chalet currently lists Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape with four bedrooms and three baths. Bear Den is currently shown as a one-bedroom option. \nA cabin stay can work particularly well with this route because you can arrive the night before\, leave your main driving plans behind for part of the day\, ride to a trail\, and return to your lodging afterward. \nVerify occupancy limits\, parking\, kitchen facilities\, pet policies\, and other amenities on the current individual listing before booking\, since features vary from cabin to cabin. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking a Trolley to Trails Weekend Cabin\nChoose your hiking date first. Only seven published service dates remain after September 10\, with October 3 currently listed as the final day. \nStay Friday night for a Saturday hike. That allows you to use an early trolley without first making a morning drive into Big Bear. \nStudy both outbound and return times. A trail that fits the morning schedule may not fit the last return of the day. \nChoose the trail separately from the transportation. The trolley is free\, but trail difficulty\, access rules\, and current conditions still need independent research. \nConsider Big Bear Lake lodging. It places you in the same city as the Knickerbocker starting point. \nVerify parking at your cabin. Larger groups should check the number of permitted vehicles before booking. \nCheck current weather and closures. Late September and early October conditions can affect both hiking plans and mountain travel. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Does Trolley to Trails Run in 2026?\nTrolley to Trails runs Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays during its seasonal operating period. As of September 10\, remaining dates are September 12\, 13\, 19\, 20\, 26\, 27\, and October 3\, 2026. \nHow Much Does Trolley to Trails Cost?\nThe service is free. It is operated by Mountain Transit in partnership with Visit Big Bear. \nWhere Does Trolley to Trails Start?\nThe primary published starting point is Village-Knickerbocker Road\, 630 Knickerbocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. Parking is available in the Knickerbocker Public Parking Lot. \nWhich Trails Can You Reach?\nThe current route serves stops including Towne Trail\, Stanfield Marsh Boardwalk\, Woodland Trail\, Nature Discovery Trail\, Cougar Crest Trail\, Grays Peak Trail\, Castle Rock Trail\, and Pine Knot Trail. \nDo You Have to Be a Hiker to Ride?\nNo. Visit Big Bear encourages non-hikers to ride the trolley for the scenic mountain and lake views as well. \nIs the Trolley Wheelchair Accessible?\nMountain Transit states that all of its vehicles are wheelchair accessible. Accessibility of individual trails and recreation stops varies\, so research your intended destination separately. \nWhere Should I Stay for Trolley to Trails?\nBig Bear Lake is the most practical general lodging base because the primary trolley pickup is at Knickerbocker Road in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City for couples\, families\, and larger groups. \nCheck A Chalet availability for your Trolley to Trails dates. \nPlan Your Trolley to Trails 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nTrolley to Trails 2026 makes it easier to explore several Big Bear recreation areas without driving from one trailhead to the next. The free seasonal route runs on Saturdays\, Sundays\, and holiday Fridays\, with service between 8:30 AM and 5:25 PM and seven currently published dates remaining through October 3. \nThe route reaches hiking and recreation stops around Big Bear Lake\, including Woodland Trail\, Cougar Crest\, Grays Peak\, Castle Rock\, Pine Knot Trail\, and Stanfield Marsh. Mountain Transit vehicles are wheelchair accessible and equipped with bike racks\, while non-hikers are also welcome to ride simply for the scenery. \nFor a more relaxed trip\, arrive in Big Bear the night before\, choose an early trolley\, spend the day exploring the trails\, and return to a cabin instead of scheduling the entire outing around a same-day mountain drive. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Trolley to Trails 2026. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/trolley-to-trails-11/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T090000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T103000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215627Z
CREATED:20261016T215627Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215627Z
UID:13960-1789290000-1789295400@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Mindful Morning Hike
DESCRIPTION:Mindful Morning Hike Big Bear 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nMindful Morning Hike Big Bear 2026 is an easy\, guided 1.5-mile experience on Woodland Trail in the San Bernardino National Forest. Instead of emphasizing speed or elevation\, the hike is designed around slowing down\, observing the forest\, and spending intentional time outdoors through quiet observation and gentle mindfulness moments. \nThe final currently published 2026 hike is Sunday\, September 13\, from 9:00 AM to 10:30 AM. Big Bear Hiking Adventures lists the experience as 1.5 hours\, easy difficulty\, and currently publishes a price of $30 per person. The official Visit Big Bear event listing identifies Woodland Trail at 41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear City\, CA 92314 as the event location. \nThe hike is suitable for beginners and has a recommended minimum age of 8+. Leashed dogs are allowed. Participants should arrive about 10 minutes early\, bring water\, comfortable walking or hiking shoes\, and layers\, and be prepared for changing mountain conditions. \nFor travelers coming from outside Big Bear\, staying overnight Saturday can turn the experience into a much calmer Sunday morning. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, so you can wake up locally\, have breakfast\, head to Woodland Trail without a long early-morning mountain drive\, and enjoy more of Big Bear after the hike. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for the September 13 Mindful Morning Hike weekend. \nMindful Morning Hike 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nMindful Morning Hike\n\n\nOrganizer\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\nFinal published 2026 date\nSunday\, September 13\, 2026\n\n\nTime\n9:00 AM-10:30 AM\n\n\nDuration\nApproximately 1.5 hours\n\n\nLocation\nWoodland Trail\n\n\nAddress\n41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear City\, CA 92314\n\n\nDifficulty\nEasy\n\n\nDistance\n1.5 miles\n\n\nCurrent published price\n$30 per person\n\n\nRecommended age\n8+\n\n\nDogs\nAllowed on leash\n\n\nArrival\nArrive approximately 10 minutes early for check-in and trail briefing\n\n\nParking\nWoodland Trail Parking Lot\n\n\nParking requirement\nAdventure Pass required according to the event listing\n\n\nRefund policy\nReservations are nonrefundable\n\n\nOfficial event information\nVisit Big Bear Mindful Morning Hike\n\n\nOrganizer website\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures\n\n\n\nWhat Is the Mindful Morning Hike?\nThe Mindful Morning Hike is a guided Woodland Trail experience that approaches hiking differently from a traditional fitness-focused outing. The goal is not to cover as much distance as possible or reach a difficult summit. Instead\, the experience encourages participants to move at a relaxed pace and pay attention to the surrounding forest. \nBig Bear Hiking Adventures describes the hike as an opportunity to unplug\, breathe\, and become immersed in the sights and sounds of the mountains. The event listing highlights quiet observation\, mindfulness\, fresh mountain air\, and intentional time in nature. \nThat makes the outing especially appealing to travelers who like outdoor activities but do not necessarily want a strenuous hike. Beginners\, couples\, friends\, solo visitors\, families with older children\, and wellness-focused travelers are all reasonable audiences for the experience. \nThe hike is led by Big Bear Hiking Adventures\, whose guided programs combine local trail knowledge with nature interpretation\, safety awareness\, and responsible recreation. The company became certified through the Big Bear Valley Green Business Program in April 2026 and promotes Leave No Trace principles and trail etiquette. \nWhen and Where Is the Mindful Morning Hike?\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures publishes the following 2026 Mindful Morning Hike dates: \n\nJuly 5\nJuly 19\nAugust 2\nAugust 23\nSeptember 7\nSeptember 13\n\nAs of September 10\, the earlier outings have passed. That leaves Sunday\, September 13\, 2026 as the final currently published date. \nThe hike runs from 9:00 AM to 10:30 AM at Woodland Trail. Visit Big Bear lists the location as: \nWoodland Trail\n41948 N Shore Dr.\nBig Bear City\, CA 92314 \nParticipants should plan to arrive approximately 10 minutes before the 9:00 AM start for check-in and a trail briefing. Big Bear Hiking Adventures’ general booking guidance similarly asks guests to arrive 5-10 minutes before scheduled hikes. \nHow Difficult Is the Mindful Morning Hike?\nThe Mindful Morning Hike is rated easy and covers approximately 1.5 miles. \nThat makes it substantially more approachable than Big Bear guided outings centered on longer distances or major elevation gains. The relaxed pace is intentional\, allowing time for observation and mindfulness rather than treating the trail as a workout. \nStill\, “easy” does not mean completely effortless for every visitor. Woodland Trail is an outdoor National Forest trail rather than an indoor or paved attraction. Individual mobility\, weather\, altitude\, and trail conditions can affect how difficult the experience feels. \nIf anyone in your group has concerns about walking on natural terrain\, contact Big Bear Hiking Adventures before booking to determine whether the outing is appropriate. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect?\nThe experience is built around a calm guided walk through a forest setting. Rather than promising a rigid sequence of exercises\, the published description focuses on several core elements: \n\nWalking Woodland Trail at a relaxed pace\nQuiet observation of the forest\nGentle mindfulness moments\nIntentional time in nature\nFresh mountain air and forest surroundings\nA small-group atmosphere\n\nThe organizer specifically limits space to help preserve a peaceful and more personal group experience. \nVisitors should not expect a high-intensity hike\, competition\, or fast-paced tour. The appeal is almost the opposite: this is an opportunity to begin the morning slowly and experience the forest with fewer distractions. \nAn optional journal or camera can be useful if you want to record observations\, photograph the surroundings\, or continue the reflective aspect of the experience after the hike. \nHow Much Does the Mindful Morning Hike Cost?\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures currently publishes the Mindful Morning Hike at $30 per person. \nBecause pricing and availability can change\, check the live booking system before finalizing your plans. \nReservations are charged in full when booked and are nonrefundable under the organizer’s published booking policy. A participant waiver is also required for everyone taking part in a hike. \nCheck Big Bear Hiking Adventures for current Mindful Morning Hike booking information. \nParking and Transportation\nThe event listing says parking is available at the Woodland Trail Parking Lot and specifies that an Adventure Pass is required. \nDo not leave parking arrangements until the 9:00 AM start time. Participants are expected to arrive early for check-in and the trail briefing\, and late arrivals may not be accommodated. \nIf you are unfamiliar with the area\, review your route before leaving your cabin and follow the meeting instructions supplied with your reservation. \nMountain road\, weather\, and trail conditions can also change. Big Bear Hiking Adventures states that hikes may be modified\, rerouted\, postponed\, or canceled when the guide determines conditions are unsafe\, so check communications from the organizer before departure. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nThe published event information recommends bringing: \n\nComfortable walking or hiking shoes\nWater\nLight layers for changing mountain temperatures\nAn optional journal or camera\nNecessary personal medicines\, such as an EpiPen or inhaler\n\nEven for an easy 1.5-mile hike\, water and appropriate footwear matter. Mountain temperatures can change noticeably during the morning\, so layers are preferable to relying on one heavier piece of clothing. \nSun protection may also be useful depending on conditions. Check the forecast before leaving your cabin rather than assuming a September morning will remain cool for the entire outing. \nBring any medication you may need personally instead of expecting it to be available from the guide. \nCan Kids and Dogs Join the Mindful Morning Hike?\nThe event publishes a recommended minimum age of 8+\, making this one of the more approachable guided Big Bear hiking experiences for families with older children. \nParents should still consider whether their child will enjoy the mindfulness-focused format. The experience emphasizes calm observation and a relaxed group environment rather than games or a fast-paced adventure. \nDogs are allowed on leash. Owners should keep pets controlled around the group and bring whatever water and supplies their dog requires. \nIf you are staying overnight with a dog\, remember that the event’s dog policy and your vacation rental’s pet policy are separate. Confirm that your specific A Chalet property permits pets before booking. \nWhat Happens If the Weather Changes?\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures states that weather and trail conditions can affect guided outings. A hike may be modified\, rerouted\, postponed\, or canceled if the guide determines that conditions are unsafe. \nThat is particularly important in a mountain environment\, where conditions can differ from what visitors experienced before beginning their drive to Big Bear. \nCheck the weather forecast\, monitor any messages from the organizer\, and avoid assuming that the hike is canceled simply because conditions look different at your cabin. Follow the organizer’s instructions. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Mindful Morning Hike\nSaturday: Arrive and Settle Into Big Bear\nFor visitors traveling from Southern California cities\, arriving Saturday can make the Sunday morning schedule much easier. \nCheck into your cabin\, have dinner\, and keep the evening relatively relaxed. Before bed\, organize your walking shoes\, water\, layers\, Adventure Pass arrangements\, and any personal medication you need for the hike. \nAlso review your booking confirmation for the latest meeting and check-in instructions. \nCheck A Chalet availability for the September 13 hiking weekend. \nSunday Morning: Start With Woodland Trail\nHave breakfast early enough that you can reach Woodland Trail before the required check-in period. Aim to be ready at the meeting location around 8:50 AM rather than pulling into the area at 9:00. \nThe guided hike runs until approximately 10:30 AM\, leaving much of Sunday available for the rest of your Big Bear plans. \nBecause the hike is short and intentionally easygoing\, you may still have energy for another activity afterward. Avoid over-scheduling\, though—the appeal of a mindful morning can disappear quickly if the rest of the day becomes a race between reservations. \nSunday Late Morning and Afternoon\nAfter the hike\, return to your cabin if your checkout arrangements allow\, or continue into Big Bear Lake for breakfast\, lunch\, shopping\, or time near the lake. \nAnother option is to keep the nature theme going with an easy scenic stop rather than immediately moving into a strenuous second hike. \nThe benefit of staying overnight is not simply proximity to the trail. It allows the 9:00 AM experience to feel like the beginning of a mountain morning instead of the endpoint of a pre-dawn commute. \nWhere to Stay for the Mindful Morning Hike\nBecause Woodland Trail is on the north side of Big Bear Lake\, both Big Bear City and Big Bear Lake are relevant A Chalet destinations for this event. There is little reason to base an event-focused trip in Lake Arrowhead when A Chalet offers options within the Big Bear Valley itself. \nA Chalet’s current collection includes cabins for different group sizes\, from smaller one- and two-bedroom stays to larger three- and four-bedroom properties. \nCurrent featured options include Bear Den with one bedroom and one bath; Heavenly Bay Retreat and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths; Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths; and larger properties including Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape\, each currently listed with four bedrooms and three baths. \nFor a mindfulness-focused weekend\, choose based on practical needs rather than simply selecting the largest cabin. A couple may prefer a smaller property\, while friends or a family group may value separate bedrooms\, a kitchen\, and shared living space. \nAlways verify the live property listing for occupancy\, parking\, pet rules\, and amenities before reserving. If you plan to bring a dog on the hike\, pay particular attention to the cabin’s current pet policy. \nBrowse A Chalet’s current Big Bear cabins. \nTips for Booking a Mindful Morning Hike Weekend Cabin\nBook the hike before building the weekend around it. September 13 is the final currently published 2026 Mindful Morning Hike date\, and the organizer says group space is limited. \nConsider a Saturday-night stay. Sleeping locally is particularly useful for a 9:00 AM event with an early check-in requirement. \nConfirm the cabin’s location. Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City both make more sense for Woodland Trail than adding a commute from another mountain community. \nCheck pet rules separately. Leashed dogs are permitted on the hike\, but that does not automatically mean every vacation rental accepts pets. \nReview parking before Sunday morning. The event listing says the Woodland Trail Parking Lot requires an Adventure Pass. \nKeep your departure day flexible. Since the hike finishes around 10:30 AM\, you can still enjoy several hours in Big Bear before heading home. \nCheck conditions before leaving. Weather or trail conditions may cause the organizer to modify the outing. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Mindful Morning Hike in Big Bear?\nThe final currently published 2026 Mindful Morning Hike is Sunday\, September 13\, from 9:00 AM to 10:30 AM. Earlier 2026 dates included July 5\, July 19\, August 2\, August 23\, and September 7. \nWhere Is the Mindful Morning Hike?\nThe hike takes place on Woodland Trail. Visit Big Bear lists the event address as 41948 N Shore Dr.\, Big Bear City\, CA 92314. \nHow Difficult Is the Hike?\nThe Mindful Morning Hike is rated easy and covers approximately 1.5 miles. The experience is intentionally paced around mindfulness and observation rather than speed. \nHow Much Does the Mindful Morning Hike Cost?\nBig Bear Hiking Adventures currently publishes a price of $30 per person. Check the organizer’s live booking information before purchasing because prices and availability can change. \nCan Children Join?\nYes. The published recommended minimum age is 8+. Parents should consider whether their child is comfortable walking 1.5 miles and participating in a calm\, mindfulness-oriented group experience. \nAre Dogs Allowed?\nYes. The event listing says dogs are allowed on leash. Bring appropriate water and supplies for your dog and follow the guide’s instructions throughout the outing. \nWhere Should I Stay for the Mindful Morning Hike?\nBig Bear Lake and Big Bear City are practical A Chalet destinations for an event at Woodland Trail. Staying Saturday night lets you wake up locally for the 9:00 AM Sunday hike and avoids beginning a restorative morning with a long early drive into the mountains. \nCheck A Chalet availability for the Mindful Morning Hike weekend. \nPlan Your Mindful Morning Hike Big Bear 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Mindful Morning Hike Big Bear 2026 offers a gentler way to experience the San Bernardino National Forest. Instead of chasing a summit or testing your hiking speed\, the 1.5-mile Woodland Trail outing emphasizes quiet observation\, an easy pace\, fresh mountain air\, and intentional connection with the surrounding forest. \nThe final currently published hike is Sunday\, September 13\, from 9:00 AM to 10:30 AM. It is rated easy\, has a recommended minimum age of 8+\, permits leashed dogs\, and currently costs $30 per person. Arrive about 10 minutes early\, bring water and appropriate footwear\, wear layers\, and remember that the Woodland Trail parking information specifies an Adventure Pass. \nFor an experience built around slowing down\, it makes sense to plan the trip the same way. Arrive in Big Bear on Saturday\, spend the night in a local cabin\, wake up without a long commute\, enjoy the guided hike Sunday morning\, and leave time afterward for breakfast\, the lake\, or simply a few more quiet hours in the mountains. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Mindful Morning Hike Big Bear 2026 getaway. \n\n“` ?cite?turn0search3?turn0search8?turn0search7?turn0search2?
URL:https://achalet.com/event/mindful-morning-hike-2/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T140000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260913T150000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215624Z
CREATED:20261016T215624Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215624Z
UID:13961-1789308000-1789311600@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Mountain Story Time
DESCRIPTION:Mountain Story Time 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nMountain Story Time 2026 is a recurring family program at the Big Bear Discovery Center in Fawnskin featuring stories and hot chocolate in a nature-focused setting. The published schedule runs through December 20\, 2026\, with Story Time held Fridays at 12:00 PM and Sundays at 2:00 PM. The program is described as family-friendly and suitable for all ages. \nThe Big Bear Discovery Center is located at 40971 North Shore Drive/Hwy 38\, Fawnskin\, CA 92333. While visiting\, families can also learn about the surrounding San Bernardino National Forest and explore the Discovery Center’s nature-oriented offerings. The Center’s normal business hours are currently listed as Thursday through Monday\, 9:00 AM to 4:00 PM. \nMountain Story Time works especially well as part of a family weekend rather than as the only reason for a mountain trip. Staying in the Big Bear area gives families time to combine the program with outdoor recreation and a relaxed cabin stay. A Chalet currently offers rentals in both Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, including options for smaller families and larger groups. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear family trip. \nMountain Story Time 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nMountain Story Time\n\n\n2026 schedule\nFridays and Sundays through December 20\, 2026\n\n\nFriday time\n12:00 PM\n\n\nSunday time\n2:00 PM\n\n\nVenue\nBig Bear Discovery Center\n\n\nAddress\n40971 North Shore Drive/Hwy 38\, Fawnskin\, CA 92333\n\n\nAudience\nFamily-friendly; described as suitable for all ages\n\n\nProgram\nStories and hot chocolate\n\n\nAdmission\nNo Mountain Story Time admission price is published on the current event page\n\n\nParking\nAt/serving the Big Bear Discovery Center; follow posted parking directions\n\n\nRecommended arrival\nAbout 10-15 minutes early as a practical planning buffer; no official early-arrival requirement is currently published\n\n\nPhone\n909-382-2790\n\n\nOfficial event information\nMountain Story Time at Visit Big Bear\n\n\n\nOne detail in the source data can be confusing: the event page’s structured header displays a generic 1:30 PM-2:30 PM time\, while the actual event description specifically says Fridays at noon and Sundays at 2:00 PM. The current upcoming-date list also confirms the Friday/Sunday recurrence. For trip planning\, visitors should follow the day-specific schedule and verify their chosen session before leaving. \nWhat Is Mountain Story Time?\nMountain Story Time is a recurring family activity hosted at the Big Bear Discovery Center on the north side of Big Bear Lake. Rather than being a large festival or ticketed performance\, it offers families a simpler activity centered on stories and hot chocolate. \nThe current event description calls the program family-friendly and suitable for all ages. That makes it useful for families seeking an indoor or lower-key activity to balance hiking\, lake recreation\, snow play\, or other more active parts of a Big Bear trip. \nThe setting is part of the appeal. The Big Bear Discovery Center opened in 1998 and provides visitor information\, educational programs\, eco-tours\, special events\, and opportunities to learn more about responsible recreation in the San Bernardino National Forest. \nVisit Big Bear reports that the Discovery Center welcomes more than 190\,000 visitors annually and describes its goal as helping visitors become more knowledgeable and responsible caretakers of the surrounding national forest. \nWhen Is Mountain Story Time in 2026?\nThe published Mountain Story Time schedule continues through Sunday\, December 20\, 2026. \nThe recurring weekly schedule is: \n\nFridays: 12:00 PM\nSundays: 2:00 PM\n\nAs of September 10\, the next sessions listed by Visit Big Bear begin on Friday\, September 11 and Sunday\, September 13\, followed by Friday and Sunday dates through December 20. \nUpcoming dates currently include September 11\, 13\, 18\, 20\, 25\, and 27; October 2\, 4\, 9\, 11\, 16\, 18\, 23\, 25\, and 30; November 1\, 6\, 8\, 13\, 15\, 20\, 22\, 27\, and 29; and December 4\, 6\, 11\, 13\, 18\, and 20. \nBecause this is a recurring program extending into winter\, families should still check the official listing before traveling. Mountain weather\, holidays\, operating changes\, or other circumstances can affect individual dates. \nWhere Is Mountain Story Time?\nMountain Story Time takes place at: \nBig Bear Discovery Center\n40971 North Shore Drive/Hwy 38\nFawnskin\, CA 92333 \nThe Discovery Center is on the north side of Big Bear Lake in Fawnskin. Its current normal business hours are listed as Thursday through Monday from 9:00 AM to 4:00 PM\, which includes both the Friday and Sunday Story Time days. \nFor current venue information\, visitors can call 909-382-2790. The Discovery Center directory also publishes info@mountainsfoundation.org as a contact email. \nWhat Can Families Expect at Mountain Story Time?\nThe format is intentionally straightforward. Families gather at the Discovery Center for stories and hot chocolate in a program designed for all ages. \nUnlike a major festival\, the event listing does not advertise performers\, competitions\, vendors\, or a complicated activity schedule. Families should plan for a relaxed story-time experience rather than expecting an all-day event. \nThe event description also encourages visitors to make more of their Discovery Center stop by enjoying a nature hike and exploring the Center’s nature-themed gift shop. \nThat combination can work well for families with younger children: Story Time provides a scheduled anchor for the day\, while the rest of the visit can remain flexible depending on weather\, energy levels\, and current trail conditions. \nDoes Mountain Story Time Require Tickets?\nThe current Mountain Story Time listing does not publish an admission price or state that advance tickets are required. Visitors should therefore avoid relying on third-party pricing or assuming that another Discovery Center program’s admission rules apply to Story Time. \nIf participation requirements are important to your plans\, call the Big Bear Discovery Center at 909-382-2790 before your visit\, particularly for holiday-weekend or winter sessions. \nThe official event listing can also be checked at Visit Big Bear’s Mountain Story Time page. \nParking and Arrival Tips\nThe event takes place at the Big Bear Discovery Center\, and the listing does not announce a separate off-site event parking or shuttle program. Visitors should use the appropriate parking serving the Center and follow all posted directions when they arrive. \nThere is no official requirement in the current listing to arrive a specific number of minutes early. Still\, arriving roughly 10 to 15 minutes before Story Time is a reasonable planning buffer\, especially for families who need time to park\, get children settled\, or visit the restroom before the program begins. \nRemember that the schedule changes according to the day: Friday sessions are at noon\, while Sunday sessions are at 2:00 PM. \nWhat Should You Bring to Mountain Story Time?\nMountain Story Time does not have a published event-specific packing list. Families therefore do not need specialized equipment simply to attend the storytelling program. \nFor a broader Discovery Center visit\, consider bringing: \n\nWeather-appropriate layers\nComfortable shoes if you plan to walk outdoors\nWater for your family\nAny necessary medications or child-care essentials\nSun protection for daytime outdoor activities\n\nIf you intend to add a nature walk\, check current weather and trail conditions first. A December Story Time visit can require very different preparation from a September visit. \nIs Mountain Story Time Good for Kids?\nYes. The official event description specifically calls Mountain Story Time family-friendly and says it is suitable for all ages. \nNo minimum age is published. That makes the program potentially useful for families traveling with children of different ages or grandparents joining a multigenerational Big Bear trip. \nParents should still consider their own child’s ability to sit through a storytelling activity. “All ages” describes the program’s intended audience; it does not mean every child will have the same attention span or interest. \nWhat Else Can You Do at the Big Bear Discovery Center?\nThe Discovery Center is more than a Story Time venue. It serves as an educational and visitor hub connected to the San Bernardino National Forest and hosts weekly programs\, eco-tours\, outdoor concerts\, theater productions\, and nighttime interpretive programming at different times of year. \nFor Mountain Story Time specifically\, the event listing suggests adding a nature hike and a stop in the nature-themed gift shop. \nFamilies should check what is operating on their actual travel date rather than assuming every Discovery Center program runs alongside Story Time. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Mountain Story Time\nFriday Option: Arrive for Noon Story Time\nIf your family can reach Big Bear before Friday’s noon session\, Mountain Story Time can serve as the first scheduled activity of your trip. Visit the Discovery Center\, enjoy the program\, and keep the afternoon open for an easy outdoor activity if conditions are appropriate. \nAfterward\, check into your cabin and have a relaxed evening rather than packing several major attractions into arrival day. \nSaturday: Enjoy a Full Day in Big Bear\nUse Saturday for the larger activity your family wants to build the trip around. Depending on the season and current conditions\, Big Bear offers lake recreation\, hiking\, mountain activities\, shopping\, and other family attractions. \nReturning to a cabin afterward gives families space to eat together and recharge before another day out. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Mountain Story Time weekend. \nSunday Option: Story Time Before Heading Home\nFamilies arriving later on Friday can instead make the Sunday 2:00 PM session part of their final day. \nKeep checkout requirements and your drive home in mind when using the Sunday program as a departure-day activity. If your schedule allows another night\, staying through Sunday can remove the need to immediately begin a longer drive after the Discovery Center visit. \nWhere to Stay for Mountain Story Time\nMountain Story Time is held in Fawnskin on the north side of Big Bear Lake. For most visitors\, Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City provides a more geographically relevant lodging base than Lake Arrowhead for this particular event. \nA Chalet currently offers vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, with options ranging from one-bedroom accommodations to larger four-bedroom properties. \nCurrent examples include Bear Den with one bedroom; Heavenly Bay Retreat\, Jaybird Cabin\, Maverick’s Cabin\, and Golden Hour with two bedrooms; Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms; and Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape with four bedrooms. \nFor families\, choose based on the current occupancy limits and features of the individual listing rather than bedroom count alone. For example\, A Chalet’s current Conklin Canopy listing identifies it as a three-bedroom\, two-bathroom Big Bear Lake property sleeping up to eight\, with a game room\, kitchen\, washer and dryer\, and parking for up to three vehicles. \nProperty details and availability can change\, so verify the live listing before booking rather than assuming the same amenities are included at every A Chalet cabin. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabins. \nTips for Booking a Mountain Story Time Weekend Cabin\nChoose Friday or Sunday first. Friday Story Time begins at noon\, while Sunday’s session starts at 2:00 PM. \nCheck the event listing before traveling. The program is recurring through December\, so weather\, holidays\, or operating changes may affect individual sessions. \nStay in the Big Bear area. Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City is a practical base for a Fawnskin event. \nMatch the cabin to your family. Check occupancy\, bedroom configuration\, parking rules\, and current amenities before reserving. \nConsider two nights. Story Time itself is a relatively simple family activity\, so it makes more sense when combined with other Big Bear experiences rather than a rushed same-day trip. \nPlan differently by season. September and December can bring very different mountain conditions. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Mountain Story Time in 2026?\nMountain Story Time runs on Fridays and Sundays through December 20\, 2026. Friday sessions are listed at 12:00 PM and Sunday sessions at 2:00 PM. \nWhere Is Mountain Story Time?\nThe program is held at the Big Bear Discovery Center\, 40971 North Shore Drive/Hwy 38\, Fawnskin\, CA 92333. \nIs Mountain Story Time Good for Children?\nYes. The event is specifically described as family-friendly and suitable for all ages. No minimum age is currently published. \nDo You Need Tickets for Mountain Story Time?\nThe current official event page does not publish an admission price or state that advance tickets are required. For the latest participation details\, check the event page or call the Discovery Center at 909-382-2790. \nWhat Happens During Mountain Story Time?\nThe program features stories and hot chocolate. The event listing also encourages families to enjoy a nature hike and explore the Discovery Center’s nature-themed gift shop while visiting. \nWhat Time Should We Arrive?\nNo official early-arrival requirement is published. Arriving around 10-15 minutes before the session is a practical buffer for parking and getting children settled. Remember that Friday sessions begin at noon and Sunday sessions at 2:00 PM. \nWhere Should Families Stay for Mountain Story Time?\nBig Bear Lake or Big Bear City provides a practical base for visiting the Discovery Center in Fawnskin. A Chalet currently offers one-\, two-\, three-\, and four-bedroom options across its Big Bear collection\, depending on current availability. \nCheck A Chalet availability for your family trip. \nPlan Your Mountain Story Time 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nMountain Story Time 2026 is an easy addition to a family trip to Big Bear: stories\, hot chocolate\, and a visit to the Big Bear Discovery Center in Fawnskin. The current schedule runs through December 20\, with Friday sessions at noon and Sunday sessions at 2:00 PM. \nFamilies can pair Story Time with a visit to the Discovery Center\, an appropriate nature walk\, and other seasonal Big Bear activities. Because the program continues from late summer into December\, check the latest event information and mountain conditions before each visit. \nTurning the outing into an overnight stay also gives families more flexibility. Instead of driving to the mountains solely for Story Time\, you can check into a Big Bear cabin\, enjoy a full weekend together\, and use the Discovery Center program as one relaxed part of the itinerary. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear family stay around Mountain Story Time 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/mountain-story-time-24/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260914T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260914T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215623Z
CREATED:20261016T215623Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215623Z
UID:13398-1789344000-1789344000@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Plein Air Art Competition
DESCRIPTION:Plein Air Art Competition 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 is Visit Big Bear’s third annual plein air competition and a month-long celebration of outdoor painting across the Big Bear Valley. Artists can create their competition work between September 12 and October 10\, 2026\, with gallery events beginning in September and the main Competition Gallery and awards scheduled for October. \nRegistered artists first complete online registration\, then visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard to have their painting substrates stamped. The Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. Artists may have multiple substrates stamped\, but the competition information says there is one submission per artist for galleries.  \nThe main submitted works will be displayed at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake. Visit Big Bear lists the principal competition awards as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. The awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nThis event is particularly well suited to an overnight or multi-night Big Bear trip because artists are intentionally given time to explore the valley\, choose landscapes\, return to locations\, and continue developing their work. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City that can serve as a base between painting sessions\, gallery visits\, and other fall activities.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear art trip. \nPlein Air Art Competition 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nBig Bear Plein Air Art Competition & Festival of Artist Events\n\n\nOrganizer\nVisit Big Bear\n\n\nCompetition year\n2026 — 3rd annual event\n\n\nCreate period\nSeptember 12-October 10\, 2026\n\n\nArtist registration\nOnline registration required before arrival\n\n\nMaximum artists\n75 participants\n\n\nSubstrate stamping\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n\n\nVisitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nVisitor Center hours\nDaily\, 9:00 AM-5:00 PM\n\n\nCompetition Gallery\nDestination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\n\n\nMain gallery period\nOctober 14-18\, 2026\n\n\nAwards ceremony\nOctober 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM\n\n\nMain awards\n1st: $2\,000; 2nd: $1\,500; 3rd: $500\n\n\nPublic gallery access\nPublic invited; artwork available for purchase\n\n\nParking\nNo single competition-wide parking plan is published; follow instructions and posted rules at each location\n\n\nOfficial website\nVisit Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear confirms the September 12-October 10 creation period and lists every day in that period as part of the recurring competition calendar.  \nWhat Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition?\nThe Plein Air Art Competition invites artists to create landscapes outdoors in the Big Bear Valley\, working directly from the scenery rather than solely from photographs or studio references. \nWhat distinguishes the Big Bear format is its extended creation period. Artists do not have to arrive on one morning and complete their work under a short time limit. Visit Big Bear gives participants from September 12 through October 10 to explore\, select a location\, paint\, and potentially return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nThat format encourages artists to experience the valley during early fall\, when the character of the landscape can change with light\, weather\, and seasonal conditions. Participants choose their own Big Bear landscape subject rather than being assigned one specific painting location for the main competition. \nFor 2026\, Visit Big Bear has expanded the program with a Festival of Artist Events. Registration in the main competition includes access to the highlighted festival activities\, and artists may choose to participate in one or several. The competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhen Is the Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nThe competition is not a single-day event. Instead\, it unfolds across several phases. \nSeptember 12-October 10: Create\nArtists may visit Big Bear at any point during this period to create their competition work. Before arriving\, participants are instructed to complete online registration. \nAfter reaching Big Bear\, artists must stop at the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center\, 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, to have their painting substrates stamped. Visit Big Bear says artists can have as many substrates stamped as they wish. Completed competition artwork is then returned to the Visitor Center for storage before the gallery opens.  \nOctober 14-18: Competition Gallery\nVisit Big Bear’s dedicated competition page identifies the main gallery and awards period as October 14-18. The event calendar separately shows the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition Gallery running during this same mid-October period at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nThe public is invited to view the competition artwork\, and Visit Big Bear states that artwork at the galleries will be available for purchase.  \nOctober 18: Awards Ceremony\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for Sunday\, October 18 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhat Special Artist Events Are Part of the 2026 Festival?\nThe expanded 2026 Festival of Artist Events adds several opportunities beyond the main competition. \nArtist’s Best Work en Plein Air Gallery — September 18-19\nThis gallery gives participating artists another chance to exhibit and sell plein air work. Visit Big Bear lists a $500 Best of Show award for this portion of the festival.  \nThe Village Paint-Out — September 19\nA dedicated Paint-Out is scheduled in The Village Big Bear Lake on September 19. This provides a more concentrated event within the broader month-long competition period.  \nMoonridge Corridor Paint-Out — October 3\nAnother Paint-Out takes place in the Moonridge Corridor on October 3\, followed by a gallery on October 4. Visit Big Bear lists a separate $500 Best of Show award for this event.  \nMain Competition Gallery and Awards — October 14-18\nThe main competition concludes with the complete collection of submitted works and the awards ceremony. The principal prizes currently published are: \n\nFirst Place: $2\,000\nSecond Place: $1\,500\nThird Place: $500\n\nVisit Big Bear lists John Budicin\, Diane Moore\, and Lisa Mozzini-McDill as distinguished judges associated with the 2026 competition.  \nHow Do Artists Register and Submit Their Work?\nArtists should begin at the official Visit Big Bear Plein Air Competition page and complete the linked registration before traveling to Big Bear. \nThe currently published process is: \n\nComplete registration online before arriving.\nVisit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center during operating hours.\nHave the painting substrates you may use stamped.\nExplore Big Bear and create the work during the September 12-October 10 competition period.\nReturn the completed competition painting to the Visitor Center.\nSubmitted artwork is stored until the Competition Gallery opens.\n\nVisit Big Bear states that the 2026 competition has a maximum of 75 participating artists and allows one submission per artist for the galleries.  \nThe public page reviewed for this guide does not display a clearly stated universal competition registration price in its main event information. Artists should check the live registration form for the current fee and full participation terms rather than relying on a prior year’s price. \nWhere Are the Visitor Center and Competition Gallery?\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM and is the location where artists get substrates stamped and return completed competition paintings.  \nDestination Big Bear Event Room\n713 Stocker Rd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA \nThis is the published location for the Competition Gallery\, the October 18 awards ceremony\, and the public pop-up galleries associated with the festival.  \nNo single parking plan covering every competition location is published. Artists and gallery visitors should follow event instructions and posted parking regulations at the Visitor Center\, The Village\, Moonridge\, and the Destination Big Bear Event Room. \nCan Non-Artists Attend the Plein Air Events?\nYes. The competition is not only for participating painters. \nVisit Big Bear specifically invites art enthusiasts\, collectors\, and members of the community to attend the pop-up galleries and view the complete collection of 2026 competition artwork. Artwork will also be available for purchase.  \nThat makes the October gallery period a good option for visitors who enjoy art but do not plan to enter the competition themselves. \nA public admission charge for the galleries is not stated on the current competition page. Visitors should check the individual gallery listing closer to their chosen date if admission\, opening hours\, or purchasing procedures are important to their plans. \nWhat Should Artists Bring?\nVisit Big Bear does not publish one universal equipment list because plein air painters work with different media and setups. Participants should therefore prepare according to their own painting method and the outdoor mountain environment. \nA practical artist packing list may include: \n\nYour preferred paints\, brushes\, and painting tools\nMultiple eligible substrates to have stamped at the Visitor Center\nPortable easel or pochade setup\nWater or appropriate painting medium\nSun protection\nWeather-appropriate layers\nWater and snacks\nProtective equipment for transporting wet artwork\nAny personal medications or necessities\n\nBecause artists choose their own locations around Big Bear\, conditions can vary significantly between lakefront areas\, forested locations\, The Village\, and higher-elevation viewpoints. Check the forecast and current access conditions before setting up outdoors. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Plein Air Art Competition\nDay 1: Arrive\, Register\, and Scout Locations\nComplete online registration before leaving home. After arriving in Big Bear\, check into your cabin and visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center between 9:00 AM and 5:00 PM to get your substrates stamped. \nInstead of immediately committing to the first landscape you see\, use part of the afternoon to explore Big Bear Valley and observe how light falls across different areas. \nDay 2: Paint en Plein Air\nStart early enough to work during the light conditions you want to capture. Because the competition gives artists nearly a month to create\, there is no need to treat the trip like a speed-painting contest unless you’re participating in a specific Paint-Out. \nReturning to a cabin between sessions can be useful for organizing supplies\, resting\, eating\, and preparing for another painting period. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for your Plein Air Competition dates. \nReturn for the Gallery or Awards\nArtists do not have to treat the September-October creation period and October gallery as a single continuous stay. Visit Big Bear explicitly allows artists to visit once or return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nYou might therefore plan one trip for painting and another for the Competition Gallery and October 18 awards ceremony. \nWhere to Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition\nBecause the competition spans the Big Bear Valley and important event locations are in Big Bear Lake\, staying in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City makes practical sense. \nA Chalet currently offers cabins in both destinations\, with properties ranging from smaller two-bedroom stays to larger three- and four-bedroom rentals. Current examples shown in A Chalet’s collection include Heavenly Bay Retreat and Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms\, and Boulder Landing and Rustic Ridge with four bedrooms.  \nFor an artist traveling alone or with a partner\, a smaller cabin can provide a straightforward base between painting sessions. Friends participating together may prefer additional bedrooms and common space for organizing the trip. \nIf you need particular features for an art-focused stay—such as parking capacity\, a kitchen\, laundry facilities\, pet permission\, or additional indoor space—verify them on the current individual property listing before booking. Amenities differ by cabin and should not be assumed. \nA multi-night stay may be especially useful for this competition because participants are encouraged to explore the landscape rather than paint against a single-day deadline. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Art Competition Weekend Cabin\nChoose your competition phase first. A September painting trip\, October 3 Moonridge Paint-Out weekend\, and October 14-18 gallery trip have different schedules. \nComplete artist registration before traveling. Visit Big Bear specifically instructs participants to register online before arriving. \nAllow time for the Visitor Center. Substrates need to be stamped\, and current Visitor Center hours are 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. \nConsider more than one night. One of the main advantages of this competition is the ability to explore different Big Bear landscapes and work without a short painting deadline. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Solo artists and couples may prefer smaller accommodations\, while several artists traveling together can compare multi-bedroom rentals. \nVerify amenities directly. Parking\, kitchens\, pet policies\, and other property features vary across A Chalet’s inventory. \nRecheck event details before your trip. Gallery hours\, registration availability\, and individual festival-event instructions can change. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nArtists can create competition work from September 12 through October 10\, 2026. The main gallery period follows in mid-October\, with the awards ceremony scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nWhere Is the Plein Air Art Competition?\nPainting can take place across the Big Bear Valley. Substrate stamping and artwork drop-off are handled through the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, while the main Competition Gallery is held at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nDo Artists Need to Register?\nYes. Visit Big Bear directs artists to complete online registration before arriving. The 2026 competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhat Are the 2026 Plein Air Competition Prizes?\nThe main competition awards are currently listed as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. Separate $500 Best of Show prizes are also listed for certain festival galleries.  \nCan the Public Visit the Galleries?\nYes. Visit Big Bear invites the public\, art enthusiasts\, and collectors to attend the galleries. Artwork is expected to be available for purchase.  \nWhen Is the Awards Ceremony?\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhere Should I Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is practical because the competition is centered throughout the Big Bear Valley and key administrative and gallery locations are in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers cabins of several sizes in the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability. \nPlan Your Plein Air Art Competition 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 gives painters something many competitions do not: time. From September 12 through October 10\, registered artists can explore Big Bear\, choose their landscape\, paint\, return to refine their work\, and participate in an expanded schedule of festival events.  \nThe 2026 festival includes the Artist’s Best Work gallery on September 18-19\, The Village Paint-Out on September 19\, the Moonridge Paint-Out on October 3\, the Moonridge gallery on October 4\, and the main Competition Gallery and awards activities in mid-October. The awards ceremony is set for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nArtists should register online before arriving\, visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center to have substrates stamped\, and verify the latest competition instructions before beginning their work. \nFor a trip built around several painting sessions—or a separate return visit for the gallery and awards—an overnight cabin gives you a comfortable base in the Big Bear Valley instead of forcing the creative process into a single day. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the Plein Air Art Competition 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/plein-air-art-competition-4/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260914T090000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260914T120000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215629Z
CREATED:20261016T215629Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215629Z
UID:13963-1789376400-1789387200@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Landscape Painting Classes
DESCRIPTION:Landscape Painting Classes 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nLandscape Painting Classes 2026 are Monday morning art sessions at Miller Park in Fawnskin\, on the north side of Big Bear Lake. Classes run from 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM and welcome oil\, acrylic\, and watercolor painters. All skill levels are welcome\, although the published event information notes that some previous painting or art-class experience can be helpful. \nThe 2026 series is scheduled on Mondays through September 28\, 2026. As of September 10\, the remaining published classes are September 14\, September 21\, and September 28. The official event listing identifies Miller Park at 1178 Chickasaw\, Fawnskin\, CA 92333 as the venue and says parking is available at the park. ?cite?turn0search0?turn0search9? \nInstructor Marilyn begins sessions with instruction on painting techniques and follows with a demonstration using a reference photo. The classes also introduce basic plein air painting skills. Participants bring their own painting supplies and may register online or contact Big Bear Valley Recreation & Parks District at 909-866-9700. ?cite?turn0search0? \nFor visitors traveling to the mountains specifically for a class\, staying Sunday night can make the 9:00 AM Monday start more enjoyable. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, providing a local base for a creative weekend before the Monday morning session. ?cite?turn1search0? \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for a Big Bear painting getaway. \nLandscape Painting Classes 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nLandscape Painting Classes\n\n\n2026 season\nMondays through September 28\, 2026\n\n\nRemaining published dates\nSeptember 14\, September 21\, and September 28\n\n\nTime\n9:00 AM-12:00 PM\n\n\nVenue\nMiller Park\n\n\nAddress\n1178 Chickasaw\, Fawnskin\, CA 92333\n\n\nInstructor\nMarilyn\n\n\nSkill level\nAll skill levels welcome; some previous painting or art-class experience may be helpful\n\n\nMedia\nOil\, acrylic\, and watercolor\n\n\nClass content\nPainting techniques\, demonstration painting\, and basic plein air painting skills\n\n\nSupplies\nParticipants bring their own painting materials\n\n\nParking\nAvailable at Miller Park\n\n\nOrganizer/contact\nBig Bear Valley Recreation & Parks District\n\n\nPhone\n909-866-9700\n\n\nAdmission\nConfirm current registration fee with the Recreation & Parks District\n\n\nEvent information\nVisit Big Bear Landscape Painting Classes\n\n\n\nWhat Are the Landscape Painting Classes?\nThe Landscape Painting Classes are recurring three-hour art sessions designed to help participants develop landscape-painting techniques in a mountain setting. The classes take place at Miller Park in Fawnskin and are taught by an instructor identified in the event information as Marilyn\, who paints primarily with oils. \nThe format combines instruction with demonstration. Each session begins with a short lesson on painting techniques\, supported by a handout and potentially a presentation or video. Marilyn then demonstrates a painting using a reference photograph and teaches fundamental plein air painting skills. ?cite?turn0search0? \nThe classes are not restricted to oil painters. Oil\, acrylic\, and watercolor painters are welcome\, giving participants flexibility to work in the medium they already know or prefer. ?cite?turn0search0? \nThe event welcomes all skill levels. Complete newcomers should note\, however\, that the organizer says previous painting or art-class experience can be helpful. That makes the sessions particularly appealing to hobby artists who already understand some basic materials but want more guidance with landscapes and plein air techniques. \nWhen and Where Are the Landscape Painting Classes?\nThe 2026 Landscape Painting Classes are scheduled on Mondays from 9:00 AM until 12:00 PM at Miller Park. \nThe published season runs through September 28\, 2026. With September 7 now past\, the remaining classes on the current Visit Big Bear calendar are: \n\nMonday\, September 14\, 2026 — 9:00 AM-12:00 PM\nMonday\, September 21\, 2026 — 9:00 AM-12:00 PM\nMonday\, September 28\, 2026 — 9:00 AM-12:00 PM\n\nVisit Big Bear’s live event calendar confirms the September 14\, September 21\, and September 28 occurrences. ?cite?turn0search9?turn0search11? \nThe venue is: \nMiller Park\n1178 Chickasaw\nFawnskin\, CA 92333 \nSan Bernardino County’s official Miller Park venue page independently confirms the 1178 Chickasaw address and lists Landscape Paint programming at the park. ?cite?turn1search3? \nWhat Can Visitors Expect in a Landscape Painting Class?\nThis is a structured art class rather than simply an informal gathering of painters. The published format includes instruction\, demonstration\, and practical painting work. \nParticipants can expect the session to begin with a short lesson about painting techniques. The instructor may use printed materials\, a presentation\, or video to support the lesson. A demonstration painting based on a reference photograph follows\, allowing students to observe how the instructor approaches the subject. ?cite?turn0search0? \nThe class also introduces basic plein air painting skills. Plein air painting refers to working directly from the outdoor landscape rather than exclusively from photographs or inside a studio. \nThat connection makes Fawnskin a fitting setting for the program. The north shore of Big Bear Lake places participants in a mountain community surrounded by forest\, lake\, and changing seasonal scenery—useful inspiration for anyone interested in landscape art. \nThe exact subject or painting completed during a particular Monday session is not published in advance\, so participants should not assume every class follows an identical project. \nWhat Painting Supplies Should You Bring?\nParticipants are expected to bring their own painting materials. The published supply list is fairly detailed\, so preparing before traveling to Big Bear is important. \n\nA table easel\nAn 8×10\, 9×12\, 11×14\, or 12×16 stretched canvas or board panel\, or 140-pound watercolor paper\nOil\, acrylic\, or watercolor paints\nOdorless solvent such as Gamsol if working in oils\nWarm and cool red\nWarm and cool blue\nWarm and cool yellow\nWhite and black\nA basic set of flat or filbert brushes\, including sizes #2\, #4\, #6\, #8\, and #10\nA palette\nSketching paper or a sketchbook for thumbnail sketches\nA reference photograph of something you would like to paint\nDrawing pencils and an eraser\nGloves and an apron\nPaper towels\n\nThe organizer notes that additional paint colors and brushes are fine if you prefer to use them. Marilyn favors Masterson palettes\, but participants may use their preferred palette. ?cite?turn0search0? \nOil painters should pay particular attention to the solvent instruction: the published materials list specifies odorless solvent. \nDo You Need Painting Experience?\nNo specific minimum skill level is published. The classes welcome all levels of skill. \nHowever\, the organizer adds that some previous painting or art classes would be helpful. That distinction is useful when deciding whether the class fits your experience. \nA first-time painter is not expressly excluded\, but someone who already knows how to handle brushes\, mix basic colors\, and set up their chosen medium may find it easier to focus on the landscape techniques being taught. \nIf you are completely new to painting and unsure whether the class is appropriate\, contact Big Bear Valley Recreation & Parks District at 909-866-9700 before registering. \nRegistration\, Cost\, and Class Information\nThe event information says participants may sign up online or contact Big Bear Valley Recreation & Parks District. ?cite?turn0search0? \nA reliable current class fee is not published on the Visit Big Bear page reviewed for this guide\, so no price is stated here. Contact the Recreation & Parks District for the current registration cost\, availability\, and any cancellation or age policies that apply to your chosen date. \nThis is especially important if you are planning an overnight trip around the class. Confirm your class registration before making the Monday session the centerpiece of your itinerary. \nParking and Getting to Miller Park\nThe official event listing states that parking is available at Miller Park. ?cite?turn0search0? \nMiller Park is located at 1178 Chickasaw in Fawnskin\, on the north side of the Big Bear Valley. San Bernardino County’s venue listing confirms the same address. ?cite?turn1search3? \nBecause class begins at 9:00 AM\, allow enough time to park and carry your supplies to the class area before instruction starts. Painting equipment can take longer to unload and organize than gear for a typical indoor activity. \nCheck mountain road and weather conditions before departure\, particularly if you are traveling into Big Bear on Monday morning. \nWhat Else Should You Bring for a Mountain Painting Morning?\nIn addition to the required art supplies\, a few practical items can make the morning more comfortable: \n\nWater\nWeather-appropriate layers\nSun protection if part of the session is outdoors\nA bag or container that keeps brushes and supplies organized\nProtection for transporting a wet oil or acrylic painting\nA cloth or additional paper towels for cleanup\nYour registration information\n\nBecause the class teaches plein air fundamentals\, prepare for the possibility of spending time in outdoor conditions. Mountain weather can change during a three-hour morning session. \nIf you work in oils\, also think ahead about transporting a wet painting back to your cabin or vehicle without damaging it. \nHow to Make a Creative Weekend of the Landscape Painting Classes\nSaturday: Arrive and Find Inspiration\nTurn the Monday class into a longer Big Bear art getaway by arriving over the weekend. Spend Saturday settling into your cabin and exploring the valley at an unhurried pace. \nIf you are bringing a reference photograph for class\, the weekend can also give you time to think about the type of landscape you want to paint. \nSunday: Explore Big Bear’s Scenery\nUse Sunday for a relaxed scenic day rather than filling every hour with activities. The Big Bear Valley offers lake\, forest\, mountain\, and village environments that can help put you in a creative mindset before Monday’s class. \nSeptember 2026 is also the creation period for Big Bear’s third annual Plein Air Art Competition\, which runs from September 12 through October 10. Artists participating in that separate competition can potentially build a broader art-focused trip around the valley\, although its registration and submission requirements are separate from the Miller Park class. \nReturn to your cabin Sunday evening and organize your easel\, paints\, brushes\, canvas or paper\, reference image\, and other supplies so you are ready to leave Monday morning. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for a creative Big Bear weekend. \nMonday: Paint at Miller Park\nHave breakfast early and head toward Fawnskin with enough time to park and unload your materials before the 9:00 AM class. \nThe session runs until noon. Afterward\, carefully pack your artwork—especially if it is still wet—and consider having lunch or spending additional time around Big Bear before leaving the mountains. \nFor travelers who do not need to return home Monday afternoon\, an additional night can remove the pressure to pack up a cabin\, attend a three-hour painting class\, and immediately begin a long drive on the same day. \nWhere to Stay for Landscape Painting Classes\nThe class itself is in Fawnskin. A Chalet’s current destination collection focuses on Big Bear Lake\, Big Bear City\, and Lake Arrowhead. For a Miller Park class\, Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City are the relevant choices because they keep you within the broader Big Bear Valley. ?cite?turn1search0? \nCouples and solo artists can consider smaller A Chalet properties\, while friends attending together may prefer a two- or three-bedroom cabin with more shared space. \nCurrent A Chalet featured listings include Bear Den with one bedroom and one bath; Heavenly Bay Retreat and Maverick’s Cabin with two bedrooms and two baths; Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms and two baths; and larger four-bedroom options including Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape. ?cite?turn1search0? \nFor example\, Maverick’s Cabin is currently listed in Big Bear City with two bedrooms and two bathrooms. Its current property page lists a refrigerator\, microwave\, washer\, dryer\, Wi-Fi\, and other amenities. ?cite?turn1search4? \nA cabin can be particularly practical for an art weekend because it gives you a place to organize supplies\, prepare breakfast before class\, and relax after several hours of concentrated painting. \nDo not assume every cabin has the same workspace\, parking\, or amenities. Review the live property listing before reserving\, especially if you are bringing bulky art equipment. \nCheck current A Chalet availability for your Landscape Painting Classes trip. \nTips for Booking a Landscape Painting Weekend Cabin\nConfirm your class first. The remaining published dates are September 14\, September 21\, and September 28\, but registration availability should be verified with Big Bear Valley Recreation & Parks District. \nConsider arriving Sunday at the latest. Staying locally avoids combining a mountain drive with unloading art supplies before a 9:00 AM class. \nPack from the official materials list. This is not a class where you should assume paints\, canvases\, brushes\, or easels will be supplied. \nPlan for wet artwork. Bring an appropriate way to transport your finished piece without damaging your vehicle or cabin. \nChoose your cabin based on your group. A solo artist may need very little space\, while several painters traveling together may value separate bedrooms and room to organize supplies. \nVerify property rules before using art materials indoors. Avoid painting\, cleaning brushes\, or using solvents inside a vacation rental unless the property rules clearly permit what you plan to do. Protect the cabin and handle art materials responsibly. \nLeave some unscheduled time. A creative mountain trip works well when you have time to observe the landscape instead of rushing from one activity to another. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Are the Landscape Painting Classes in Big Bear in 2026?\nThe classes are held on Mondays from 9:00 AM to noon through September 28. As of September 10\, the remaining published sessions are September 14\, September 21\, and September 28\, 2026. ?cite?turn0search0?turn0search11? \nWhere Are the Landscape Painting Classes?\nClasses take place at Miller Park\, 1178 Chickasaw\, Fawnskin\, CA 92333. Parking is available at the park. ?cite?turn0search0?turn1search3? \nDo I Need Painting Experience?\nAll skill levels are welcome\, although the organizer says some prior painting or art-class experience may be helpful. \nCan I Use Watercolor or Acrylic Paint?\nYes. The class welcomes oil\, acrylic\, and watercolor painters. Instructor Marilyn works in oils\, but participants do not have to use the same medium. ?cite?turn0search0? \nDo I Need to Bring My Own Art Supplies?\nYes. The published materials list asks participants to bring an easel\, painting surface\, paints\, brushes\, palette\, sketching materials\, reference photograph\, pencils\, eraser\, gloves\, apron\, paper towels\, and other supplies appropriate to their medium. ?cite?turn0search0? \nHow Do I Register?\nThe event information says participants may sign up online or contact Big Bear Valley Recreation & Parks District at 909-866-9700. Confirm the current fee and availability when registering. ?cite?turn0search0? \nWhere Should I Stay for the Landscape Painting Classes?\nBig Bear Lake and Big Bear City are the most relevant A Chalet destinations for a class at Miller Park in Fawnskin. Staying Sunday night gives you a local base before the 9:00 AM Monday session and avoids starting your painting day with a long drive into the mountains. ?cite?turn1search0? \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear art getaway. \nPlan Your Landscape Painting Classes 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nLandscape Painting Classes Big Bear 2026 offer artists a relaxed Monday morning devoted to technique\, demonstration\, and the fundamentals of plein air painting. The three-hour sessions at Miller Park welcome oil\, acrylic\, and watercolor painters and are suitable for a range of experience levels. \nAs of September 10\, three classes remain on the published calendar: September 14\, September 21\, and September 28\, each from 9:00 AM to noon. Bring your own easel\, painting surface\, paints\, brushes\, palette\, reference photograph\, and other required materials\, and confirm registration with Big Bear Valley Recreation & Parks District before making the trip. ?cite?turn0search0?turn0search11? \nFor visitors coming from outside the mountains\, an overnight stay can turn a Monday art class into a more complete creative escape. Arrive over the weekend\, explore the Big Bear Valley for inspiration\, organize your painting supplies Sunday evening\, and wake up locally for the morning session in Fawnskin. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Landscape Painting Classes 2026 getaway.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/landscape-painting-classes-5/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215622Z
CREATED:20261016T215622Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215622Z
UID:13404-1789430400-1789430400@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Plein Air Art Competition
DESCRIPTION:Plein Air Art Competition 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 is Visit Big Bear’s third annual plein air competition and a month-long celebration of outdoor painting across the Big Bear Valley. Artists can create their competition work between September 12 and October 10\, 2026\, with gallery events beginning in September and the main Competition Gallery and awards scheduled for October. \nRegistered artists first complete online registration\, then visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard to have their painting substrates stamped. The Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. Artists may have multiple substrates stamped\, but the competition information says there is one submission per artist for galleries.  \nThe main submitted works will be displayed at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake. Visit Big Bear lists the principal competition awards as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. The awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nThis event is particularly well suited to an overnight or multi-night Big Bear trip because artists are intentionally given time to explore the valley\, choose landscapes\, return to locations\, and continue developing their work. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City that can serve as a base between painting sessions\, gallery visits\, and other fall activities.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear art trip. \nPlein Air Art Competition 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nBig Bear Plein Air Art Competition & Festival of Artist Events\n\n\nOrganizer\nVisit Big Bear\n\n\nCompetition year\n2026 — 3rd annual event\n\n\nCreate period\nSeptember 12-October 10\, 2026\n\n\nArtist registration\nOnline registration required before arrival\n\n\nMaximum artists\n75 participants\n\n\nSubstrate stamping\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n\n\nVisitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nVisitor Center hours\nDaily\, 9:00 AM-5:00 PM\n\n\nCompetition Gallery\nDestination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\n\n\nMain gallery period\nOctober 14-18\, 2026\n\n\nAwards ceremony\nOctober 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM\n\n\nMain awards\n1st: $2\,000; 2nd: $1\,500; 3rd: $500\n\n\nPublic gallery access\nPublic invited; artwork available for purchase\n\n\nParking\nNo single competition-wide parking plan is published; follow instructions and posted rules at each location\n\n\nOfficial website\nVisit Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear confirms the September 12-October 10 creation period and lists every day in that period as part of the recurring competition calendar.  \nWhat Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition?\nThe Plein Air Art Competition invites artists to create landscapes outdoors in the Big Bear Valley\, working directly from the scenery rather than solely from photographs or studio references. \nWhat distinguishes the Big Bear format is its extended creation period. Artists do not have to arrive on one morning and complete their work under a short time limit. Visit Big Bear gives participants from September 12 through October 10 to explore\, select a location\, paint\, and potentially return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nThat format encourages artists to experience the valley during early fall\, when the character of the landscape can change with light\, weather\, and seasonal conditions. Participants choose their own Big Bear landscape subject rather than being assigned one specific painting location for the main competition. \nFor 2026\, Visit Big Bear has expanded the program with a Festival of Artist Events. Registration in the main competition includes access to the highlighted festival activities\, and artists may choose to participate in one or several. The competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhen Is the Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nThe competition is not a single-day event. Instead\, it unfolds across several phases. \nSeptember 12-October 10: Create\nArtists may visit Big Bear at any point during this period to create their competition work. Before arriving\, participants are instructed to complete online registration. \nAfter reaching Big Bear\, artists must stop at the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center\, 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, to have their painting substrates stamped. Visit Big Bear says artists can have as many substrates stamped as they wish. Completed competition artwork is then returned to the Visitor Center for storage before the gallery opens.  \nOctober 14-18: Competition Gallery\nVisit Big Bear’s dedicated competition page identifies the main gallery and awards period as October 14-18. The event calendar separately shows the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition Gallery running during this same mid-October period at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nThe public is invited to view the competition artwork\, and Visit Big Bear states that artwork at the galleries will be available for purchase.  \nOctober 18: Awards Ceremony\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for Sunday\, October 18 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhat Special Artist Events Are Part of the 2026 Festival?\nThe expanded 2026 Festival of Artist Events adds several opportunities beyond the main competition. \nArtist’s Best Work en Plein Air Gallery — September 18-19\nThis gallery gives participating artists another chance to exhibit and sell plein air work. Visit Big Bear lists a $500 Best of Show award for this portion of the festival.  \nThe Village Paint-Out — September 19\nA dedicated Paint-Out is scheduled in The Village Big Bear Lake on September 19. This provides a more concentrated event within the broader month-long competition period.  \nMoonridge Corridor Paint-Out — October 3\nAnother Paint-Out takes place in the Moonridge Corridor on October 3\, followed by a gallery on October 4. Visit Big Bear lists a separate $500 Best of Show award for this event.  \nMain Competition Gallery and Awards — October 14-18\nThe main competition concludes with the complete collection of submitted works and the awards ceremony. The principal prizes currently published are: \n\nFirst Place: $2\,000\nSecond Place: $1\,500\nThird Place: $500\n\nVisit Big Bear lists John Budicin\, Diane Moore\, and Lisa Mozzini-McDill as distinguished judges associated with the 2026 competition.  \nHow Do Artists Register and Submit Their Work?\nArtists should begin at the official Visit Big Bear Plein Air Competition page and complete the linked registration before traveling to Big Bear. \nThe currently published process is: \n\nComplete registration online before arriving.\nVisit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center during operating hours.\nHave the painting substrates you may use stamped.\nExplore Big Bear and create the work during the September 12-October 10 competition period.\nReturn the completed competition painting to the Visitor Center.\nSubmitted artwork is stored until the Competition Gallery opens.\n\nVisit Big Bear states that the 2026 competition has a maximum of 75 participating artists and allows one submission per artist for the galleries.  \nThe public page reviewed for this guide does not display a clearly stated universal competition registration price in its main event information. Artists should check the live registration form for the current fee and full participation terms rather than relying on a prior year’s price. \nWhere Are the Visitor Center and Competition Gallery?\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM and is the location where artists get substrates stamped and return completed competition paintings.  \nDestination Big Bear Event Room\n713 Stocker Rd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA \nThis is the published location for the Competition Gallery\, the October 18 awards ceremony\, and the public pop-up galleries associated with the festival.  \nNo single parking plan covering every competition location is published. Artists and gallery visitors should follow event instructions and posted parking regulations at the Visitor Center\, The Village\, Moonridge\, and the Destination Big Bear Event Room. \nCan Non-Artists Attend the Plein Air Events?\nYes. The competition is not only for participating painters. \nVisit Big Bear specifically invites art enthusiasts\, collectors\, and members of the community to attend the pop-up galleries and view the complete collection of 2026 competition artwork. Artwork will also be available for purchase.  \nThat makes the October gallery period a good option for visitors who enjoy art but do not plan to enter the competition themselves. \nA public admission charge for the galleries is not stated on the current competition page. Visitors should check the individual gallery listing closer to their chosen date if admission\, opening hours\, or purchasing procedures are important to their plans. \nWhat Should Artists Bring?\nVisit Big Bear does not publish one universal equipment list because plein air painters work with different media and setups. Participants should therefore prepare according to their own painting method and the outdoor mountain environment. \nA practical artist packing list may include: \n\nYour preferred paints\, brushes\, and painting tools\nMultiple eligible substrates to have stamped at the Visitor Center\nPortable easel or pochade setup\nWater or appropriate painting medium\nSun protection\nWeather-appropriate layers\nWater and snacks\nProtective equipment for transporting wet artwork\nAny personal medications or necessities\n\nBecause artists choose their own locations around Big Bear\, conditions can vary significantly between lakefront areas\, forested locations\, The Village\, and higher-elevation viewpoints. Check the forecast and current access conditions before setting up outdoors. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Plein Air Art Competition\nDay 1: Arrive\, Register\, and Scout Locations\nComplete online registration before leaving home. After arriving in Big Bear\, check into your cabin and visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center between 9:00 AM and 5:00 PM to get your substrates stamped. \nInstead of immediately committing to the first landscape you see\, use part of the afternoon to explore Big Bear Valley and observe how light falls across different areas. \nDay 2: Paint en Plein Air\nStart early enough to work during the light conditions you want to capture. Because the competition gives artists nearly a month to create\, there is no need to treat the trip like a speed-painting contest unless you’re participating in a specific Paint-Out. \nReturning to a cabin between sessions can be useful for organizing supplies\, resting\, eating\, and preparing for another painting period. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for your Plein Air Competition dates. \nReturn for the Gallery or Awards\nArtists do not have to treat the September-October creation period and October gallery as a single continuous stay. Visit Big Bear explicitly allows artists to visit once or return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nYou might therefore plan one trip for painting and another for the Competition Gallery and October 18 awards ceremony. \nWhere to Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition\nBecause the competition spans the Big Bear Valley and important event locations are in Big Bear Lake\, staying in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City makes practical sense. \nA Chalet currently offers cabins in both destinations\, with properties ranging from smaller two-bedroom stays to larger three- and four-bedroom rentals. Current examples shown in A Chalet’s collection include Heavenly Bay Retreat and Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms\, and Boulder Landing and Rustic Ridge with four bedrooms.  \nFor an artist traveling alone or with a partner\, a smaller cabin can provide a straightforward base between painting sessions. Friends participating together may prefer additional bedrooms and common space for organizing the trip. \nIf you need particular features for an art-focused stay—such as parking capacity\, a kitchen\, laundry facilities\, pet permission\, or additional indoor space—verify them on the current individual property listing before booking. Amenities differ by cabin and should not be assumed. \nA multi-night stay may be especially useful for this competition because participants are encouraged to explore the landscape rather than paint against a single-day deadline. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Art Competition Weekend Cabin\nChoose your competition phase first. A September painting trip\, October 3 Moonridge Paint-Out weekend\, and October 14-18 gallery trip have different schedules. \nComplete artist registration before traveling. Visit Big Bear specifically instructs participants to register online before arriving. \nAllow time for the Visitor Center. Substrates need to be stamped\, and current Visitor Center hours are 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. \nConsider more than one night. One of the main advantages of this competition is the ability to explore different Big Bear landscapes and work without a short painting deadline. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Solo artists and couples may prefer smaller accommodations\, while several artists traveling together can compare multi-bedroom rentals. \nVerify amenities directly. Parking\, kitchens\, pet policies\, and other property features vary across A Chalet’s inventory. \nRecheck event details before your trip. Gallery hours\, registration availability\, and individual festival-event instructions can change. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nArtists can create competition work from September 12 through October 10\, 2026. The main gallery period follows in mid-October\, with the awards ceremony scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nWhere Is the Plein Air Art Competition?\nPainting can take place across the Big Bear Valley. Substrate stamping and artwork drop-off are handled through the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, while the main Competition Gallery is held at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nDo Artists Need to Register?\nYes. Visit Big Bear directs artists to complete online registration before arriving. The 2026 competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhat Are the 2026 Plein Air Competition Prizes?\nThe main competition awards are currently listed as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. Separate $500 Best of Show prizes are also listed for certain festival galleries.  \nCan the Public Visit the Galleries?\nYes. Visit Big Bear invites the public\, art enthusiasts\, and collectors to attend the galleries. Artwork is expected to be available for purchase.  \nWhen Is the Awards Ceremony?\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhere Should I Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is practical because the competition is centered throughout the Big Bear Valley and key administrative and gallery locations are in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers cabins of several sizes in the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability. \nPlan Your Plein Air Art Competition 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 gives painters something many competitions do not: time. From September 12 through October 10\, registered artists can explore Big Bear\, choose their landscape\, paint\, return to refine their work\, and participate in an expanded schedule of festival events.  \nThe 2026 festival includes the Artist’s Best Work gallery on September 18-19\, The Village Paint-Out on September 19\, the Moonridge Paint-Out on October 3\, the Moonridge gallery on October 4\, and the main Competition Gallery and awards activities in mid-October. The awards ceremony is set for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nArtists should register online before arriving\, visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center to have substrates stamped\, and verify the latest competition instructions before beginning their work. \nFor a trip built around several painting sessions—or a separate return visit for the gallery and awards—an overnight cabin gives you a comfortable base in the Big Bear Valley instead of forcing the creative process into a single day. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the Plein Air Art Competition 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/plein-air-art-competition-5/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T083000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T130000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215632Z
CREATED:20261016T215632Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215632Z
UID:13965-1789461000-1789477200@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Big Bear Farmers Market
DESCRIPTION:Big Bear Farmers Market 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nThe Big Bear Farmers Market 2026 is an outdoor Tuesday market held at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center\, 42900 Big Bear Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. The market runs every Tuesday from 8:30 AM to 1:00 PM from April through September. \nCurrent 2026 event listings show the season ending on Tuesday\, September 22. As of September 10\, the remaining scheduled market dates are September 15 and September 22\, 2026. \nVisitors can shop for fresh fruits and vegetables\, flowers\, handmade goods\, arts and crafts\, health products\, collectibles\, prepared food\, and other items from local farmers\, makers\, and small businesses. The organizer also describes the Big Bear market as a community tradition that has been operating for more than 30 years. \nThe market is entirely outdoors and current Visit Big Bear guidance describes it as pet-friendly for leashed pets. Parking is available at the Convention Center\, although Visit Big Bear notes that parking can be limited and recommends considering a trolley or ride service when practical. \nFor travelers spending several days in the mountains\, the farmers market is an easy addition to a cabin stay. A Chalet offers vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, giving guests a kitchen where fresh market produce\, baked goods\, and other finds can become part of breakfast\, lunch\, or dinner back at the cabin. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear Farmers Market visit. \nBig Bear Farmers Market 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nBig Bear Farmers Market\n\n\nSchedule\nTuesdays\, April through September 2026\n\n\n2026 season end\nTuesday\, September 22\, 2026\n\n\nRemaining dates as of September 10\nSeptember 15 and September 22\n\n\nHours\n8:30 AM-1:00 PM\n\n\nLocation\nBig Bear Lake Convention Center\n\n\nAddress\n42900 Big Bear Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nFormat\nOutdoor farmers market\n\n\nTypical offerings\nFresh produce\, flowers\, handmade goods\, arts and crafts\, health products\, collectibles\, food\, and small-business products\n\n\nPets\nCurrent Visit Big Bear guidance says leashed pets are welcome at the outdoor market\n\n\nParking\nAvailable at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center; spaces may be limited\n\n\nPhone\n909-585-3000\n\n\nOrganizer website\nHigh Desert Farmers Market\n\n\nOfficial tourism listing\nVisit Big Bear Farmers Market\n\n\n\nWhat Is the Big Bear Farmers Market?\nThe Big Bear Farmers Market is a seasonal outdoor market where farmers\, food vendors\, artists\, makers\, and other small businesses gather at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center on Tuesday mornings. \nThe market is operated by High Desert Farmers Market\, an organization that traces its farmers market operations to 1992. Its stated goal is to create a welcoming community atmosphere while providing access to farm-direct produce and locally made goods. \nIn Big Bear\, the result is a market that blends traditional farmers market shopping with a broader selection of handmade and specialty products. Visitors may come for produce and leave with baked goods\, crafts\, flowers\, food\, or an unexpected find from one of the participating small businesses. \nThat variety makes the market useful for both local residents and travelers. Cabin guests can stock up on fresh ingredients\, while visitors who do not plan to cook can still browse prepared foods\, crafts\, and other market products. \nWhen Is the Big Bear Farmers Market in 2026?\nThe organizer lists the Big Bear Farmers Market every Tuesday from April through September\, from 8:30 AM to 1:00 PM. \nVisit Big Bear’s current 2026 event calendar provides the more specific seasonal endpoint of September 22\, 2026. \nAs of September 10\, the final two scheduled dates are: \n\nTuesday\, September 15\, 2026\nTuesday\, September 22\, 2026\n\nThis is important because the general event description says only “April through September\,” which could make travelers assume the market continues through the final Tuesday of the month. The live Visit Big Bear calendar currently ends the 2026 series on September 22. \nIf you are planning specifically around the final market day\, check the current event page before traveling in case organizers make a late-season change. \nWhere Is the Big Bear Farmers Market?\nThe market takes place at: \nBig Bear Lake Convention Center\n42900 Big Bear Blvd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe Convention Center is a year-round event venue in the Big Bear Valley and is also home to Wyatt’s Grill and Saloon. \nAlthough the venue is called the Big Bear Lake Convention Center\, the farmers market itself is held outdoors. \nThat means visitors should plan for the day’s actual mountain weather rather than assuming the shopping area will be climate-controlled. \nWhat Can You Buy at the Big Bear Farmers Market?\nThe market offers more than produce. Current organizer and tourism information describes a mix of agricultural products\, food\, crafts\, and specialty merchandise. \nDepending on the vendors attending a particular Tuesday\, visitors may find: \n\nFresh fruits\nFresh vegetables\nFlowers\nFresh coffee\nPrepared food and food-truck offerings\nHandmade goods\nArts and crafts\nHealth-related products\nCollectibles\nLocally made specialty items\nProducts from small businesses and makers\n\nVendor participation and product availability can vary from week to week. Seasonal produce can also change during the course of the market season. \nIf you are visiting for one specific product\, do not assume a particular farmer\, baker\, artisan\, or food vendor will be present unless the organizer confirms it for that date. \nIs This the Same as the Big Bear Lake Farmers Market at Ski Beach?\nNo. Big Bear has two similarly named farmers markets in 2026\, and it is easy to confuse them when planning a trip. \nThe Big Bear Farmers Market covered in this guide takes place: \n\nOn Tuesdays\nAt the Big Bear Lake Convention Center\nFrom 8:30 AM to 1:00 PM\nDuring the April-through-September season\n\nA separate Big Bear Lake Farmers Market operates at Ski Beach Park on Fridays during its own seasonal schedule. \nIf you are building a weekend or midweek itinerary\, double-check the market name\, weekday\, and venue before leaving your cabin. \nIs the Big Bear Farmers Market Pet-Friendly?\nYes. Current Visit Big Bear guidance states that the Bear Valley Farmers Market is entirely outdoors and pet-friendly\, with pets allowed to accompany visitors while on leash. \nThe tourism office also notes that some vendors may offer dog-related treats or products. \nPet owners should still use good market etiquette. Keep your dog leashed and close to you\, give food displays and other shoppers adequate space\, clean up after your pet\, and follow any instructions from vendors or event staff. \nIndividual vendors may also have practical reasons for keeping animals away from a particular display or service area\, so respect requests on site. \nDo You Need Tickets?\nNo ticket requirement or general admission price is currently published for shoppers attending the Big Bear Farmers Market. \nVisitors can plan to browse the market during its normal Tuesday operating hours and pay individual vendors directly for purchases. \nPayment methods may vary by vendor\, so carrying more than one option can be useful. Some sellers may accept cards or digital payments\, while others may prefer cash. \nIf you plan to use a particular benefits program or market incentive\, confirm availability with the organizer before relying on it because program participation can differ by location and season. \nParking and Transportation\nParking is available at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center. \nHowever\, Visit Big Bear specifically notes that parking spaces may be limited and encourages visitors to consider transportation services such as a local trolley or other ride options. \nThat is especially worth considering during busier summer Tuesdays or when several activities are taking place around the Convention Center. \nIf you drive\, arrive with enough flexibility to locate an appropriate space and follow posted signs. Do not park in an undesignated area simply to get closer to the market entrance. \nWhat Time Should You Visit?\nThe market runs from 8:30 AM to 1:00 PM\, and different arrival times suit different priorities. \nArrive closer to opening if your main goal is fresh produce or if you want the broadest possible selection before popular items sell out. \nVisit midmorning if you want a relaxed market stop after breakfast while still leaving plenty of time to browse. \nVisit closer to noon if the market is part of a broader morning itinerary\, but keep in mind that product selection may be different later in the session. \nThe organizer advertises the market as operating rain or shine\, but mountain weather can still affect how comfortable an outdoor visit feels. Check current conditions and dress accordingly. \nWhat Should You Bring?\n\nReusable shopping bags\nA tote\, basket\, or cooler for produce\nCash and a card or other payment option\nComfortable walking shoes\nSun protection\nWater\nA light layer for cooler mountain mornings\nA leash and pet supplies if bringing a dog\nA cooler or insulated bag if buying temperature-sensitive food\n\nIf you plan to spend several hours elsewhere in Big Bear after the market\, avoid leaving perishable food sitting in a hot vehicle. A cooler can make it easier to continue your sightseeing safely before returning to your cabin. \nWhy the Farmers Market Works Well With a Cabin Stay\nA farmers market is particularly useful when you are staying somewhere with a kitchen. \nInstead of treating every meal as a restaurant stop\, visitors can pick up fresh produce\, baked goods\, snacks\, flowers\, or other ingredients and bring them back to the cabin. \nA simple market breakfast or dinner can also become part of the trip itself. Fresh fruit can go with breakfast on the deck\, vegetables can be prepared for dinner\, and local treats can become snacks for the rest of the stay. \nFor families and groups\, that flexibility can make mornings easier and give everyone a break from coordinating restaurant plans for every meal. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins with space for your Big Bear market getaway. \nHow to Make a Midweek Getaway of the Big Bear Farmers Market\nMonday: Arrive in the Mountains\nCheck into your Big Bear cabin Monday afternoon or evening so you are already in the valley when the market opens Tuesday morning. \nHave a relaxed dinner\, review the weather forecast\, and bring reusable bags or a cooler into the cabin so they are ready for the morning. \nTuesday Morning: Shop the Farmers Market\nHead to the Convention Center after the market opens at 8:30 AM. \nBrowse produce first if fresh ingredients are your priority\, then make a second pass for crafts\, coffee\, food vendors\, handmade products\, and other market finds. \nIf you are shopping for dinner ingredients\, think about what your cabin kitchen already provides before buying items that require specialized equipment. \nTuesday Afternoon: Explore Big Bear\nAfter the market closes at 1:00 PM\, return purchases that need refrigeration to your cabin before continuing your day. \nThen choose an activity appropriate for the season and current conditions\, such as time by the lake\, a walk\, a scenic drive\, shopping\, or another local attraction. \nKeeping the afternoon flexible works well because a farmers market visit does not require an all-day commitment. \nTuesday Evening: Cook With Your Market Finds\nOne of the easiest ways to turn the market into part of the travel experience is to use what you bought for dinner. \nKeep the meal simple: fresh vegetables\, fruit\, bread\, prepared market food\, or another combination that fits your group and your rental’s verified kitchen setup. \nA night at the cabin also gives you time to enjoy the items you bought instead of transporting everything directly back down the mountain. \nWednesday: Enjoy a Slower Departure\nIf your schedule allows another night\, use Wednesday morning for breakfast and a final Big Bear activity before checkout. \nMidweek trips can be especially comfortable for visitors who want a quieter rhythm than a festival-heavy weekend itinerary. \nWhere to Stay for the Big Bear Farmers Market\nThe market is at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center on Big Bear Boulevard\, so Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City are both practical A Chalet destinations. \nOne current Big Bear City option is Maverick’s Cabin\, a two-bedroom\, two-bathroom property. Its current A Chalet listing verifies a refrigerator\, microwave\, washer and dryer\, Wi-Fi\, fireplaces\, hot tub\, barbecue\, and pet-friendly accommodations. \nFor visitors who want to stay in Big Bear Lake itself\, Conklin Canopy is currently listed with three bedrooms and two bathrooms and sleeps up to eight guests. Its verified amenities include a fully equipped kitchen\, washer and dryer\, game room\, Wi-Fi\, barbecue\, secure deck\, and parking for up to three vehicles. \nA kitchen is especially useful for this event because it allows guests to actually use fresh produce or other food purchased at the market rather than treating it only as a sightseeing stop. \nFor larger or smaller parties\, A Chalet’s current collection also includes one-\, two-\, three-\, and four-bedroom options across the Big Bear area. \nAlways review the current individual property page before booking to confirm occupancy\, amenities\, parking\, pet rules\, and availability. \nCheck current A Chalet availability for your Tuesday market trip. \nTips for Booking a Farmers Market Getaway\nStay Monday night. That makes the 8:30 AM Tuesday opening easy without requiring an early mountain drive. \nChoose a cabin with a verified kitchen if you plan to cook. Market produce is much more useful when your lodging setup matches your meal plans. \nBring a cooler. It helps protect food if you want to explore after shopping instead of immediately returning to your rental. \nCheck the final market date. The current 2026 calendar ends on September 22\, even though the organizer’s broader description says April through September. \nDo not confuse the Tuesday and Friday markets. The Tuesday Big Bear Farmers Market is at the Convention Center; the separate Friday Big Bear Lake Farmers Market is at Ski Beach Park. \nReview pet rules for both the market and your cabin. The market permits leashed pets according to current tourism guidance\, but individual vacation rentals have their own policies. \nLeave your itinerary flexible. The farmers market only occupies the morning\, so it pairs well with another Big Bear activity later in the day. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Big Bear Farmers Market 2026?\nThe market runs Tuesdays from April through September 2026\, from 8:30 AM to 1:00 PM. The current Visit Big Bear calendar lists September 22 as the final market date of the 2026 season. \nWhat Are the Remaining September 2026 Dates?\nAs of September 10\, the remaining scheduled dates are Tuesday\, September 15 and Tuesday\, September 22\, 2026. \nWhere Is the Big Bear Farmers Market?\nIt is held outdoors at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center\, 42900 Big Bear Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. \nWhat Can You Buy There?\nVisitors can browse fresh fruits and vegetables\, flowers\, handmade items\, arts and crafts\, health products\, collectibles\, coffee\, prepared food\, and other goods. The exact vendor mix changes by market day. \nIs the Big Bear Farmers Market Pet-Friendly?\nYes. Current Visit Big Bear information says the outdoor market is pet-friendly for leashed pets. \nIs Parking Available?\nYes. Parking is available at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center\, although Visit Big Bear notes that spaces can be limited and suggests considering local transportation services when appropriate. \nWhere Should I Stay for the Big Bear Farmers Market?\nAn A Chalet cabin in Big Bear Lake or Big Bear City is a practical choice. A cabin with a kitchen is especially useful if you plan to buy produce or other ingredients and prepare meals during your stay. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear Farmers Market getaway. \nPlan Your Big Bear Farmers Market 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Big Bear Farmers Market 2026 offers a relaxed way to experience the Big Bear Valley beyond its trails\, lake\, and major attractions. Every Tuesday morning during the season\, visitors can browse fresh produce\, flowers\, handmade goods\, food\, crafts\, and small-business products at the Big Bear Lake Convention Center. \nThe market runs from 8:30 AM to 1:00 PM\, with the current 2026 calendar ending on September 22. For September travelers\, that means the remaining scheduled opportunities are September 15 and September 22. \nBecause it is an outdoor\, pet-friendly market with food and handmade goods\, it works equally well as a quick morning stop or the centerpiece of a relaxed midweek visit. Staying overnight makes it even more useful: arrive Monday\, shop Tuesday morning\, bring your market finds back to the cabin\, and spend the rest of the day exploring the mountains. \nA Chalet offers Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City vacation rentals for couples\, families\, and groups\, including properties with verified kitchen facilities that can make fresh market ingredients part of the getaway. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear Farmers Market 2026 stay. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/big-bear-farmers-market-15/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T130000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T160000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215630Z
CREATED:20261016T215630Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215630Z
UID:13966-1789477200-1789488000@achalet.com
SUMMARY:High Alti-Tuesdays - Live Music and Specials
DESCRIPTION:High Alti-Tuesdays 2026: Dates\, Live Music\, Barrel 33 Specials\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays 2026 is a recurring Tuesday live-music event at Barrel 33\, 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. The recurring program features Brad from SilverMoon playing laid-back music and crowd favorites while guests enjoy Barrel 33’s food\, wine\, beer\, cider\, and Tuesday specials. \nBarrel 33’s current official website promotes High Alti-Tuesday live music from 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM. Visit Big Bear also lists the recurring event from 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM and currently shows Tuesday dates extending through the fall and winter season. \nThere is one schedule detail worth checking before you go: Visit Big Bear’s separate September live-music calendar lists Brad at 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM on several September Tuesdays\, while the dedicated High Alti-Tuesdays page and Barrel 33’s own recurring-event information use 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM. If hearing the entire set matters to you\, call Barrel 33 at 909-878-0838 before heading over. \nThe dedicated event listing also promotes a $20 pretzel and draft beer special. Because restaurant promotions can change\, confirm the special when ordering. \nFor travelers spending a few weekdays in the mountains\, High Alti-Tuesdays can be an easy addition to a Big Bear getaway. Stay in an A Chalet cabin\, spend the morning outdoors or exploring The Village\, catch the afternoon music at Barrel 33\, then return to your cabin for a relaxed evening. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for a midweek Big Bear getaway. \nHigh Alti-Tuesdays 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays – Live Music and Specials\n\n\nDay\nEvery Tuesday on currently scheduled event dates\n\n\nPublished recurring time\n1:00 PM-4:00 PM\n\n\nPerformer\nBrad from SilverMoon\n\n\nVenue\nBarrel 33\n\n\nAddress\n40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nCurrent Tuesday special\n$20 pretzel + draft beer special\, as promoted on the dedicated event listing\n\n\nVenue type\nWine\, beer\, cider\, food\, retail\, and live-music venue\n\n\nAdmission\nNo separate live-music admission charge is currently published\n\n\nParking\nUse available parking in and around The Village and follow current posted restrictions\n\n\nPhone\n909-878-0838\n\n\nOfficial venue\nBarrel 33 Big Bear\n\n\nEvent information\nVisit Big Bear High Alti-Tuesdays\n\n\n\nWhat Is High Alti-Tuesdays?\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays is Barrel 33’s recurring Tuesday afternoon live-music event in The Village at Big Bear Lake. \nThe concept is intentionally relaxed. Instead of a ticketed evening concert\, visitors can stop into Barrel 33 during the afternoon\, listen to live music\, order food or drinks\, and spend a few hours unwinding in the center of The Village. \nBrad from SilverMoon is the featured performer associated with the recurring Tuesday program. The event description characterizes the music as laid-back tunes and familiar\, good-time favorites\, fitting Barrel 33’s casual mountain atmosphere. \nThat makes High Alti-Tuesdays useful for visitors looking for something to do between daytime recreation and dinner. It can work as an après-ski stop in winter\, an afternoon break after hiking or shopping in warmer weather\, or simply the main activity on a slower midweek day. \nWhen Is High Alti-Tuesdays 2026?\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays takes place on Tuesdays\, with Barrel 33’s current website advertising the recurring live-music program from 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM. \nVisit Big Bear’s dedicated event page currently lists the series across the 2026-27 season\, with upcoming dates including: \n\nSeptember 15\, 2026\nSeptember 22\, 2026\nSeptember 29\, 2026\nOctober 6\, 2026\nOctober 13\, 2026\nOctober 20\, 2026\nOctober 27\, 2026\nNovember 3\, 2026\nNovember 10\, 2026\nNovember 17\, 2026\nNovember 24\, 2026\n\nThe recurring calendar continues beyond November\, so travelers visiting later in the winter should check the current event page rather than assuming the series has ended. \nThe structured export supplied for this event shifts the start date by a day\, but Tuesdays are the operative event days. For example\, September 15\, 2026 is a Tuesday. \nWhat Time Does the Live Music Start?\nThe dedicated High Alti-Tuesdays information says 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM. Barrel 33’s own current homepage also promotes “High alti-Tuesday” live music from 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM. \nHowever\, Visit Big Bear’s separate September live-music schedule lists Brad from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM on September 15\, September 22\, and September 29\, as well as October 6. \nThat means travelers should distinguish between the broader High Alti-Tuesday event window and the performer time published on the date-specific music calendar. \nIf you are simply stopping in for food\, drinks\, and atmosphere\, arriving during the broader afternoon window is reasonable. If Brad’s live set is the primary reason for your visit\, call 909-878-0838 to confirm the performance time for your specific Tuesday. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect at High Alti-Tuesdays?\nThe main draw is live music paired with Barrel 33’s regular food and beverage experience. \nVisitors can expect: \n\nLive Tuesday music featuring Brad from SilverMoon\nWine\, beer\, and cider options\nFood and shareable plates\nTuesday menu promotions\nThe currently promoted $20 pretzel and draft beer special\nA casual afternoon atmosphere in The Village\n\nBarrel 33 describes itself as a wine\, beer\, and eatery destination with rotating wine and draft selections\, food designed for sharing\, and recurring live music and community events. \nThe exact songs\, menu specials\, draft selection\, and food availability can change. Treat the event as a recurring experience rather than a fixed concert program with an identical set list and menu every week. \nWho Is Brad from SilverMoon?\nThe High Alti-Tuesdays listings identify the recurring performer as Brad from SilverMoon. \nCurrent event descriptions emphasize laid-back songs and crowd-friendly favorites rather than publishing a specific genre or set list. \nBrad also appears repeatedly on Barrel 33’s broader live-music calendar\, making him a regular part of the venue’s entertainment schedule. \nNo detailed official artist biography is currently published alongside the recurring event\, so visitors should avoid assuming a particular lineup\, genre mix\, or SilverMoon band configuration beyond the information Barrel 33 provides for the individual date. \nWhat Is the $20 Pretzel and Draft Beer Special?\nThe dedicated High Alti-Tuesdays event listing promotes a $20 Pretzel + Draft Beer Special. \nIt is one of the food-and-beverage offers designed to accompany the Tuesday live-music program. \nBecause restaurant menus\, beer selections\, serving sizes\, and promotions can change\, confirm the current offer with Barrel 33 when you order. The published promotion should not be interpreted as guaranteeing every draft beer or every menu variation at that price. \nVisitors who do not drink alcohol can still attend the live-music event and order from the venue’s other available food and beverage choices. \nIs High Alti-Tuesdays Free?\nNo separate ticket price or live-music cover charge is currently published for the recurring High Alti-Tuesdays program. \nGuests should plan to pay for whatever food and beverages they order. \nThis is different from a ticketed concert where admission buys access to a dedicated performance space. High Alti-Tuesdays operates as live entertainment within Barrel 33’s normal restaurant and beverage-service environment. \nIf a particular Tuesday becomes a special event or carries different conditions\, follow the current Barrel 33 event information for that date. \nWhere Is Barrel 33?\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays takes place at: \nBarrel 33\n40754 Village Dr.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n909-878-0838 \nThe venue is located in The Village\, Big Bear Lake’s walkable commercial district with restaurants\, shops\, entertainment\, and visitor services. \nThat location makes the event easy to combine with an afternoon of browsing The Village rather than driving from attraction to attraction. \nBarrel 33’s current published hours are 11:00 AM to 9:00 PM Sunday through Thursday and 11:00 AM to 10:00 PM Friday and Saturday\, so Tuesday’s live-music period falls comfortably within normal operating hours. \nWhere Should You Park?\nThe Village has public parking options\, and visitors should follow current signs\, posted time restrictions\, and any event-day directions. \nBecause Barrel 33 sits in a walkable commercial area\, you may not need to park immediately outside the venue. Parking once and exploring The Village on foot can be more convenient than moving your vehicle between nearby stops. \nAllow extra time during busy weekends\, holiday periods\, or winter recreation days when The Village may attract more visitors. \nNever use a private business lot unless signage indicates that parking is available for your visit. \nIs Barrel 33 Family-Friendly?\nBarrel 33’s current FAQ says the Big Bear location is family-friendly\, particularly earlier in the day. \nThat is relevant to High Alti-Tuesdays because the live music occurs during the afternoon rather than late at night. \nBarrel 33’s focus includes wine and craft beverages\, but the venue describes itself as a relaxed community space where families are welcome. \nAlcoholic drinks\, of course\, are limited to guests who meet legal age requirements. Families should also consider whether an afternoon restaurant and live-music environment suits their individual children. \nIs Barrel 33 Pet-Friendly?\nVisit Big Bear currently identifies Barrel 33 as a pet-friendly business and lists patio/outdoor seating among its amenities. \nIf you plan to bring a dog\, contact Barrel 33 before your visit to confirm where pets may sit and whether weather conditions affect patio availability. \nKeep dogs leashed and under control\, and remember that live music\, crowds\, food service\, and other dogs can make a restaurant environment stimulating for some pets. \nIf your dog is uncomfortable around music or busy dining spaces\, relaxing at a pet-friendly cabin may be a better option. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays is a casual restaurant event\, so you do not need specialized gear. A few practical items can still help: \n\nA light layer or jacket for changing mountain temperatures\nValid identification if ordering alcohol\nA payment method for food and drinks\nSunglasses or sun protection if sitting outside\nComfortable shoes if exploring The Village before or after\nA leash and pet supplies if bringing a dog to an approved pet-friendly area\n\nIf you are coming directly from hiking\, skiing\, or another outdoor activity\, consider changing into clean\, dry clothing before heading to the restaurant. \nHow to Make a Midweek Getaway of High Alti-Tuesdays\nMonday: Arrive in Big Bear\nFor visitors with flexible schedules\, arriving Monday gives you a full Tuesday in the mountains without an early morning drive. \nCheck into your A Chalet cabin\, unpack\, have dinner\, and settle into the slower pace of a weekday stay. \nTuesday Morning: Explore Big Bear\nUse the morning for an activity appropriate to the season. \nIn warmer weather\, that might mean a walk\, a lake-oriented outing\, or time exploring local shops. In winter\, your morning may center on snow recreation or simply enjoying the mountain scenery. \nKeep the schedule flexible enough that you are not racing from a demanding activity to Barrel 33. \nTuesday Afternoon: High Alti-Tuesdays\nHead to The Village before the music window and find appropriate parking. \nSpend the afternoon at Barrel 33 enjoying Brad from SilverMoon\, food\, and whatever Tuesday specials are currently available. \nIf hearing Brad’s full set is important\, confirm the date-specific start time because September’s separate music calendar currently lists a shorter 1:30 PM-3:30 PM performance window within the broader 1:00 PM-4:00 PM High Alti-Tuesday period. \nTuesday Evening: Relax at Your Cabin\nAfter the music\, take your time returning to your cabin rather than beginning a long drive down the mountain. \nA vacation rental gives you a comfortable place to make dinner\, play games\, watch a movie\, or simply unwind after an afternoon in The Village. \nIf anyone in your group consumes alcohol\, arrange safe transportation and never drive impaired. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for your Tuesday Big Bear getaway. \nWednesday: Enjoy a Slow Morning\nAn extra night lets you enjoy breakfast at the cabin and another piece of Big Bear before checking out. \nThis can be particularly appealing for travelers who normally visit on crowded weekends. A midweek trip offers a different rhythm and makes High Alti-Tuesdays the centerpiece of a short mountain break. \nWhere to Stay for High Alti-Tuesdays 2026\nBecause Barrel 33 is in The Village in Big Bear Lake\, an A Chalet property in Big Bear Lake is the most natural base for High Alti-Tuesdays. \nFor a smaller group\, Dream Lake Cabin is a verified Big Bear Lake option currently listed for up to four guests with two bedrooms and one bathroom. Its live booking information includes a kitchen\, Wi-Fi\, outdoor grill\, air conditioning\, and pet-friendly accommodations. \nFor a larger group\, Conklin Canopy is currently listed in Big Bear Lake with three bedrooms\, two bathrooms\, and space for up to eight guests. Verified amenities include a fully equipped kitchen\, washer and dryer\, Wi-Fi\, game room\, barbecue\, secure deck\, and parking for up to three vehicles. \nA cabin is particularly useful for a midweek music getaway because there is no need to structure the entire trip around restaurants. Have breakfast at the rental\, enjoy Big Bear during the morning\, visit Barrel 33 in the afternoon\, and return to your own shared space for the evening. \nAlways check the live property listing before booking to confirm current occupancy\, parking\, amenities\, pet rules\, and house policies. \nBrowse current A Chalet rentals for High Alti-Tuesdays. \nTips for Booking a High Alti-Tuesdays Cabin Getaway\nConsider Monday and Tuesday nights. That schedule gives you a full Tuesday without driving into or out of the mountains immediately around the event. \nChoose Big Bear Lake. Barrel 33 is in The Village\, so a Big Bear Lake cabin keeps your stay centered near the event. \nConfirm the music time. The recurring event window and date-specific September performance schedule currently differ slightly. \nCheck pet rules carefully. Barrel 33 is listed as pet-friendly\, and some A Chalet cabins accept pets\, but individual rental rules and fees vary. \nPlan transportation if drinking. A cabin stay does not eliminate the need for a safe ride between Barrel 33 and your rental. \nCheck current specials. The $20 pretzel and draft beer promotion is currently advertised\, but food-and-beverage offers can change. \nUse the weekday advantage. Rather than packing Tuesday with activities\, leave enough free time to enjoy the music and The Village at a relaxed pace. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is High Alti-Tuesdays 2026?\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays is a recurring Tuesday event at Barrel 33. The dedicated event information currently lists the program from 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM on scheduled Tuesdays. \nWhere Is High Alti-Tuesdays?\nThe event takes place at Barrel 33\, 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\, in The Village. \nWho Plays at High Alti-Tuesdays?\nThe recurring featured musician is Brad from SilverMoon\, with the event promoted around laid-back tunes and familiar favorites. \nIs High Alti-Tuesdays Free?\nNo separate admission or cover charge is currently published for the recurring live music. Guests pay for the food and beverages they order. \nWhat Is the Tuesday Special at Barrel 33?\nThe dedicated event listing currently advertises a $20 pretzel and draft beer special\, along with other menu and food-and-beverage deals. Confirm current availability when ordering. \nCan Families Attend High Alti-Tuesdays?\nBarrel 33’s current FAQ describes its Big Bear location as family-friendly\, especially earlier in the day. Alcohol is restricted to guests of legal drinking age. \nWhere Should I Stay for High Alti-Tuesdays?\nAn A Chalet cabin in Big Bear Lake provides a convenient home base for an afternoon at Barrel 33. An overnight stay lets you enjoy the event without building a same-day mountain drive around the live-music schedule. \nCheck A Chalet availability for your High Alti-Tuesday trip. \nPlan Your High Alti-Tuesdays 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nHigh Alti-Tuesdays 2026 is an easygoing way to add live music to a weekday in Big Bear Lake. Head to Barrel 33 in The Village for an afternoon featuring Brad from SilverMoon\, food and drinks\, and the venue’s Tuesday promotions. \nThe recurring program is advertised from 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM\, although some date-specific September listings currently show Brad performing from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM. Confirm the exact set time if the music is the main reason for your visit. \nPairing the event with an overnight cabin stay makes it easy to enjoy Big Bear at a slower pace. Arrive the day before\, explore Tuesday morning\, spend the afternoon at Barrel 33\, then return to your cabin instead of immediately driving home. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your High Alti-Tuesdays 2026 getaway. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/high-alti-tuesdays-live-music-and-specials-12/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T133000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T153000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215628Z
CREATED:20261016T215628Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215628Z
UID:13967-1789479000-1789486200@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Live Music at Barrel 33
DESCRIPTION:Live Music at Barrel 33 2026: September & October Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 brings acoustic afternoons and evening performances to Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake throughout September and into early October. The venue combines live music with its food\, craft beer\, and wine offerings at 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. Performance times vary by artist and date\, so checking the schedule before arriving is important.  \nAs of September 10\, the next confirmed performances begin with Matt & Emily on September 11 from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM\, followed by Local Legends on September 12. Additional September performers include Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, Matt & Emily\, and The Blackwells. Ryan Bieber is currently scheduled for October 2 and October 3.  \nOne schedule detail deserves attention: Visit Big Bear currently lists Brad on September 30 and again on October 6\, but Barrel 33’s own live event calendar currently identifies September 30 as Locals Night and a Pirate Ship Wine Cruise rather than a Brad performance\, and it does not currently display an October 6 Brad event. Because the venue is the primary source\, this guide treats those two performances as unconfirmed and recommends checking Barrel 33 directly before planning around them.  \nVisitors traveling from outside Big Bear can easily build a cabin stay around one of these performances. A Chalet currently offers Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City vacation rentals for couples\, families\, and groups\, making an overnight stay practical if you’d rather enjoy the evening without immediately driving down the mountain afterward.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear live music trip. \nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nLive Music at Barrel 33\n\n\nCurrent event period\nSeptember 2026 into early October 2026\n\n\nVenue\nBarrel 33\n\n\nAddress\n40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nPerformance times\nVary by date\, generally between 1:30 PM and 8:00 PM\n\n\nConfirmed upcoming artists\nMatt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, The Blackwells\, and Ryan Bieber\n\n\nAdmission\nNo universal live-music admission charge is currently published on Barrel 33’s event listings\n\n\nFood and drinks\nFood\, craft beer\, and wine are promoted alongside the live music\n\n\nParking\nUse appropriate public parking serving The Village and follow posted restrictions\n\n\nPhone\n909-878-0838\n\n\nRecommended arrival\nNo official early-arrival time is published; arriving 15-30 minutes before your chosen performance is a practical buffer\n\n\nOfficial venue calendar\nBarrel 33 Events\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear describes the live-music series as a recurring event from September 1 through October 6\, while Barrel 33’s own calendar confirms individual performances through October 3 at the time of writing. Because performer schedules can change\, use the venue calendar as the final source before traveling.  \nWhat Is Live Music at Barrel 33?\nLive Music at Barrel 33 is a series of individual acoustic and live-band performances at Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake’s Village area. Rather than one large concert with a fixed lineup and ticket package\, the venue schedules different performers on selected afternoons and evenings. \nBarrel 33 promotes these performances alongside food\, craft beer\, wine\, and a casual social atmosphere. That makes the series easy to add to a Big Bear itinerary without dedicating an entire day to an event.  \nSome performances are early-afternoon acoustic sets\, while many Friday and Saturday appearances run from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM. This variation is useful for travelers: an afternoon Brad performance can fit between daytime activities\, while an evening show can serve as the main plan after hiking\, lake time\, shopping\, or sightseeing. \nThe current event descriptions do not publish reserved seating arrangements\, a universal cover charge\, or a formal concert-style admission process. Visitors should therefore check the listing for their specific date rather than assuming every performance operates identically. \nWhen Is Live Music at Barrel 33 in 2026?\nThe official Barrel 33 calendar and Visit Big Bear currently confirm a substantial September schedule\, followed by Ryan Bieber performances on October 2 and October 3.  \nAs of September 10\, the confirmed upcoming schedule is: \n\n\n\nDate\nPerformer\nTime\n\n\n\n\nSeptember 11\, 2026\nMatt & Emily\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 12\, 2026\nLocal Legends\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 15\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nSeptember 17\, 2026\nTanner\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 18\, 2026\nSergio Snow\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 19\, 2026\nSergio Snow\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 22\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nSeptember 25\, 2026\nMatt & Emily\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 26\, 2026\nThe Blackwells\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nSeptember 29\, 2026\nBrad\n1:30 PM-3:30 PM\n\n\nOctober 2\, 2026\nRyan Bieber\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\nOctober 3\, 2026\nRyan Bieber\n5:00 PM-8:00 PM\n\n\n\nThese dates and times are confirmed on Barrel 33’s current official event calendar.  \nEarlier September performances included Brad on September 1 and September 8\, Katie on September 4\, Austin Rogers on September 5\, and Dana on September 6.  \nWhat About the September 30 and October 6 Performances?\nThere is currently a discrepancy between published sources. \nVisit Big Bear’s event page lists Brad on September 30 from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM and Brad on October 6 from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM.  \nHowever\, Barrel 33’s own current calendar lists September 30 as Locals Night from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM and also lists a Pirate Ship Wine Cruise that evening. It does not currently show a September 30 Brad performance or October 6 Brad event.  \nBecause Barrel 33 is the venue and primary source\, travelers should not plan a trip specifically around September 30 or October 6 live music unless the venue confirms those performances. This is exactly the kind of schedule detail worth rechecking shortly before your visit. \nWhere Is Barrel 33 in Big Bear Lake?\nBarrel 33 is located at: \nBarrel 33\n40754 Village Dr.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315\nPhone: 909-878-0838 \nVisit Big Bear confirms the venue at 40754 Village Dr. in Big Bear Lake. Barrel 33’s own event calendar also lists the Village Drive location and the same phone number.  \nThe location places visitors in The Village area\, so a live-music performance can be combined naturally with time spent walking through central Big Bear Lake before or afterward. \nWhat Can Visitors Expect?\nThe experience depends somewhat on the day you attend. Brad’s Tuesday appearances are promoted as Afternoon Acoustic sessions and currently run from 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM. Friday and Saturday live-music events usually run in the early evening\, often from 5:00 PM to 8:00 PM.  \nBarrel 33 promotes live music alongside: \n\nFood\nCraft beer\nWine\nIndividual acoustic artists and bands\nA casual Village setting\n\nThe venue’s current event descriptions do not publish a detailed set list\, number of performance breaks\, stage schedule\, reserved-seat system\, or performer-specific admission fee. Those details should not be invented or assumed from another date. \nIf seeing a particular artist is the reason for your trip\, check Barrel 33’s calendar on the day of the performance. Live entertainment schedules can change due to artist availability\, weather\, or venue considerations. \nTickets\, Parking\, and Transportation\nDo You Need Tickets for Live Music at Barrel 33?\nBarrel 33’s current individual live-music listings do not publish a universal ticket price or cover charge. The venue simply invites guests to attend for live music\, food\, craft beer\, and wine.  \nThat does not guarantee that every future performance will always operate without special admission terms. Check your chosen date or call 909-878-0838 if admission arrangements are important to your plans. \nWhere Should You Park?\nBarrel 33 is located in The Village area of Big Bear Lake. Visitors should use appropriate public parking serving The Village and follow all posted parking restrictions. \nWeekend evenings can bring more activity to The Village\, so leave enough time to park and walk to Barrel 33 rather than arriving exactly when the band is scheduled to begin. \nHow Early Should You Arrive?\nNo official early-arrival requirement is published. A practical approach is to reach the area 15 to 30 minutes before the scheduled start\, particularly for Friday and Saturday evening performances. \nThis is a travel-planning recommendation rather than an official Barrel 33 check-in rule. If the venue publishes different instructions for your date\, follow those instead. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nLive music at Barrel 33 requires relatively little preparation\, but a few items can make your evening easier: \n\nValid identification: Bring appropriate ID if you intend to purchase alcoholic beverages.\nA warm layer: Big Bear evenings can cool quickly\, even after a warm afternoon.\nYour chosen event details: Confirm the artist and start time before leaving.\nA transportation plan: Decide how you’ll return to your cabin if you plan to drink.\nA charged phone: Useful for navigation\, parking\, and checking last-minute venue updates.\n\nBecause the performances are at an established Village venue rather than a trail\, lake\, or mountaintop event\, you do not need specialized outdoor equipment. \nIs Live Music at Barrel 33 Family Friendly?\nThe current live-music listings do not publish a universal age restriction. However\, Barrel 33 serves craft beer and wine\, so families should not assume that every scheduled event has the same age policy. \nIf you’re considering attending with children or teenagers\, contact Barrel 33 at 909-878-0838 to confirm the venue’s current policy for that particular performance. \nSimilarly\, no detailed accessibility information is included in the individual live-music listings. Visitors requiring specific accommodations should contact the venue directly before arrival. \nHow to Make a Weekend of Live Music at Barrel 33\nArrival Day: Check Into Big Bear\nIf you’re coming from outside the mountains for a Friday or Saturday performance\, consider arriving earlier in the afternoon rather than trying to time a mountain drive around a 5:00 PM start. \nCheck into your cabin\, unpack\, and review the latest Barrel 33 listing. That gives your group time to settle in before heading toward The Village. \nBefore the Music: Explore The Village\nArriving in The Village ahead of the performance gives you flexibility if parking takes longer than expected. Spend some time walking around the area and then head to Barrel 33 before your chosen artist begins. \nFor Tuesday afternoon performances with Brad\, the 1:30 PM to 3:30 PM schedule leaves plenty of time for another Big Bear activity afterward. Friday and Saturday shows running until 8:00 PM work better as the main evening plan.  \nAfter the Performance: Return to Your Cabin\nAfter an evening performance\, an overnight cabin provides an easy place for your group to wind down without immediately starting a long drive out of Big Bear. \nIf anyone has been drinking alcohol\, use a safe transportation plan rather than driving. Planning that before the performance keeps the evening simple. \nCheck A Chalet cabin availability for your Barrel 33 live-music dates. \nNext Morning: Enjoy More of Big Bear\nUse the following morning for another local experience before departure. Depending on the season and conditions\, that could mean time around Big Bear Lake\, an appropriate trail outing\, or a relaxed morning in The Village. \nIf you’re attending Ryan Bieber on October 2 or October 3\, remember that early October mountain conditions can differ noticeably from September. Check the weather before packing and before any outdoor plans. \nWhere to Stay for Live Music at Barrel 33\nBecause Barrel 33 is in Big Bear Lake\, visitors should concentrate on Big Bear Lake and nearby Big Bear City accommodations. Staying in Lake Arrowhead solely for an evening at Barrel 33 would add unnecessary mountain travel. \nA Chalet currently lists vacation rentals in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City\, with properties suited to different group sizes. Its current collection includes two-bedroom stays such as Heavenly Bay Retreat\, Jaybird Cabin\, and Maverick’s Cabin; three-bedroom Conklin Canopy; and four-bedroom choices including Boulder Landing\, Rustic Ridge\, and Elevated Escape.  \nFor a couple attending a single acoustic or evening performance\, a smaller cabin can keep the trip straightforward. A group of friends planning dinner\, live music\, and another day in Big Bear may appreciate additional bedrooms and common living space. \nA Chalet’s current site also lists a one-bedroom Bear Den\, providing another smaller-stay option.  \nDo not assume that every property has identical amenities. If a kitchen\, hot tub\, pet-friendly policy\, laundry facilities\, or a particular number of parking spaces matters to your trip\, verify that feature on the current property listing before booking. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Event Weekend Cabin\nChoose your performer first. Start with the live schedule so you know whether you’re planning around a Tuesday acoustic afternoon\, a Thursday performance\, or a Friday or Saturday evening show. \nVerify the date directly with Barrel 33. This is especially important for September 30 and October 6 because the tourism calendar and venue calendar currently conflict. \nStay in the Big Bear area. Barrel 33 is in Big Bear Lake\, making Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City the logical lodging choice. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Couples can compare smaller stays\, while groups of friends may prefer several bedrooms and shared gathering space. \nCheck parking rules at your cabin. If several friends are arriving in separate vehicles\, verify the property’s maximum allowed vehicle count. \nPlan for the evening after the music. An overnight stay is particularly useful for shows finishing at 8:00 PM and for anyone who wants to enjoy Barrel 33’s beverage selection without a long drive afterward. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen is Live Music at Barrel 33 in 2026?\nThe current series includes numerous September dates and confirmed performances on October 2 and October 3. Visit Big Bear lists the broader recurring period through October 6\, but Barrel 33’s own current calendar should be treated as the final source for individual performances.  \nWhere is Live Music at Barrel 33?\nThe performances take place at Barrel 33\, 40754 Village Dr.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315.  \nWho is performing at Barrel 33 in September 2026?\nUpcoming confirmed September performers include Matt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, and The Blackwells. Performance dates and times vary.  \nDo you need tickets for the live music?\nNo universal ticket price or cover charge is currently published for the standard live-music performances. Check Barrel 33’s calendar or call the venue before attending if admission terms are important to your trip. \nWhere do you park for Barrel 33?\nBarrel 33 is in The Village area. Use appropriate public parking serving The Village\, obey posted restrictions\, and allow extra time on busy evenings. \nCan kids attend Live Music at Barrel 33?\nThe current event listings do not publish a universal age restriction. Because Barrel 33 serves beer and wine\, contact the venue to confirm its current policy before bringing younger guests. \nWhere should I stay for Live Music at Barrel 33?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is the most convenient area. A Chalet currently offers both smaller cabins and multi-bedroom vacation rentals in the Big Bear area. Browse A Chalet’s current availability for your music weekend. \nPlan Your Live Music at Barrel 33 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nLive Music at Barrel 33 2026 gives Big Bear visitors an easy way to add local entertainment to a mountain trip without committing to an all-day festival. The remaining September schedule includes afternoon acoustic sessions and evening performances by Matt & Emily\, Local Legends\, Brad\, Tanner\, Sergio Snow\, and The Blackwells\, followed by Ryan Bieber on October 2 and October 3.  \nCheck the venue calendar before traveling\, especially if you’re planning around a particular artist. The September 30 and October 6 entries shown by Visit Big Bear are not currently matched by Barrel 33’s primary event calendar\, so those dates should be confirmed directly with the venue.  \nFor travelers coming from outside the mountains\, an overnight stay can make the experience much easier. Arrive earlier\, check into your cabin\, spend time in The Village\, enjoy the performance\, and return somewhere comfortable afterward instead of immediately driving out of Big Bear. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around Live Music at Barrel 33 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/live-music-at-barrel-33-29/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T170000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260915T190000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215620Z
CREATED:20261016T215620Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215620Z
UID:13968-1789491600-1789498800@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Taco Tuesday & Latin Night at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites
DESCRIPTION:Taco Tuesday & Latin Night Big Bear 2026: Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nTaco Tuesday & Latin Night Big Bear 2026 is a recurring food-and-music event at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites by Hilton\, 41820 Big Bear Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. \nThe current event description separates the week into two experiences: Taco Tuesday runs from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM on Tuesdays\, while Latin Night runs from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM on Sundays and features a live DJ. \nVisit Big Bear’s current calendar confirms the event at the Hilton property and shows recurring Tuesday listings extending through the 2026-27 season. However\, some of the tourism calendar’s recurrence metadata is inconsistent\, so visitors should use the event description for the Tuesday/Sunday format and verify their exact date before heading over. \nParking is available at the Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites property. No admission charge\, cover fee\, taco pricing\, age restriction\, or reservation requirement is currently published in the event information\, so those details should be confirmed directly with the venue if they matter to your plans. \nFor travelers building an easy evening into a Big Bear getaway\, an A Chalet cabin provides a comfortable home base before dinner and after the music\, especially if you want more space for a group or prefer preparing the rest of your meals at the cabin. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear getaway. \nTaco Tuesday & Latin Night Big Bear 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nTaco Tuesday & Latin Night at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites\n\n\nTaco Tuesday\nTuesdays\, 5:00 PM-7:00 PM\n\n\nLatin Night\nSundays\, 6:00 PM-9:00 PM\n\n\nVenue\nHampton Inn Big Bear Lake / Home2 Suites by Hilton Big Bear Lake\n\n\nAddress\n41820 Big Bear Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nTuesday experience\nTaco Tuesday evening\n\n\nSunday experience\nLatin Night with a live DJ\n\n\nAdmission\nNo cover charge or ticket requirement is currently published\n\n\nFood pricing\nNot currently published in the event listing\n\n\nParking\nAvailable at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites by Hilton\n\n\nAge policy\nNo event-specific age restriction is currently published\n\n\nVenue phone\nHampton Inn: 909-866-0000; Home2 Suites: 909-866-0005\n\n\nCurrent visitor information\nVisit Big Bear – Hampton Inn Big Bear Lake\n\n\n\nWhat Is Taco Tuesday & Latin Night at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites?\nTaco Tuesday & Latin Night is a recurring social event hosted at the shared Hampton Inn and Home2 Suites property on Big Bear Boulevard. \nRather than being one identical event repeated twice a week\, the listing describes two different experiences. \nTuesdays focus on Taco Tuesday\, giving locals and visitors an early-evening food option from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM. \nSundays shift to Latin Night from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM\, with the event description specifically advertising a live DJ and a more music-focused atmosphere. \nThe format makes the event useful for travelers who want something casual to do in the evening without committing to a major festival\, concert\, or ticketed attraction. \nWhen Is Taco Tuesday in Big Bear Lake?\nThe event description lists Taco Tuesday every Tuesday from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM. \nVisit Big Bear’s current Hampton Inn directory confirms recurring Taco Tuesday & Latin Night calendar entries at the property\, including September 15\, September 22\, September 29\, and October 6\, 2026\, with additional Tuesday dates appearing beyond those. \nThe tourism calendar’s recurrence system occasionally displays unusual start and end ranges\, so visitors should not rely on one broad date span as proof that every Tuesday indefinitely is confirmed. \nIf you are planning around a specific Tuesday\, check the current Visit Big Bear calendar or call the Hilton property before going. \nWhen Is Latin Night in Big Bear?\nThe supplied event description lists Latin Night every Sunday from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nLatin Night is described as featuring a live DJ\, making it the more music-driven half of the recurring series. \nCurrent indexed Visit Big Bear results are clearer about the recurring Tuesday calendar entries than the individual Sunday listings\, so the Sunday schedule is best treated as the published event format while still being verified for a specific date. \nNo DJ name\, music lineup\, dance instruction\, or special performance schedule is currently published. \nWhere Is Taco Tuesday & Latin Night Held?\nThe event takes place at the shared Hilton hotel property at: \nHampton Inn Big Bear Lake / Home2 Suites by Hilton Big Bear Lake\n41820 Big Bear Blvd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nVisit Big Bear currently lists both hotels at this address. \nThe location sits along Big Bear Boulevard between the lake and the Snow Summit area\, making it convenient for travelers who are already spending the day elsewhere in Big Bear Lake. \nWhat Can You Expect on Taco Tuesday?\nThe current description keeps Taco Tuesday simple: come by for a Tuesday evening centered on tacos. \nNo current public listing confirms the taco menu\, price per taco\, drink specials\, service format\, vegetarian options\, or whether food is served from a dedicated restaurant\, bar\, or event station. \nBecause those details can change\, visitors who have dietary restrictions or are planning specifically around a dinner special should call the venue before arriving. \nThe 5:00 PM-7:00 PM window makes Taco Tuesday a useful early dinner stop before returning to a cabin\, visiting The Village\, or settling in for the evening. \nWhat Can You Expect on Latin Night?\nSunday’s Latin Night is advertised from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM with a live DJ. \nThe description promotes a groovy\, social evening but does not currently publish a named DJ\, specific Latin music genres\, dance floor details\, lessons\, or a dress code. \nVisitors should therefore think of Latin Night as a casual DJ-centered hotel event rather than assume it is a formal salsa class\, nightclub event\, or ticketed dance production. \nIf dancing or a particular music style is important to you\, confirm that week’s programming directly with the venue. \nIs Taco Tuesday & Latin Night Free?\nNo ticket price or cover charge is currently listed in the public event information. \nThat does not mean all food and drinks are free. Taco Tuesday is a food event\, and normal charges for food and beverages should be expected unless the venue advertises a specific promotion. \nThe event listing also does not currently publish minimum purchase requirements or reservation requirements. \nFor the most accurate same-week information\, contact the hotel before attending. \nDo You Need to Be a Hotel Guest?\nThe event is promoted on Visit Big Bear’s public events calendar rather than only as a private hotel amenity\, which indicates it is intended for visitors beyond overnight hotel guests. \nHowever\, the listing does not spell out a formal public-access policy. \nIf you are staying elsewhere in Big Bear and want to attend\, especially with a large group\, calling ahead is a practical way to confirm seating and access. \nIs Latin Night 21 and Over?\nNo event-specific age restriction is currently published. \nBecause the gathering takes place at a hotel and may include alcohol service\, normal California alcohol laws will apply to drinks\, but that does not automatically make the entire event 21-and-over. \nFamilies or guests under 21 should check with the venue if age policy is important to their plans. \nParking at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites\nThe event listing states that parking is available at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites by Hilton. \nUnlike events in The Village that may require public parking several blocks away\, this one is hosted directly at the hotel property. \nVisitors should follow onsite signs and avoid occupying spaces reserved for hotel guests\, accessible parking\, loading areas\, or other restricted uses. \nIf the event is particularly busy\, hotel staff can provide the best guidance on where non-guests should park. \nWhat Should You Bring?\nThis is a casual food-and-entertainment event\, so very little special preparation is required. \n\nPhoto ID if you plan to purchase alcohol\nA payment method for food and drinks\nA light jacket or warmer layer for the walk to and from your vehicle\nYour hotel or cabin transportation plan\nAny dietary questions you want to confirm before ordering\n\nBig Bear evenings can cool down quickly even when the daytime weather is mild\, so keeping an extra layer in the car is useful. \nCan You Combine the Event With Other Big Bear Activities?\nYes. The relatively short evening windows make both versions of the event easy to build into a larger itinerary. \nOn Tuesday\, you can spend the day hiking\, sightseeing\, shopping\, or enjoying the lake\, then stop for Taco Tuesday between 5:00 PM and 7:00 PM. \nOn Sunday\, Latin Night provides an evening option after a full day outdoors. \nThe Hampton Inn and Home2 Suites are also located less than two miles from The Village according to Visit Big Bear’s current hotel information\, so visitors can combine the event with shopping\, dining\, or a Village stroll. \nHow to Make a Big Bear Weekend of Latin Night\nFriday: Check Into Your Cabin\nArrive in Big Bear Lake and settle into an A Chalet cabin for the weekend. \nHaving your own kitchen and living space can make the trip feel less structured than staying around a fixed hotel itinerary\, especially for groups or families. \nSaturday: Spend the Day Exploring Big Bear\nUse Saturday for outdoor recreation\, The Village\, Big Bear Lake\, or another seasonal event. \nReturn to your cabin in the evening and enjoy a relaxed night before Sunday’s activities. \nSunday: Enjoy a Slow Mountain Day\nPlan a late breakfast\, afternoon sightseeing\, or a walk before getting ready for Latin Night. \nBecause the event begins at 6:00 PM\, there is plenty of time to enjoy the day first. \nSunday Evening: Head to Latin Night\nArrive at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites for the 6:00 PM-9:00 PM event and enjoy the live DJ atmosphere. \nIf you’re attending specifically for dancing\, confirm the current week’s programming before leaving your cabin. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear weekend. \nHow to Build Taco Tuesday Into a Midweek Getaway\nTaco Tuesday also works well as part of a quieter midweek Big Bear trip. \nArrive Monday or Tuesday\, spend the afternoon exploring\, and head to the Hilton property for the 5:00 PM-7:00 PM Taco Tuesday window. \nAfter dinner\, return to the cabin or continue your evening elsewhere in Big Bear Lake. \nMidweek travel can also make it easier to build a flexible itinerary without centering the entire trip around one event. \nWhere to Stay for Taco Tuesday & Latin Night Big Bear 2026\nAn A Chalet property in Big Bear Lake is a practical choice for this recurring event because the Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites venue is located directly in Big Bear Lake. \nFor smaller groups\, Dream Lake Cabin is currently listed for up to four guests with two bedrooms and one bathroom. Verified amenities include a kitchen\, Wi-Fi\, outdoor grill\, air conditioning\, and pet-friendly accommodations. \nFor larger groups\, Conklin Canopy is currently listed with three bedrooms\, two bathrooms\, and space for up to eight guests. \nVerified Conklin Canopy amenities include a fully equipped kitchen\, Wi-Fi\, washer and dryer\, game room\, secure deck\, barbecue\, and parking for up to three vehicles. \nStaying in a cabin can be particularly useful for a casual recurring event like this because you can make the evening only one part of your trip. Cook breakfast at the cabin\, spend the day exploring\, head out for tacos or the DJ\, then return to your own mountain home base afterward. \nAlways review the current property listing before booking to confirm occupancy\, parking limits\, amenities\, pet policies\, and house rules. \nBrowse current A Chalet cabins in Big Bear Lake. \nTips for Booking a Taco Tuesday or Latin Night Getaway\nVerify your specific date. The event is recurring\, but tourism-calendar recurrence fields can contain inconsistencies. \nRemember that Tuesday and Sunday are different experiences. Taco Tuesday is listed from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM\, while Sunday Latin Night runs from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM with a live DJ. \nCall ahead for menu details. Current taco prices and food selections are not publicly listed. \nConfirm age policy if needed. No event-specific age restriction is currently posted. \nStay in Big Bear Lake for convenience. That keeps you close to the event as well as many other popular visitor areas. \nPlan a designated driver if drinking. Do not rely on deciding transportation after the event. \nMake the event part of the trip\, not the entire trip. Its short evening format pairs easily with outdoor recreation\, shopping\, sightseeing\, and relaxing at your cabin. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is Taco Tuesday at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites?\nThe current event description lists Taco Tuesday every Tuesday from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM. Check the current calendar or call the venue to confirm your specific date. \nWhen Is Latin Night in Big Bear?\nLatin Night is listed for Sundays from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM and features a live DJ. \nWhere Is Taco Tuesday & Latin Night Held?\nThe event takes place at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites by Hilton\, 41820 Big Bear Blvd.\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315. \nIs There a Cover Charge?\nNo admission or cover charge is currently published. Food and beverages should be expected to cost extra unless a specific promotion says otherwise. \nDo I Need to Be a Hotel Guest?\nThe event is publicly promoted through Visit Big Bear\, but the listing does not spell out a formal non-guest access policy. Calling ahead is recommended for larger groups or if seating is important. \nIs Parking Available?\nYes. The event listing states that parking is available at the Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites property. \nWhere Should I Stay for Taco Tuesday or Latin Night?\nAn A Chalet cabin in Big Bear Lake gives visitors a convenient base for the event while providing more room to relax\, prepare meals\, and enjoy the rest of a mountain getaway. \nCheck A Chalet availability for your travel dates. \nPlan Your Taco Tuesday & Latin Night Big Bear 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nTaco Tuesday & Latin Night Big Bear 2026 offers two easy ways to add a casual evening activity to a Big Bear Lake trip: tacos on Tuesdays from 5:00 PM to 7:00 PM and a live-DJ Latin Night on Sundays from 6:00 PM to 9:00 PM. \nThe event takes place at Hampton Inn / Home2 Suites by Hilton at 41820 Big Bear Blvd.\, with parking available onsite. Because menu pricing\, cover charges\, age policies\, and individual DJ details are not currently published\, verify those details directly with the venue when they matter to your plans. \nPair the evening with an A Chalet stay and you can enjoy Big Bear at a slower pace: spend the day outdoors\, stop for tacos or Sunday music\, and return to a comfortable cabin instead of treating the event as a quick turnaround trip. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Taco Tuesday & Latin Night Big Bear 2026 getaway. \n\n“`
URL:https://achalet.com/event/taco-tuesday-latin-night-at-hampton-inn-home2-suites-8/
END:VEVENT
BEGIN:VEVENT
DTSTART;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260916T000000
DTEND;TZID=America/Los_Angeles:20260916T000000
DTSTAMP:20261016T215622Z
CREATED:20261016T215622Z
LAST-MODIFIED:20261016T215622Z
UID:13408-1789516800-1789516800@achalet.com
SUMMARY:Plein Air Art Competition
DESCRIPTION:Plein Air Art Competition 2026: Dates\, Schedule\, Travel Tips\, and Where to Stay\nQuick Answer\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 is Visit Big Bear’s third annual plein air competition and a month-long celebration of outdoor painting across the Big Bear Valley. Artists can create their competition work between September 12 and October 10\, 2026\, with gallery events beginning in September and the main Competition Gallery and awards scheduled for October. \nRegistered artists first complete online registration\, then visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard to have their painting substrates stamped. The Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. Artists may have multiple substrates stamped\, but the competition information says there is one submission per artist for galleries.  \nThe main submitted works will be displayed at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake. Visit Big Bear lists the principal competition awards as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. The awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nThis event is particularly well suited to an overnight or multi-night Big Bear trip because artists are intentionally given time to explore the valley\, choose landscapes\, return to locations\, and continue developing their work. A Chalet offers cabins in Big Bear Lake and Big Bear City that can serve as a base between painting sessions\, gallery visits\, and other fall activities.  \nBrowse A Chalet cabins for your Big Bear art trip. \nPlein Air Art Competition 2026 at a Glance\n\n\n\nEvent\nBig Bear Plein Air Art Competition & Festival of Artist Events\n\n\nOrganizer\nVisit Big Bear\n\n\nCompetition year\n2026 — 3rd annual event\n\n\nCreate period\nSeptember 12-October 10\, 2026\n\n\nArtist registration\nOnline registration required before arrival\n\n\nMaximum artists\n75 participants\n\n\nSubstrate stamping\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n\n\nVisitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, Big Bear Lake\, CA 92315\n\n\nVisitor Center hours\nDaily\, 9:00 AM-5:00 PM\n\n\nCompetition Gallery\nDestination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake\n\n\nMain gallery period\nOctober 14-18\, 2026\n\n\nAwards ceremony\nOctober 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM\n\n\nMain awards\n1st: $2\,000; 2nd: $1\,500; 3rd: $500\n\n\nPublic gallery access\nPublic invited; artwork available for purchase\n\n\nParking\nNo single competition-wide parking plan is published; follow instructions and posted rules at each location\n\n\nOfficial website\nVisit Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition\n\n\n\nVisit Big Bear confirms the September 12-October 10 creation period and lists every day in that period as part of the recurring competition calendar.  \nWhat Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition?\nThe Plein Air Art Competition invites artists to create landscapes outdoors in the Big Bear Valley\, working directly from the scenery rather than solely from photographs or studio references. \nWhat distinguishes the Big Bear format is its extended creation period. Artists do not have to arrive on one morning and complete their work under a short time limit. Visit Big Bear gives participants from September 12 through October 10 to explore\, select a location\, paint\, and potentially return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nThat format encourages artists to experience the valley during early fall\, when the character of the landscape can change with light\, weather\, and seasonal conditions. Participants choose their own Big Bear landscape subject rather than being assigned one specific painting location for the main competition. \nFor 2026\, Visit Big Bear has expanded the program with a Festival of Artist Events. Registration in the main competition includes access to the highlighted festival activities\, and artists may choose to participate in one or several. The competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhen Is the Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nThe competition is not a single-day event. Instead\, it unfolds across several phases. \nSeptember 12-October 10: Create\nArtists may visit Big Bear at any point during this period to create their competition work. Before arriving\, participants are instructed to complete online registration. \nAfter reaching Big Bear\, artists must stop at the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center\, 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, to have their painting substrates stamped. Visit Big Bear says artists can have as many substrates stamped as they wish. Completed competition artwork is then returned to the Visitor Center for storage before the gallery opens.  \nOctober 14-18: Competition Gallery\nVisit Big Bear’s dedicated competition page identifies the main gallery and awards period as October 14-18. The event calendar separately shows the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition Gallery running during this same mid-October period at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nThe public is invited to view the competition artwork\, and Visit Big Bear states that artwork at the galleries will be available for purchase.  \nOctober 18: Awards Ceremony\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for Sunday\, October 18 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhat Special Artist Events Are Part of the 2026 Festival?\nThe expanded 2026 Festival of Artist Events adds several opportunities beyond the main competition. \nArtist’s Best Work en Plein Air Gallery — September 18-19\nThis gallery gives participating artists another chance to exhibit and sell plein air work. Visit Big Bear lists a $500 Best of Show award for this portion of the festival.  \nThe Village Paint-Out — September 19\nA dedicated Paint-Out is scheduled in The Village Big Bear Lake on September 19. This provides a more concentrated event within the broader month-long competition period.  \nMoonridge Corridor Paint-Out — October 3\nAnother Paint-Out takes place in the Moonridge Corridor on October 3\, followed by a gallery on October 4. Visit Big Bear lists a separate $500 Best of Show award for this event.  \nMain Competition Gallery and Awards — October 14-18\nThe main competition concludes with the complete collection of submitted works and the awards ceremony. The principal prizes currently published are: \n\nFirst Place: $2\,000\nSecond Place: $1\,500\nThird Place: $500\n\nVisit Big Bear lists John Budicin\, Diane Moore\, and Lisa Mozzini-McDill as distinguished judges associated with the 2026 competition.  \nHow Do Artists Register and Submit Their Work?\nArtists should begin at the official Visit Big Bear Plein Air Competition page and complete the linked registration before traveling to Big Bear. \nThe currently published process is: \n\nComplete registration online before arriving.\nVisit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center during operating hours.\nHave the painting substrates you may use stamped.\nExplore Big Bear and create the work during the September 12-October 10 competition period.\nReturn the completed competition painting to the Visitor Center.\nSubmitted artwork is stored until the Competition Gallery opens.\n\nVisit Big Bear states that the 2026 competition has a maximum of 75 participating artists and allows one submission per artist for the galleries.  \nThe public page reviewed for this guide does not display a clearly stated universal competition registration price in its main event information. Artists should check the live registration form for the current fee and full participation terms rather than relying on a prior year’s price. \nWhere Are the Visitor Center and Competition Gallery?\nBig Bear Lake Visitor Center\n40824 Big Bear Boulevard\nBig Bear Lake\, CA 92315 \nThe Visitor Center is currently listed as open daily from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM and is the location where artists get substrates stamped and return completed competition paintings.  \nDestination Big Bear Event Room\n713 Stocker Rd.\nBig Bear Lake\, CA \nThis is the published location for the Competition Gallery\, the October 18 awards ceremony\, and the public pop-up galleries associated with the festival.  \nNo single parking plan covering every competition location is published. Artists and gallery visitors should follow event instructions and posted parking regulations at the Visitor Center\, The Village\, Moonridge\, and the Destination Big Bear Event Room. \nCan Non-Artists Attend the Plein Air Events?\nYes. The competition is not only for participating painters. \nVisit Big Bear specifically invites art enthusiasts\, collectors\, and members of the community to attend the pop-up galleries and view the complete collection of 2026 competition artwork. Artwork will also be available for purchase.  \nThat makes the October gallery period a good option for visitors who enjoy art but do not plan to enter the competition themselves. \nA public admission charge for the galleries is not stated on the current competition page. Visitors should check the individual gallery listing closer to their chosen date if admission\, opening hours\, or purchasing procedures are important to their plans. \nWhat Should Artists Bring?\nVisit Big Bear does not publish one universal equipment list because plein air painters work with different media and setups. Participants should therefore prepare according to their own painting method and the outdoor mountain environment. \nA practical artist packing list may include: \n\nYour preferred paints\, brushes\, and painting tools\nMultiple eligible substrates to have stamped at the Visitor Center\nPortable easel or pochade setup\nWater or appropriate painting medium\nSun protection\nWeather-appropriate layers\nWater and snacks\nProtective equipment for transporting wet artwork\nAny personal medications or necessities\n\nBecause artists choose their own locations around Big Bear\, conditions can vary significantly between lakefront areas\, forested locations\, The Village\, and higher-elevation viewpoints. Check the forecast and current access conditions before setting up outdoors. \nHow to Make a Weekend of the Plein Air Art Competition\nDay 1: Arrive\, Register\, and Scout Locations\nComplete online registration before leaving home. After arriving in Big Bear\, check into your cabin and visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center between 9:00 AM and 5:00 PM to get your substrates stamped. \nInstead of immediately committing to the first landscape you see\, use part of the afternoon to explore Big Bear Valley and observe how light falls across different areas. \nDay 2: Paint en Plein Air\nStart early enough to work during the light conditions you want to capture. Because the competition gives artists nearly a month to create\, there is no need to treat the trip like a speed-painting contest unless you’re participating in a specific Paint-Out. \nReturning to a cabin between sessions can be useful for organizing supplies\, resting\, eating\, and preparing for another painting period. \nCheck A Chalet cabins for your Plein Air Competition dates. \nReturn for the Gallery or Awards\nArtists do not have to treat the September-October creation period and October gallery as a single continuous stay. Visit Big Bear explicitly allows artists to visit once or return to Big Bear to continue their work.  \nYou might therefore plan one trip for painting and another for the Competition Gallery and October 18 awards ceremony. \nWhere to Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition\nBecause the competition spans the Big Bear Valley and important event locations are in Big Bear Lake\, staying in Big Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City makes practical sense. \nA Chalet currently offers cabins in both destinations\, with properties ranging from smaller two-bedroom stays to larger three- and four-bedroom rentals. Current examples shown in A Chalet’s collection include Heavenly Bay Retreat and Jaybird Cabin with two bedrooms\, Conklin Canopy with three bedrooms\, and Boulder Landing and Rustic Ridge with four bedrooms.  \nFor an artist traveling alone or with a partner\, a smaller cabin can provide a straightforward base between painting sessions. Friends participating together may prefer additional bedrooms and common space for organizing the trip. \nIf you need particular features for an art-focused stay—such as parking capacity\, a kitchen\, laundry facilities\, pet permission\, or additional indoor space—verify them on the current individual property listing before booking. Amenities differ by cabin and should not be assumed. \nA multi-night stay may be especially useful for this competition because participants are encouraged to explore the landscape rather than paint against a single-day deadline. \nBrowse current A Chalet Big Bear cabin availability. \nTips for Booking an Art Competition Weekend Cabin\nChoose your competition phase first. A September painting trip\, October 3 Moonridge Paint-Out weekend\, and October 14-18 gallery trip have different schedules. \nComplete artist registration before traveling. Visit Big Bear specifically instructs participants to register online before arriving. \nAllow time for the Visitor Center. Substrates need to be stamped\, and current Visitor Center hours are 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM. \nConsider more than one night. One of the main advantages of this competition is the ability to explore different Big Bear landscapes and work without a short painting deadline. \nMatch the cabin to your group. Solo artists and couples may prefer smaller accommodations\, while several artists traveling together can compare multi-bedroom rentals. \nVerify amenities directly. Parking\, kitchens\, pet policies\, and other property features vary across A Chalet’s inventory. \nRecheck event details before your trip. Gallery hours\, registration availability\, and individual festival-event instructions can change. \nFrequently Asked Questions\nWhen Is the Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026?\nArtists can create competition work from September 12 through October 10\, 2026. The main gallery period follows in mid-October\, with the awards ceremony scheduled for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nWhere Is the Plein Air Art Competition?\nPainting can take place across the Big Bear Valley. Substrate stamping and artwork drop-off are handled through the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center at 40824 Big Bear Boulevard\, while the main Competition Gallery is held at 713 Stocker Rd.\, Big Bear Lake.  \nDo Artists Need to Register?\nYes. Visit Big Bear directs artists to complete online registration before arriving. The 2026 competition is limited to a maximum of 75 artist participants.  \nWhat Are the 2026 Plein Air Competition Prizes?\nThe main competition awards are currently listed as $2\,000 for first place\, $1\,500 for second place\, and $500 for third place. Separate $500 Best of Show prizes are also listed for certain festival galleries.  \nCan the Public Visit the Galleries?\nYes. Visit Big Bear invites the public\, art enthusiasts\, and collectors to attend the galleries. Artwork is expected to be available for purchase.  \nWhen Is the Awards Ceremony?\nThe awards ceremony is scheduled for October 18\, 2026 at 10:00 AM at the Destination Big Bear Event Room\, 713 Stocker Rd.  \nWhere Should I Stay for the Plein Air Art Competition?\nBig Bear Lake or nearby Big Bear City is practical because the competition is centered throughout the Big Bear Valley and key administrative and gallery locations are in Big Bear Lake. A Chalet offers cabins of several sizes in the Big Bear area. Browse current A Chalet availability. \nPlan Your Plein Air Art Competition 2026 Getaway With A Chalet\nThe Big Bear Plein Air Art Competition 2026 gives painters something many competitions do not: time. From September 12 through October 10\, registered artists can explore Big Bear\, choose their landscape\, paint\, return to refine their work\, and participate in an expanded schedule of festival events.  \nThe 2026 festival includes the Artist’s Best Work gallery on September 18-19\, The Village Paint-Out on September 19\, the Moonridge Paint-Out on October 3\, the Moonridge gallery on October 4\, and the main Competition Gallery and awards activities in mid-October. The awards ceremony is set for October 18 at 10:00 AM.  \nArtists should register online before arriving\, visit the Big Bear Lake Visitor Center to have substrates stamped\, and verify the latest competition instructions before beginning their work. \nFor a trip built around several painting sessions—or a separate return visit for the gallery and awards—an overnight cabin gives you a comfortable base in the Big Bear Valley instead of forcing the creative process into a single day. \nBrowse A Chalet cabins and plan your Big Bear stay around the Plein Air Art Competition 2026.
URL:https://achalet.com/event/plein-air-art-competition-6/
END:VEVENT
END:VCALENDAR